Home

MIKE SHE USER MANUAL VOLUME 1: USER GUIDE

Contents

1. 177 11 USING MIKE SHE WITH MOUSE 2240246 otdu Seaweeds Gud ey 179 11 1 Coupling MIKE SHE and MOUSE 182 11 1 1 Telling MIKE SHE to couple to MOUSE 183 11 1 2 Telling MOUSE that it is coupled to a MIKE SHE model 183 11 1 3 Creating a MsheMouse pfsfile 184 11 14 Output PIGS lt 8 2 ey See See a ae eo ee 186 11 2 Running the Coupled Models 004 187 11 2 1 Warning messages 2002000 187 11 2 2 Water Balance Limitation 188 Working with Water Quality 189 12 SIMULATING WATER QUALITY 222er Here ow dk di 191 12 1 Flow Storing Requirements 2 2 2 nn 192 12 2 Storing of Results 2222428504405 O450 bbe Hertel 192 12 3 Simulation and Time Step Control 193 12 3 1 Calibrating and Verifying the Model 193 13 USING THE FULLY INTEGRATED AD MODULE 195 131 Data WANS sa aaie amp Gia hw Sls dg Be GEE He Oh oe a S 195 13 2 Executing MIKESHEAD 2 04 195 13 3 Working with the TSF Files 2 2 196 13 3 1 Species INDEPENDENT Data 199 13 3 2 Species DEPENDENT Data 206 13 4 Working with the XTSF File 20 4 212 13 4 1 Simulation Parameters 00 214 13 5 Example input files 2 2 eve 5544364 sahen reis
2. 178 MIKE SHE Se 11 USING MIKE SHE WITH MOUSE Coupling MOUSE and MIKE SHE allows you to simulate the effect of urban drainage and sewer systems on the surface subsurface hydrology The use of the integrated MIKE SHE MOUSE system is not very different from establishing a stand alone MOUSE model and a stand alone MIKE SHE model In principle there are three basic set up steps to have a cou pled MIKE SHE MOUSE model 1 Establish a MOUSE hydraulic model as a stand alone model make a performance test and if possible a rough calibration using prescribed inflow and boundaries 2 Establish a MIKE SHE model that includes the overland flow compo nent and optionally the saturated zone and unsaturated zone compo nents 3 Couple MIKE SHE and MOUSE by defining the locations where MOUSE should interact with MIKE SHE When MIKE SHE runs it will call MOUSE and ask it to perform a MOUSE time step If the end of the MIKE SHE time step has not yet been reached MIKE SHE will ask MOUSE to calculate the next MOUSE time step The MOUSE model will run normally if it is launched directly from MOUSE Indata Precipitation and temperature MOUSE gr MIKE SHE Topography Surface runoff with Evaporation Precipitation Landuse Geological interpretation f i za connegtion Drainage conditions Ditches creeks rivers etc Pipe network Overlandfloy Pe ee Groundwater x flow in different faye 5
3. 27 Flow Storing Requirements 228 Cc Font Settings Dialog 268 Calculator 275 336 Comparison statistics 371 G Complexes 380 General Information 257 Constant parameter 368 Geologic Model 47 Coupling MIKE 11 to MIKE SHE 163 Conductivity values 49 All branches 169 Lenses cna kek FAA ee 50 Bed Leakage 174 GeoViewer 158 Bed Topography 173 Graphical and font settings 262 Exchange Type 170 Graphical Settings 267 FloodArea 172 Graphical View 260 322 Leakage Coefficient 170 Grid Editor Coupling MIKE 11 to MIKE SHEFlood 2D to 3D Layer Mapping 299 Code wk de wo eis ha BO Be RS 173 File to Copy awards 298 Coupling MIKE SHE to MOUSE 183 ltem mapping 298 Output Files aaa aaa 186 Operation ch we te eeu a amp eier 299 R N oe sani aaa Bik a at de 187 Sub area position 299 Crop an ee ae 341 Targetfile 298 Time Position 299 D Define H ONG a wane Re re 39 Horizontal Interpolation 49 Model domain 39 Dependent parameter 368 dfs2 file zu ac sr ARK SEE rs 40 Identification tags 366 Integer Grid Codes 290 E Grid File dfs2 290 Editing modes 261 POIGONS Ysera 291 394 MIKE Zero Se Index
4. 162 MIKE SHE MIKE SHE I 10 COUPLING MIKE 11 AND MIKE SHE 10 1 MIKE SHE In the Rivers and Lakes dialogue see Figure 10 1 you can link MIKE SHE to a MIKE 11 model Choosing Edit in this dialogue will open the MIKE 11 simulation sim11 file Rivers and Lakes 007 River Simulation File SIM11 C 5 Testing NA S by MIKE11 WMPIII mikel 1 newSNrSoby Autocal Edit Inundation Areas Flood Codes Bathymetry Figure 10 1 Rivers and Lakes dialogue for specifying the MIKE 11 sim11 file The River Simulation File sim11 is the main MIKE 11 simulation file which contains the file references to all the files used in the MIKE 11 model for MIKE SHE this is primarily the river network file nwk11 the cross section database xns11 the boundary condition file bnd11 and the hydrodynamic setup file hd11 In the Rivers and Lakes dialogue there are two Inundation Areas options These options are always available for input but are only used if you have selected specific options in the MIKE SHE Links dialogue Figure 10 2 for calculating inundation areas These options are e Flood codes used for the Area Inundation using Flood Codes areal source sink V 2 p 239 option in MIKE 11 and e Bathymetry used to modify the defined topography with a more detailed flood plain topography in areas where Flood Codes have been defined Integrating a MIKE SHE and a MIKE 11 model is not very diffe
5. EndSect MIKESHE_WaterBalance_ConfigFile last line in the file 139 LEA Using the Water Balance Tool When making custom water balance types the format of the default water balance configuration file must be maintained Variable names including names in square brackets are case sensitive and the number of spaces in variable names must be consistent with the default configuration file Unfortunately we cannot provide for support for custom water balance files 8 6 Water Balance Restrictions 8 6 1 Linear Reservoir and Simple Sub catchment Overland Flow The water balance calculations have the following restrictions on single cell sub catchment water balances with the SZ Linear Reservoir and Simple OL e single cell won t be correct for TOTAL OL SZ water balances But can be used for UZ and others e sub catchment For TOTAL and OL water balances the smallest valid water balance sub catchment is one Overland flow zone i e topo graphical zone within one hydrological sub catchment If a water bal ance sub catchment excludes part of an Overland flow zone within one hydrological sub catchment the water balances will be wrong in many cases because the OL storage is not necessarily uniformly distributed over one Overland flow zone while there is only one value for flows between OL flow zones source sink terms etc e For TOTAL and SZ water balances Same restrictions apply but here with the
6. 4 1960000 1980000 meter m 1 3 s HN Above 26 24 26 22 24 20 22 18 20 16 18 14 16 12 14 10 12 8 10 8 6 4 6 2 4 0 2 2 0 Below 2 Undefined Yalue ai m L_ m L_ a al L_ se L_ m L_ mj L_ Once the pre preprocessed data in the fif file has been loaded then the data tree reflects all the spatial data defined in the model set up tab In MIKE SHE Getting Started 63 LEA Running Your MIKE SHE Model other words if the overland flow is not included in the Simulation Specifi cation V 2 p 26 dialogue then the Overland item will not be included in the pre processed data tree Model Domain and Grid The model domain and grid item displays the grid code values required for the MIKE SHE model This differs slightly from the Model Domain and Grid V 2 p 52 item in the Setup Tab In the fif file all cells outside the model domain are assigned a value of zero compared to the Setup tab were the cells outside of the model boundary are delete values Unlike other data items in the pre processed tab you cannot save the pre processed model domain and grid to a dfs2 file and re use it in the Setup Tab because the Model Domain and Grid V 2 p 52 item requires delete values outside of the model domain Precipitation and Evapotranspiration The precipitation and evapotranspiration items display the integer station codes for the time series define
7. 1 T 18187 181847 161657 16 17 07 181717 18177 1617 37 161747 ws 161807 2001 07 12 e Mean Step Accumulated A line is drawn from the previous timestep till the current timestep with the value at current timestep Time Series Editor 265 I Properties Mean Step Accumulated gt Untitled undefined 105338 105348 10538 1054 08 105418 10 5428 1054 38 105448 105458 1055 08 2001 08 10 e Reverse Mean Step Accumulated A line is drawn from the current timestep till the next timestep with the value at current timestep 266 MIKE Zero Graphical Settings Dialog LEA Reverse Mean Step Accumulated Untitled undefined 17 5 Graphical Settings Dialog This dialog is used to change the settings of the graphical view Time Series Editor 267 I Properties Graphical Settings bs E x Graphics r Points Drawn as I 34 Items i 21 2 Duration of year W Display X Oo ol l el ol ajy Paints Lines Color TE GP Pointe ee Labels RR Point size 1 32292 B A Wave height RSEN Y Points Lines r Lines Polygons Drawn as Labels F Display Line style Lar E A Wave direction Points Color H Polygon fill style l Li r rps Thickness a B A Profile no Y Points r Text Drawn as ee F Display Justification zj Labels FY Wave period Color u Background style I F Points On the left hand side the
8. 231 LAA Working with Particle Tracking 14 2 Executing MIKE SHE PT MIKE SHE PT is executed from a DOS prompt similar to the MIKE SHE AD Open the DOS prompt and navigate to the directory of interest i e the directory where the transport setup file is located The simulation is started by the command Mshe_AdvectionDispersion apv projectname tsf A window similar to the Water Movement simulation showing the simula tion status will appear MIKE SHE PT may also be executed in batch mode simply by writing the above command into a file given the extension bat and execute this file from a DOS prompt This allows for successive simulation of various models 14 3 Output from the PT simulations The result files will be located in a folder with the same name as the tsf file Usually but not necessarily the same file name is used for both the WM and PT simulations The PT result files are e projectname PTRES An ASCII file in pfs format listing the abstrac tion wells and the computational cells where abstraction occurs Used for retrieval of particle location see PT Output Retrieval Utility V 1 p 234 e projectname PTREG and projectname trf Two binary files that can not be opened directly e projectname PTBIN An optional binary file containing all of the par ticle locations at every saved time step Individual path lines can be extracted using the PTBin Output Retrieval Utility V p 233 e proje
9. mat Line item Comment PTBinRetrieval File header FileVersion 1 PTBin_file name projectname ptbin the path location and name of the saved PTBin file Output_file name PTBin_output txt the ASCII output file where you want to save the path lines NrOfParticles 5 Number of particle paths required Particle_IDs 3000 5000 6000 7000 7200 ID numbers of the required particles EndSect PTBinRetrieval Closing line Particle IDs can be found by using the PT Output Retrieval utility 233 LAA Working with Particle Tracking 14 5 PT Output Retrieval Utility Previously retrieval of particle locations was made by the program called MShe_AdvectionDispersion_SzOr exe and an associated text file describing what to extract from the MIKE SHE AD result file This approach can still be used however a new and easier approach has been developed which will be described in this section The old approach is described in the old MIKE SHE Advection Dispersion User Guide which can be provided on request The PT output retrieval utility can be used to extract Arc View shape files from particle tracking results It allows filtering the results for e Destination type Specific sink types drain river unsaturated zone well constant concentration boundary or constant concentration sink Registration codes specified by the user in the tsf file Wells found in t
10. EQ sorp frac Then the general process parameters are given defining which species are included in the process and what type of sorption description applies In the example we have cho sen equilibrium sorption linear without hysteresis Working with Water Quality 217 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 12 MIKE SHE AD xtsf file format and description Line item Comment ED PROCESS PARAMETERS Sorption coefficients The next lines specify the sorption coefficients K1 to K4 valid in the groundwater for the relevant sorption Sorption coefficients No of data elements 1 Depth 99 0 K1 EQ le 6 K2 EO 0 0 K3 KIN 0 0 K4 KIN hyst 0 0 FRE HERP HH HH REPRE HH HR No of data elements 1 description as shown in Table 13 11 These parameters are Lower layer 999 specified in a similar manner as e g initial concentrations K1 EQ MAPS Kd dfs2 1 The input consists of one or more data elements Each data K2 EQ 0 0 element consists of a lower layer input indicating the layer K3 KIN 0 0 down to which the input is valid and the four parameters K4 KIN hyst 0 0 The data elements should cover all layers in the model i e the last data element s Lower layer input should be equal to or larger than the lowest layer number The layer inter vals in the data elements may also not overlap If a con stan
11. Total waterbalance General water balance of the entire model setup Error of each component The water balance error of each model compo nent 136 MIKE SHE Standard Water Balance Types Se Table 8 6 Water balance types available in the default configuration files Water balance type Description Snow Melt component Snow Melt component water balance items Canopy Interception compo nent Canopy Interception component water balance items Overland flow Overland component water balance Overland flow detailed Detailed Overland component water balance Unsaturated Zone Unsaturated zone component water balance Unsaturated Zone detailed Unsaturated zone component water balance Saturated Zone Saturated zone component water balance depth integrated Saturated Zone layer s Saturated zone component water balance each or specified layer Saturated Zone detailed Detailed Saturated zone component water bal ance depth integrated Saturated Zone detailed layer s Detailed Saturated zone component water bal ance each or specified layer Saturated Zone Linear Reser voir Saturated Zone component water balance for the linear reservoir Saturated Zone layers Lin ear Reservoir Saturated Zone component water balance for the linear reservoir Irrigation component Irrigation component water ba
12. 227 oa Working with Particle Tracking 14 1 1 Flow Storing Requirements Particle transport calculations in MIKE SHE PT are based on the ground water flows from a MIKE SHE WM simulation In principle only ground water fluxes are needed but to ensure that all the needed WM result data types are stored the user has to specify that results should be stored for an AD run in the WM input i e tic the appropriate box under Storing of Results in the MIKE SHE WM GUL The user can choose between SZ only and All hydraulic components however for PT simulations SZ only will be sufficient since particle tracking is only calculated for the saturated zone The simulated particle distribution is stored with a desired frequency in the MIKE SHE WM GUI under Storing of results gt Grid series out put It is important that the SZ and SZ flow use the same storing fre quency in order to run the following PT simulation The WM result files to be used in the PT simulations will be located in a folder with the same name as the SHE file 14 1 2 Specification of Well Fields To be able to retrieve particle locations based on well fields see section 14 5 PT Output Retrieval Utility p 234 it is necessary to specify the well fields in the MIKE SHE well database file WEL 14 1 3 Input to the PT Simulations Much of the required information for the PT simulation is given in the tsf input file as described i
13. Crop to coordinates i jo Cancel dil Help P Flux m 3 s m V Q Flux m3 s m af m Time From T o Date fi 996 04 13 05 00 004 x fi 996 04 13 05 04 1 4 x Time step fo E a Spatial cropping Use this option to crop the data to a smaller spatial coverage Choose a rectangular area either as the current view or as the area described by the coordinates given by you The data outside the selected area will be dis carded Item cropping Use this option to choose the items to keep the rest of the items are dis carded Time cropping Use this option to discard time steps in the dataset The data outside the chosen interval will be discarded The time interval can be selected in terms of the time or the time step number 342 MIKE Zero Image Manager 25 DATA OVERLAY 25 1 Image Manager Import Layers x Image Manager Overlay Manager Image Files OK Cancel Apply Help In the Image Manager you specify the overlay file name and type If you want to save the overlay image together with the specific grid file you can use the Grid State Format p 308 Image Types Enhanced Meta File Select between e Image Files BMP JPG GIF e Shape File From ArcInfo SHR e XYZ File Digitized ascii file with x y and z co ordinates XYZ Grid Editor 343 Si Data Overlay e River File MIKEII File nwk11 e
14. Plant uptake transpiration factor transp factor 0 1 1 0 UZ INPUT PART Matrix Macropore Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 FAK FEF HH HH HH HH HF HH Rp EH KH Species Sorbed Solute Species name FR INPUT PART Plant uptake transpiration factor transp factor 0 1 0 0 UZ INPUT PART Matrix Macropore Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 HH FL HH HH FH FH HF HH RR da Species degradable Species name FR INPUT PART Plant uptake transpiration factor transp factor 0 1 0 5 UZ INPUT PAR Matrix Macropore Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 AAAAKAAKEAALAAEAKE REE AL AER HH HR HH HH RHH Line item Comment SPECIES DEPENDENT DATA For each species defined in the tsf file this section must FEE HFH FH HR HH HH RE RE RE FH RR contain the following parameters Species Plant uptake transpiration factor which determines Species name Solute which fraction of the concentration of the solute the plant takes up Matrix macro pore mass transfer coefficient which is given as for dual porosity diffusion in the groundwater system 216 MIKE SHE Working with the XTSF File Se Table 13 12 MIKE SHE AD xtsf file format and description Line item Comment PROCESS DEPENDENT DATA HALF FH HH FH HH HF HH HH HR HR Process identification Process name sorption Proc type 1 2 3 4 3
15. This line is used to avoid particles being ini tially located in cells with constant head or other constant concentration cell This parameter is usually set to F ONLY SATURATED wE This line is used to avoid particles initially being located in the unsaturated zone of the sub surface system and thereby not being moved This parameter is usually set to T DISTRIBUTION TYPE 3 This line determines how the particles initially are placed in each grid cell There are three options 1 the particles are randomly 3D distributed within each cell 2 the particles are located in a certain horizon tal plane in each layer and in a rigid way If e g the number of particles is specified as 2 the grid is divided into 2x2 quadratic elements and a par ticle is located in the centre of each of these ele ments This means that 4 particles will be introduced in the model The location of the hori zontal plane is given below 3 the particles are located uniformly 3D in each cell and the number of particles introduced in the model will be N where N is the number of particles specified by INITSPEC RELATIVE INITIAL LEVEL This line determines the location of the parti cles if the DISTRIBUTION TYPE is set to 2 The relative level is calculated from the bottom of the cell i e if RELATIVE INITIAL LEVEL is set to 0 4 the particles will initially be located in a hori zontal plane 40 of the
16. If you want to change individual data items to SI or Imperial you can change the items individually Then use the Save and Close button to save your changes back to the MIKEZero ubg file If you want to create special unit versions then you can copy the MIKEZero ubg to a different file name and reload it 26 2 Restoring the default units You can return to your default unit specification at any time by Loading either of the default ubg files MIKEZero_Default_Units ubg MIKEZero_US_Units ubg which are found in the C Program Files Common Files DHNMIKEZero directory Note If you want to save any of your model specific changes then you should first save the MIKEZero ubg to a new name 26 3 Changing the EUM data type of a Parameter When you create a dfsO or dfs2 parameter file you must also define the EUM data type for each parameter in the file When you assign a dfsO or a dfs2 file to a parameter value then MIKE SHE automatically verifies that the correct EUM data type is being used If the wrong data type is present then you will not be able to select OK in the file browser dialogue For example in the following set of dialogues an Evapotranspiration time series was selected instead of the correct Precipitation time series file MIKE SHE Changing the EUM data type of a Parameter LA The first error is in the Select Item tab where there is a message that no Valid Items are found Select Item Period Info
17. Small scale local conditions i e higher conductivities due to more permeable refilling Figure 11 1 MIKE SHE to MOUSE coupling linkages Drainage modelling with MOUSE 179 Using MIKE SHE with MOUSE The exchange between MOUSE and MIKE SHE is calculate based on the following equation k Q C Hse H mouse 11 1 where Q is the exchange between MOUSE and MIKE SHE C is the exchange coefficient k is a head difference exponent and Hsyg Max H eip Zp Zu 11 2 Hyovsz Max H pipo Zr Zm 11 3 where Heen is the head in the MIKE SHE cell Hpipe is the head in the MOUSE pipe Zr is the topographic elevation in the cell and Z is the ele vation of the manhole There are five variations on how to calculate the exchange based on above equations MIKE SHE SZ to MOUSE LINKS This is a leakage based solution in which the head difference exponent is 1 and the exchange coefficient in Equation 11 1 for the flow to or from the pipe is calculated by Csiky 11 4 where Cz is the leakage coefficient see below Ry is the hydraulic radius for the flow see below and L is the length of the MOUSE pipe link in the MIKE SHE cell Leakage Coefficient The leakage coefficient can be defined in two ways Option 1 is the simple method which is to use the pipe leakage coeffi cient specified in the MOUSE ADP file See Telling MOUSE that it is coupled to a MIKE SHE model V p 183 Option 2 uses a combination of
18. The tsf file is divided into four parts e simulation parameters e species independent parameters e species dependent parameters e extra input the bottom of the tsf file In the next sections each of these input parts is explained and illustrated in detail 196 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files Se The output of the MIKE SHE AD is now stored to a number of dfs2 and dfs3 files which can be viewed and processed with the different tools available for these files in MIKE ZERO Table 13 1 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description Line item Comment FILETYPE DATA TYPE VERNO 2001 1 524 The tsf file starts with a header giving the information SETUP DATA for Transport Simulation W HIS FILE OK T F T on the type and version of the input file The current ver sion should be 524 The second line is for information only The file structure was originally conceived for an X Windows interface and therefore contains a check on the integrity which was used by the GUI These lines should be left unchanged RESULTS OF WATERMOVE MENT CALCULATION file name projectname projectname frf The MIKE SHE AD simulation will be based on the flow field heads water depths etc calculated by a MIKE SHE WM calculation No of species SPECIES IN CALCULATION 1 MIKE SHE AD allows for calculati
19. Filename raining Basic Exercises Maps Lower Level dis2 Item Mapping Source item Maps to Target item Lower Level Vv Topography 2D to 3D Layer Mapping G Eoo Sub Area Position jorigin 0 kel ke k origin 0 Time Position Date origin 2000 01 01 10 00 00 Time step origin 0 M Interpolate Operation Type L z Alternatively you can define an operation that you want to do with the file For example if you were editing a topography file you could subtract all of the values in a lower elevation file to obtain a thickness distribution for a layer The principle advantage of this tool is that time varying dfs2 and dfs3 files can be manipulated However if the operations are complex but not time varying then Target file The target file is the current file you are editing in the Grid editor The operations that you do are performed on the target file So if you don t want to edit the target file copy it to a new name first and edit the copy File to Copy The top section of the dialogue is the name of the source file that you want to insert into subtract from add to etc the target file Item mapping If the target file or the source file has more than one item in it then all of the items will be listed here and you will be able to choose whether or not to map the various items to one another 298 MIKE SHE Performing simple
20. MIKE SHE Adding Groundwater SX e The grid cells with drain code 0 do not contain drains and thus no drainage is produced e The grid cells with Drain Code 1 drains to local depression since no boundary is found adjacent to a grid with the same drain code e The grid cells with Drain Code 2 drains to nearest boundary grid with the same drain code Option Distribution The drain type distribution is used to distinguish areas of the model where different drainage options are used Code 1 Drainage in grid cells with a value of 1 is routed downhill based on the value of the drain level specified in Drain Level data item Code 2 Drainage in grid cells with a value of 2 is routed via Drain Codes as specified in the Drain Codes data item Code 3 Drainage in grid cells with a value of 3 is routed to a specified MIKE 11 branch and chainage At the moment this options requires the use of Extra Parameters Code 4 Drainage in grid cells with a value of 4 is routed to a specified MOUSE man hole At the moment this options requires the use of Extra Parameters 3 10 5 MIKE SHE versus MODFLOW The MIKE SHE can be used to simulate all of the processes in the land phase of the hydrologic cycle including overland flow channel flow groundwater flow in the unsaturated zone and saturated groundwater flow MODFLOW on the other hand is restricted to simulating flow only in the saturated groundwater zone Although many of t
21. E37 80 and Sales BD Visits 2006 Canada Septl Topography Edit Create x Topography IV Show grid data Precipitation x Land Use s Evapotranspiration s Rivers and Lakes Overland Flow of Unsaturated Flow Saturated Zone s Storing of results Extra Parameters Data tree meter Topography 610000 BB 505000 600000 95000 7 meter GN Above 1200 EEE 1120 1200 1040 1120 960 1040 880 960 800 880 720 800 640 720 8590000 7 SB5000 Fe 580000 575000 a S7000 re aa gan B0B000 1 sees sees scamsence RE E i SSS000 EEE FE 1960000 1980000 meter Task tabs 4 Data validation area PETA PID validation Simulation Amen UND Y Figure 2 1 Graphical overview of the in the MIKE SHE GUI without the Project Explorer The Setup editor is divided into three sections the data tree a context sensitive dialogue and a validation area The data tree is dynamic and changes with how you set up your model It provides an overview of all of the relevant data in your model The data tree is organized vertically in the sense that if you work your way down the tree by the time you come to the bottom you are ready to run your model The context sensitive dialogue on the right allows you to input t
22. File to Import On the Import from ascii dialog select the ASCII file from which you wish to import the data The ASCII file must have a certain format in order to be read correctly see File Formats Delimiter Choose the Delimiter that separates the data in the ASCII File When you use Timeseries Editor to export to ASCII the TAB is used as delimiter Time description Choose the axis type of the data in the ASCII file It s impossible to know which axis type the data in the ASCII file has So the user interaction is needed in this property You can select all the axis types Equidistant Cal endar Axis Equidistant Relative Axis Non Equidistant Calendar Axis Non Equidistant Relative Axis and Relative Item Axis Please refer to Axis Information Time Series Editor 271 I Properties Treat consecutive delimiters as one Set this option active means that all consecutive delimiters are treated as one e g if the delimitor is a TAB and there are 5 consecutive TABs the import from ASCH will deal with these 5 TABs as only one Ignore delimiters in beginning of line All delimiters in beginning of lines are ignores when this option is actri vated Delimiter between time and first item When this option is activated there must be a delimiter between the time for each timestep and the first item value Otherwise the time for each timestep is just followed by the first item value Delete Value Fill in the Delete
23. Preprocessing your model In the Setup Tab you specify the input data required by the model including the Model Domain and Grid However most of the Setup Data is independent of the Model Domain and Grid When you pre process you model set up MIKE SHE s pre processor program scans through your model set up and interpolates all spatial data to the specified model domain and grid This interpolated set up data is stored in a fif file which is read during the simulation by the MIKE SHE engine However the fif file does not include any time information All time series information is interpolated dynamically during the run This is necessary because the time steps in MIKE SHE can dynamically change during the simulation in response to stresses on the system The Preprocessed Data Tab is used to display the spatial content of the fif file Before you run your simulation you should carefully check the preproc essed data for errors Errors found in the preprocessed data are typically related to incorrectly specified parameters file names etc in the Setup Tab MIKE SHE Getting Started 61 I Running Your MIKE SHE Model 4 1 1 Loading your Preprocessed Data Preprocessed Data Load 617 20 and Sales BD Visits 2006 Canada Sept06 Napa2007 Napa Valley FD4Results Napa Yalley FD Model Napa Valley FD Mc There is only one button in the main dialogue for the processed data dia logue plus an uneditable text b
24. Type 0 0 Fixed value 1 DFS2 file Fixed Value 3 0E 7 DFS_2D_DATA_FILE FILE_NAME maps SPLeakZ_1 dfs2I ITEM_COUNT 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 1 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect Z_Leakage Z_Leakage section Required if there are any cells with horizontal sheet piling affecting the vertical flow codes containing 1 X_TopLevel RelativeToGround 0 0 no 1 yes Type 1 0 Fixed value 1 DFS2 file Fixed Value 0 0 DFS_2D_DATA_ FILE FILE_NAME 1 YLevels_1 dfs2I ITEM_COUNT 1 must be 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 1 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect Y_TopLevel X_TopLevel section Required if SpecifiedX YLevels 1 and there are any codes containing 100 X_BottomLevel RelativeToGround 0 0 no 1 yes Type 1 0 Fixed value 1 DFS2 file Fixed Value 0 0 DFS_2D_DATA_FILE FILE_NAME YLevels_1 dfs2I ITEM_COUNT 1 must be 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 2 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect Y_BottomLevel X_BottomLevel section Required if SpecifiedXYLev els 1 and there are any codes containing 100 Additional Options 147 Extra Parameters Line item Comment Y_TopLevel RelativeToGround 0 0 no 1 yes Type 1 0 Fixed value 1 DFS2 file FixedValue 0 0 DFS_2D_DATA_FILE FILE_NAME 1 YLevels_1 dfs2I ITEM_COUNT 1 must be 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 1 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect Y_TopLevel Y_TopLevel section Required
25. Y coordinate No of data elements Source locations WN REF DN MAPS SZSourceLoca Mass of solutes can externally be introduced into the groundwater transport component in four different ways i e as a point or line over depth source in specific grids or as a spatially distributed source in a certain depth inter val In both cases the source can either be time varying flux of mass mass time point or line or mass area time area source or fixed concentrations mass volume Observe that fixed concentrations also may vary in time Table 13 4 presents the possible combinations A point or line source is introduced by specifying the upper and lower layer and the X and Y co ordinates of the horizontal location of the point grid in the model co ordinate system A spatially distributed source is intro duced by specifying the upper and lower layers and the spatial distribution as a dfs2 file with code 1 in the source area and 0 elsewhere The source strength is given in the Species Dependent input part Working with Water Quality 203 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 3 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment UZ INPUT PART Depth Dispersion sion dfs2 2 Depth Dispersion No of data elements Dispersivities 2 1 MAPS UZDisper 99 9 0 0 For UZ which is 1D the dispersivity is specified as a sin
26. i a 44 TEP 4 This opens the item properties dialogue Title General Information OK File Properties m r Asis Information Axis Type Eauidistant Calendar Axis X Start Time 61 011990 00 00 00 Time Step 1 days No of Timesteps 4748 o Cancel Help 00 00 00 hour min sec 0 000 fraction of sec Axis Units Item Information Mean Step Acc immjday Mean Step Ac Precipitation Rate immiday Mean Step Acc Precipitation Rate mm day Mean Step Acc m EZ A Insert Append Delete Item Fitering 354 MIKE SHE Changing the EUM data type of a Parameter a oa where you can change the EUM Type and the EUM Unit that is assigned for each time series in the file 26 3 2 Changing the EUM Type of a dfs2 Parameter To change the EUM Data Type of a parameter in a dfs2 file open the grid file in the Grid Editor and then select the Items item from the Edit drop downmen _UUUUUOUU MIKE Zero nnfyn_O end dfs2 amp File Edit Yiew Tools Data Overlay Window Help Geographical Information Time Steps Items Custom Blocks This will open the Edit Properties dialogue for the Grid Editor Edit Properties B Items Item Information Topography Elevation Insert Append Delete Item Fitering Delete value e035 Land value fi
27. tion items can be added to Results Viewer plots including the element mesh model grid Users should experiment with various combinations to develop plots that satisfy the intended purpose 103 The Results viewer hery One Sate Figure 7 8 Specification of isolines option Figure 7 9 Shaded contour interpolation option with colour blending and iso lines Use of isolines allows plots that display pertinent information without col our contours no contour option An example of the Result Viewer plot with isolines but using the no contour option is shown in Figure 7 10 Figure 7 10 Isoline option without contours 104 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot a oa 7 2 4 Changing the legend and colour scale In some cases the default colour scheme may not be appropriate for the intended purpose The colour scheme and or contour intervals can be modified by right clicking in the graphical view and selecting Properties Figure 7 2 from the pop up menu or using the Projects Active View Settings Horizontal keystrokes and navigating to the grid file entry that you want to modify and the Colour tab for the grid entry Figure 7 11 Options for modifying the colour scheme and or contour intervals include making a New scheme contour interval Editing the existing scheme con tour interval Opening an existing scheme contour interval Saving the current scheme contour interval or Resetting not imple
28. 129 Using the Water Balance Tool 8 3 An example is shown below of a batch file that generates water balance data for three postprocessing steps using a water balance utility file named WaterConservationAreas WBL rem MSHE_Wbl_Ex exe WaterConservationAreas WBL MSHE_Wb1_Post exe WaterConservationAreas WBL 1 MSHE_Wbl_Post exe WaterConservationAreas WBL 2 MSHE_Wb1_Post exe WaterConservationAreas WBL 3 The MSHE_Wb1_Ex exe command runs the Extraction phase of the water balance utility The command MSHE_Wbl_Post exe WaterConservationAreas WBL 1 runs the first Postprocessing item in the water balance file waterCon servationAreas WBL The number after the water balance file name in the Postprocessing command indicates which Postprocessing item to run and this number must consistent with the water balance utility file i e the number cannot be greater than the number of Postprocessing items in the file Otherwise the program will terminate with an error The Postprocessing step cannot be executed before an Extraction step but only one Extraction step needs to be run for a single water balance utility file The water balance batch file can contain Extraction and Postprocessing steps from multiple water balance utility files Available Water Balance Items The water balance utility is a very flexible tool that allows you to modify existing Water balance types or create custom Water
29. C 7 BD an Vector file C 7 BD w Vector file C 7 BD 8 For an image file above you will need to specify the coordinates just like in the Display items in the Setup Tab 7 2 2 Adding or modifying vectors Vectors can be added by adding a MIKE SHE results files that contains flow data which are project_overland dfs2 and the project_3DSZFlow dfs3 files To add vectors follow these steps 98 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot a oa 1 Add the a flow data file to your results view by following the directions in the section Adding additional result files and overlays V p 95 2 After adding the flow file open the Property dialogue by right clicking in the results map and selecting Properties from the pop up menu or by using the top menu Projects Active View Settings Horizontal Result Data Properties a x E x Result Data Vectors x Shape file C 57 BD x Shape file C 57 BD m 2D Grid Vectors Eye nea id file C o all Data Sets x Grid file C 7 BD an VW Draw vectors T Draw reference vector ud X Grid file C 7 BD an Vector file C 7 BD X Item overland flow in x direction 7 Vector file C 7 Y Item overland flow in y direction 7 Style Vector components given as cartesian base x Vector scale fi Draw every fi vector in the J direction starting at fo Draw every fi vector in the K direction starting at 0 Cancel Apply Help 3 When you added the flow results file the gri
30. Leakage Coefficient The Leakage Coefficient is required for flow in the x y and z direction for each layer containing sheet piling The Leakage Coefficient is required in the x direction if any cell contains a 100 value in the y direction if any cell contains a 10 value and in the z direction if any cell contains a 1 value The leakage coefficients can be specified as a global value per layer or as a distribution in a dfs2 file In the case of a dfs2 file the values must be specified in the cells where the grid codes are specified The EUM type unit of the dfs2 files must be Leakage coefficient Drain time constant with the unit 1 Time 144 MIKE SHE Sheet Pile Module Si 9 1 3 Top and bottom levels optional This option can be used when the vertical sheet piling only extends across part of a layer The levels are specified in the same cells as the leakage coefficients in the x and y direction one set of top and bottom levels for each direction The levels can be specified as global values per layer or as a distribution in a dfs2 file Both can be absolute levels or relative to ground The EUM type of the dfs2 files must be elevation for absolute levels and depth below ground positive values or height above ground negative val ues when specified relative to the ground surface The type and unit of the global value is elevation m when absolute and height
31. Line item Source strength No of data elements 2 Location number 1 Time serie 100 0 Record number Location number 2 Time serie TIME SZSourceStrength dfsO Record number 2 Dual Porosity Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 1 Lower layer 99 Concentration MAPS SZTransferCoefficient dfs2 1 UZ INPUT PART Initial conditions No of data elements 1 Lower depth 999 Concentration 0 The initial concentration can be fully distributed over the unsaturated zone in the catchment and is specified using a number of data elements where each of these con sists of a lower depth and a concentration either given as a uniform value or as a distributed value in a dfs2 file The value specified in a data element applies from the soil sur face in case it s the first input or the lower depth of the previous data element to the lower depth for the data ele ment The depths are specified in meter below ground m The following input could be used to give an initial con centration of 0 0 to all UZ compartments The unit when using a constant value is the Base Unit for concentration ug m 208 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files Se Table 13 7 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment Source strength No of data elements 2 Location number 1 Time series TIME UZSourceStrength dfs
32. am SZ drainage flow from point gt Gridded data results for MIKE SHE can be viewed by selecting the Grid ded Data Results Viewer item on the Results tab The table is a list of all gridded data saved during a MIKE SHE simulation The items in this list originate from the list of items selected in the Grid series output V 2 p 143 dialogue from the Setup tab Clicking on the View result button will open the Results Viewer to the cur rent item All overlays from MIKE SHE e g shape files images and grid files will be transferred as overlays to the result view However the MIKE 11 river network is not transferred as an overlay For 3D SZ data files the layer number can be specified at the top of the table However the layer number can be changed from within the Results Viewer see Changing to a different SZ layer V1 p 115 By default the top layer is displayed Vectors can be added to the SZ plots of results by checking the Add X Y flow vectors checkbox These vectors are calculated based on the Ground water flow in X direction and Groundwater flow in Y direction data types if they were saved during the simulation Working with your Results e 79 I The Results Tab In the current version velocity vectors cannot be added for overland flow output 5 3 1 The Result Viewer setup file already exists warning When the Result Viewer opens one of the items in the table it creates a setup file for the part
33. gt symbol denotes the Tab character and Name is the user specified name of the observation point This is the name that will be used for the time series item in the Dfs0 file created during the simulation data typeCode This is a numeric code used to identify the output data type See the list of available Data Type Codes in Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 under Output Items V 1 p 85 NewPlot This is a flag to specify whether a new detailed time series HTML plot will be created on the Results Tab 0 the output will be added to the previous plot 1 Create a new plot MIKE SHE Getting Started 59 Building a MIKE SHE Model X Y This is the X Y map coordinates of the point in the same EUM units ft m etc as specified in the EUM Database for Item geometry 2 dimensional see EUM Data Units Depth This is the depth of the observation point below land surface for subsurface observation points The value is in same EUM units ft m etc as specified in the EUM Database for Depth Below Ground see EUM Data Units A depth value must always be included even if not needed UseObsData This is a flag to specify whether or not an observation file needs to be input 0 No 1 Yes dfs0FileName This is the file name of the dfsO time series file with observation data The path to the dfsO file must be relative to the direc tory containing the MIKE SHE she document The dfsO extension is added to the file na
34. if SpecifiedX YLevels 1 and there are any codes containing 10 Y_BottomLevel RelativeToGround 0 0 no 1 yes Type 1 0 Fixed value 1 DFS2 file FixedValue 0 0 DFS_2D_DATA_FILE FILE_NAME 1 YLevels_1 dfs2I ITEM_COUNT 1 must be 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 2 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect Y_BottomLevel Y_BottomLevel section Required if SpecifiedX YLev els 1 and there are any codes containing 10 EndSect Layer_1 EndSect SheetPiling EndSect MIKESHE_SheetPiling_File Negative Precipitation Negative precipitation is sometimes required when net groundwater recharge has been calculated using an external program such as DAISY GIS In this case the evapotranspiration may exceed infiltration leading to a net upward flux of water from the groundwater table However the standard precipitation module in MIKE SHE does not recognize negative rainfall In this case you must specify the negative rainfall using the fol lowing Extra Parameters options Parameter Name Type Value use negative precipitation Boolean On If the negative precipitation is uniformly distribu ted negative precipitation max depth float greater than zero negative precipitation max layer integer greater than zero MIKE SHE Precipitation Multiplier Parameter Name Type Value If the negative precipitation is spatially distrib
35. the AUTOCAL simula tion is to be run on a network of PCs using the OfficeGRID facilities Master For the AUTOCAL Office Grid application one Master is defined This master must be executed on the PC that has been configured as an OfficeGRID primary server The AUTOCAL master handles the AUTO CAL simulation and submit jobs parameter sets to be evaluated to the OfficeGRID network 388 AutoCal Start AUTOCAL Simulation LEA Client For the AUTOCAL Office Grid application a number of Clients can be defined A client must be executed on a PC that has been configured as an OfficeGRID client or an OfficeGRID primary server The AUTOCAL cli ents executes the jobs parameter sets submitted by the AUTOCAL mas ter Maximum model simulation time The Maximum model simulation time is the maximum time allowed for one model simulation on the OfficeGRID network When a client executes a model simulation the AUTOCAL master checks the used simulation time and in the case the time exceeds the Maximum model simulation time the job is resubmitted to the OfficeGRID network for execution on another client This ensures that the AUTOCAL simulation can continue if a client for some reason becomes disconnected from the network or if it is busy with other processes 27 10 Start AUTOCAL Simulation 27 11 Output To start an AUTOCAL simulation choose Run Simulation See also Figure 27 12 2 MIKE Zero AutoCalTryg auc Fie Edit Vie
36. the File Properties Dialog is dis played with a set of properties specific to this template It may not be pos sible to edit all of the properties The following templates are available Wave Climate Template LITProf template LITTren template Source Template STPBatch template Wind template Time Series Editor 251 Se Properties 17 1 1 Wave Climate Template Wave Climate template creates a timeseries with the following pre defined properties e Equidistant Calendar Axis 10 seconds timestep 10 Timesteps 15 Items Duration pct year of type Undefined unit percent and TS Type Step Accumulated Wave Height of type Wave height unit meter and no TS Type defined Wave Direction of type Wave direction unit degree and no TSType defined Profile Number of type Profile number unit and no TS Type defined Wave Period of type Wave period unit second and no TS Type defined Ref Depth height of type Water Level unit meter and TS Type Instantaneous Ref Depth angle of type Eater Level unit meter and no TS Type defined Mean water level of type Water Level unit meter and no TS Type defined Spectral Description of type Spectral description unit and no TS Type defined Spreading Factor of type Spreading factor unit and no TS Type defined Current Speed of type Flow velocity unit m s and no TS Type defined Ref No for current of type Reference point number unit and no TS Type def
37. the maximum allowed time steps e If MIKE 11 is running with a constant time step then the Max allowed Overland OL time step must be a multiple of the MIKE 11 constant time step If MIKE 11 is running with a variable time step then the actual OL time step will be truncated to match up with the nearest MIKE 11 time step e The Max allowed UZ time step must be an even multiple of the Max allowed OL time step and e The Max allowed SZ time step must be an even multiple of the Max allowed UZ time step Thus the overland time step is always less than or equal to the UZ time step and the UZ time step is always less than or equal to the SZ time step If you are using the implicit solver for overland flow then a maximum OL time step equal to the UZ time step often works However if you are using the explicit solver for overland flow then a much smaller maximum time step is necessary such as the default value of 0 5 hours If the unsaturated zone is included in your simulation and you are using the Richards equation or Gravity Flow methods then the maximum UZ time step is typically around 2 hours Otherwise a maximum time step equal to the SZ time step often works 70 MIKE SHE Running your Model LEA Groundwater levels react much slower than the other flow components So a maximum SZ time step of 24 or 48 hours is typical unless your model is a local scale model with rapid groundwater surface water reac tions Preci
38. 0 O AllTravelTimes tru ravelTimeMin 0 ravelTimeMax 1000000000 EndSect TemporalFilter SinkCodes_out Allsinks false rofSinkCodes_out 1 SinkCode Code 4 EndSect SinkCode EndSect SinkCodes_out RegCodes_out AllCodes false 236 MIKE SHE User s Guide PT Output Retrieval Utility a oa NrofRegCodes_out 0 RegCode Code 0 EndSect RegCode EndSect RegCodes_out wellNames_out AllWells false NrofWellNames_out 0 WellName Name EndSect WellName EndSect WellNames_out WellFieldNames_out AllWellFields fals NrofWellFieldNames_out 1 wellFieldName Name Hinnerup EndSect WellFieldName EndSect WellFieldNames_out EndSect PT_OR_input 237 Working with Particle Tracking 238 MIKE SHE User s Guide WORKING WITH TIME SERIES 239 240 MIKE Zero Creating Time Series in MIKE SHE Sse 15 TIME SERIES DATA MIKE SHE uses the dfsO file format for time series data Various tools are available for converting ASCII and EXEL time series to the dfs0 file for mat Time series data is required as input for most transient simulations for example daily records of precipitation Transient simulations can also generate numerous dfsO output files 15 1 Creating Time Series in MIKE SHE In most cases you will create dfs0O files using the
39. 1 EUMISoluteFlux Sol kg s mass flux in a specific ute flux grid 2 EumISpecificSolute g m2 s time varying mass flux FluxPerArea Specific over a certain area Solute Flux Per Area Working with Water Quality 211 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 10 Combinations of source types EUM data types and units in the overland transport component UZ Source Type EUM data type user Base unit Source description description 1 EUMISoluteFlux Sol kg s mass flux in a specific ute flux grid 2 EumlSpecificSolute g m s time varying mass flux FluxPerArea Specific over a certain area Solute Flux Per Area 13 4 Working with the XTSF File The extra input data file for a simulation with the AD module is called the extra transport set up file xtsf This is also a text file which contains all relevant information for the simulation reactions included in the sorption degradation module of MIKE SHE AD The file must be present in the catchment working directory with the name lt set up xtsf gt The xtsf file is divided into three parts e simulation parameters e species dependent parameters and e process dependent parameters The file contains one or more of the following parameters depending on the type of processes included Base Units are given in parentheses which must be used if constant values are input Sorption Pp Bulk density kg m Lin
40. 11 and MIKE SHE V 1 p 163 44 MIKE SHE Adding Unsaturated Flow LA 3 8 1 3 9 3 9 1 Overland Flow Boundary Conditions The outer boundary condition for the overland flow solver is a specified head based on the initial water depth in the outer nodes of the model domain Thus if the water depth inside the model domain is greater than the initial depth on the boundary water will flow out of the model If the water depth is less than the initial depth on the boundary the boundary will act as a source of water No flow boundaries on the outer model domain can be implemented using the Separated Flow Areas option in the Setup Editor for the Overland Flow module The Separated Flow areas are used to prevent overland flow from flowing between cells that are separated by topographic features such as dikes that cannot be resolved within a the grid cell If you define the separated flow areas along the intersection of the inner and outer boundary areas MIKE SHE will keep all overland flow inside of the model Adding Unsaturated Flow UZ Classification Since UZ computations in all grid squares for most large scale applica tions requires excessive computation time MIKE SHE enables you to compute the UZ flow in a reduced subset of grid squares The subset clas sification is done automatically by the pre processing program according to soil types vegetation types climatic zones and depth to the groundwa ter table e Auto
41. 219 13 5 1 Transport Setup File tsf 219 13 5 2 Extra transport setup file xtsf 223 14 WORKING WITH PARTICLE TRACKING 2 2 2222 22 227 14 1 Requirements inMIKESHEWM 227 14 1 1 Flow Storing Requirements 228 Se 14 1 2 Specification of Well Fields 228 14 1 3 Inputtothe PT Simulations 228 14 2 Executing MIKE SHE PT oc 4 eeu a 84 oe mare nahe 232 14 3 Output from the PT simulations 0 4 232 14 4 PTBin Output Retrieval Utility 0 233 14 5 PT Output Retrieval Utility 222 2 moon 234 14 5 1 Limitations with the PT Output Retrieval 2 235 14 5 2 Structure of the PT ORFile 235 14 5 3 Example PT Output Retrieval File PT_OR 236 Working with Time Series 2 2 Connor 239 15 TIME SERIES DATA 24 4 4 0 2 0 wu nn a a ade amp ao ed 241 15 1 Creating Time Series inMIKESHE 2 2 2 241 15 1 1 Import from ASCI aaa dey Got rear 242 15 1 2 Import from Excel 2 2 2 44 Ar er ren 243 15 1 3 Importtrom old tO file 2 2 2 2 4 4 r 44H RR 243 15 2 Working with Spatial Time Series 222m onen 243 15 3 Time Series Types z au ca Bae Se 2 4 ana Ba BE ee 244 Time Series Editor 2 000200 0c eee 247 16 INTRODUCTION 2 2 wee ee We fee ke ea ee eee et 249 17 PROPERTIE
42. 3 4 Defining the model domain and grid aoaaa aaa a 39 3 4 1 MIKE SHE model limits 2 aaa 41 3 4 2 MIKE SHE Demo modellimits 42 3 5 Defining Topography aaa aa aa bbe db are 42 3 6 Adding Precipitation 4 2 2 oaa Roe ecu oe oe 43 3 7 Adding Surface Water aoaaa we a du dd de ee SZ 44 3 8 Adding Overland Flow aa aaa aa tar Sue 44 3 8 1 Overland Flow Boundary Conditions 45 3 9 Adding Unsaturated Flow aoaaa aa 45 3 9 1 UZ Classification ooa Ga ee ee ES 45 3 9 2 Coupling Between Unsaturated and Saturated Zone 46 3 10 Adding Groundwater yao 4 6 4 2 2 oaa a eid a da ae Ste 47 3 10 1 Your Conceptual Geologic Model 47 3 10 2 Working with Lenses 20 22 05 50 3 10 3 Numerical Layers 2 222222 oo on 51 3 10 4 Groundwater Drainage 2 2 nn 51 3 10 5 MIKE SHE versus MODFLOW 55 3 10 6 Importing a MODFLOW 96 or MODFLOW 2000 Model 57 6 MIKE Zero 3 11 Setting up your results 0 0 cee eee ee 59 3 11 1 Importing an ASCII file for Detailed Time Series Output 59 4 RUNNING YOUR MIKE SHE MODEL 61 4 1 Preprocessing your model 2 200 00 61 4 1 1 Loading your Preprocessed Data 62 4 1 2 Exporting Saving and Editing the pre processed data 62 4 1 3 Updating Overlays in Pre processed views 63 4 1 4 Pre processe
43. An abbreviated or detailed water balance by layer for saturated flow in an ASCII table or a dfsO file 127 Using the Water Balance Tool Output Period An output period different from the total simulation period can be speci fied by unchecking Use default period and setting the Start date and End date to the period of interest Output Time Series Specification Incremental or Accumulated water balances can be calculated An incre mental water balance is calculated summed for each output time step in the Output period An accumulated water balance each output time step is accumulated over the Output period Layer Output Specifications If you are using water balance types that calculate data on a layer basis you can specify whether you want All layers or just the Specified layer where you also must specify a layer number Sub catchment Selection If you extracted sub catchment data from the WM results then you must specify a subcatchment number or the name of the polygon for which you want the water balance for The combobox contains a list of valid ID num bers or polygon names Single Cell Location If you extracted the WM data by cell then if you are not creating a map output then you have to specify a cell location for which you want a water balance Output File If you are creating a table or time series water balance then you can write the output to either a dfsO file or to an ASCII file for import to MSEx
44. Dike_O111 LinkName_2 Dike_0311 EndSect Storing_Reach_1 Storing Reach_2 No_Of_Links 1 LinkName_1 Dike_0411 EndSect Storing_Reach_2 EndSect Storing Reaches When No_Of_Storing_reaches is greater than 0 the Storing_Reaches section must be specified and inside this the Storing_Reach_1 Storing_Reach_2 defining the no of links and link names for each reach Drainage_Manholes No_Of_DrainCodes 8 Draincode_1 Draincode 12 ManholeName DNB3182 Endsect Draincode_1 Endsect Draincode_8 EndSect Drainage_Manholes When No_Of_Storing_reaches is greater than 0 the Storing_Reaches section must be specified and inside this the Storing_Reach_1 Storing Reach_2 defining the no of links and link names for each reach EndSect MIKESHE_MOUSE_ Specifications 11 1 4 Output Files Output from the coupled run is written to a number of dfsO results files all located in the standard results directory In the case of storing reaches there is one item in the dfsO file for each storing reach Table 11 2 File names and conditions for output for the MIKE SHE MOUSE coupling setupname refers to the name of the model setup file file name The file is created when setupname setupname_SZ2MouseReaches dfs0 the MIKE SHE SZ coupling is included setupname setupname_OL2MouseReaches dfsO the MIKE SHE Overland cou pling is include
45. Distribution Uniform z Constant r Value 0 The parameter Value will be assigned to every cell in the model or layer as appropriate and will remain constant throughout the simulation Uniform Time Varying Precipitation Rate Spatial Distribution Temporal Distribution Uniform 7 Time varying dfs0 7 peie ooo Create The time series in the dfsO file will be assigned to every cell in the model or layer as appropriate Station based Grid Codes or Polygons Station based time varying data means that the model domain is divided into zones that are defined by an Integer Grid Code If a dfs2 file is used then the Integer Grid Codes are defined on a regular grid which is interpreted to the model grid during the Pre processing stage If the Integer Grid Codes are defined using polygons then you must supply an ArcView shp file containing polygons each with an Integer Grid Code The item Fill Gaps with allows you to define the Integer Grid Code to use in the event that a cell is not included within one of the polygons Once the file containing Integer Grid Codes has been defined a new level in the data tree will appear below the current level containing one entry for every unique Integer Grid Code in the file On this level you must then supply a time series values for every Integer Grid Code However the time series can also be fixed in the sense that a Working with Spatial Data 289 Spat
46. Enhanced Meta File EMF Image files can be used as background if they are grid aligned and cover the same area as defined by the grid MIKE Zero Bat1_0 dfs2 8 File Edit View Tools DataOverlay Window Help beus ejser jaa ep e miee nr cing 600 meter 8 amp 45 50 Bathymetry Bathymetry m sh 8 70 75 80 Grid spacing 500 meter 01 01 2003 00 00 00 Time step 0 Layer 0 Figure 25 1 4 459616 4 3 583743 3 135302 2 638144 2 109016 1 926374 0 8982249 i 1 584444 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 561349 1 625101 1 872111 10 1 534055 2 50539 3 568693 5 03416 Example of background layer 344 MIKE Zero Overlay Manager LAA 25 2 Overlay Manager Import Layers Specify which layer to display and the display order Remember to adjust the transparency level in Grid Settings p 327 Grid Editor 345 Data Overlay 346 MIKE Zero MIKE ZERO OPTIONS 347 348 MIKE SHE Se 26 EUM DATA UNITS All MIKE Zero products use a standard library of data units called the Engineering Unit Management EUM library This allows you to change the displayed units for any value that is included in the library Every parameter in MIKE SHE has been added to the EUM library and t
47. Fy Bias factor accounting for the distribution of sorption sites between matrix and macro pores may vary between 1 and 1 Decay Half life time s B Empirical exponent accounting for the effect of soil moisture conditions on the degradation rate e g 0 7 Tref Reference temperature C at which the given half life time was measured a Constant accounting for the effect of soil temperature on the degradation rate e g 0 08 Plant uptake fe Concentration factor accounting for extent of plant uptake May vary between 0 and 1 Working with Water Quality 213 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module 13 4 1 Simulation Parameters The simulation parameter input part of the xtsf file should always be included This section contains information about Number of processes plant uptake Air temperature Logical options for including sorption decay soil temperature and Bulk density distribution Initial soil temperature distribution Table 13 12 MIKE SHE AD xtsf file format and description Line item Comment FILETYPE DATA TYPE VERNO 2002 1 524 The xtsf file starts with a header giving the information on the type and version of the input file The current ver EXTRA SETUP DATA for Transport Sim sion should be 524 The next lines are for information only PROCESSES IN CALCULATION The
48. GUI How ever the input for the module is fairly simple and is handled via the Extra Parameters options Additional Options 143 Extra Parameters 9 1 1 9 1 2 The Sheet Piling module is activated by including the following two parameters in the Extra Parameters section of the data tree and creating the required module input file Parameter Name Type Value sheet piling module Boolean On sheet piling file file name the file name of the Sheet Pile input file Sheet Pile Location The location of the sheet piles is defined using a dfs2 file with integer grid codes One file or item is required for each computational layer with sheet piling Each file must have the same grid size as the MIKE SHE model The grid codes are composed of simple sums of 100 10 1 0 where 100 a N S sheet piling link between the actual cell and the next cell in positive x direction 10 a E W sheet piling link between the actual cell and the next cell in the positive y direction 1 a Horizontal sheet piling surface between the actual layer and the layer above ground surface if actual layer is 1 and 0 no sheet piling Thus for example a cell containing the code 110 defines the existence of sheet piling along the Eastern and Northern cell boundaries A cell con taining the code 11 defines a sheet piling along the Northern cell bound ary and at the top of the layer
49. HR HA HR FH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH KL KK SPECIES DEPENDENT DATA LHAHFHFRHHFHHFHFHRFH HF HF HR HR HR HR FH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH KHK HR Species Species name Solute FR INPUT PART Plant uptake transpiration factor transp factor 0 1 1 0 UZ INPUT PART Matrix Macropore Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 FAK EEE REPRE PAL RE HEP FH FH RE FH HERP FH FH HH LAPEER HL FH FR HH Species Species name Sorbed Solute FR INPUT PART Plant uptake transpiration factor transp factor 0 1 0 0 UZ INPUT PART Matrix Macropore Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 HH FH HH HH HH LH FH FH FH FH HH HL HF HL FH FL FH RE RL HE KL HL a Species Species name degradable FR INPUT PART Plant uptake transpiration factor transp factor 0 1 0 5 UZ INPUT PART Matrix Macropore Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 FAKE KAKAE AEA AE REE AE RE REALE AE RAKE AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH KE KL KL KL K PROCESS DEPENDENT DATA FAKE AKAKAL AEA AEAE AEE AE RE REALE AE RAE REAL KEL AH AH AH AH AH AH AH KL KHK Process identification Process name sorption Proc type 1 2 3 4 3 224 MIKE SHE Example input files GENERAL PROCESS PARAMETERS Dissolv
50. In MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 HD it is possible to specify time series output that can be used directly by AUTOCAL For extraction of time series of other MIKE 11 variables from a MIKE 11 result file the resl1read applica AUTOCAL 363 Auto Calibration Tool tion program can be used The res11read executable is located in the MIKEZero bin directory The Model simulation sequence column should then include C Program Files DHI MIKEZero bin res 1 lread exe with the Optional arguments someresSpecFileName MakeDfs0 silent Res11 FileName DfsOFileName where SpecFileName is the file name of the file that contains specifica tions of the data to be extracted from the res11 result file item chainage and rivername Res11FileName is the file name of the res11 result file and DfsOFileName is the file name of the DFSO file where the extracted time series are saved note that this file name should not include the dfsO extension Note that the full path name should be used for the specified files Instead of using the executable option in the Model simulation sequence a batch file can be defined that contains the resllread command line More information about the res11read application program is given in the MIKE 11 User Guide Appendix B 27 2 2 Model parameter files In the Model parameter files table the files containing the model parame ters to be manipulated by AUTOCAL should be specified AUTOCAL supports manipulation of parame
51. In aMIKE SHE simulation all the time series files must cover the Simulation Period V 2 p 28 The default time series period for a new time series file is the Simulation Period However if you change the time series period so that it does not cover the simulation period you will receive an error message when MIKE SHE tries to run If you try to add a time series file that does not cover the simulation period then the OK button will remain greyed out and you will not be able to select the file The constraints tab in the file selector dialogue gives you the reason that you cannot select the file Time Series Interval The time series interval is the length of the individual time periods The number of time periods is the length of the time series period divided by the period interval The last period is shortened if necessary Time Series File Every time series has an Item Type which is defined by the valid EUM Data Unit see EUM Data Units V 1 p 349 for the particular variable from which the Create dialogue was launched In most cases there is only one valid Type In some cases you may have a choice For example in Precipitation you can chose between Precipitation Rate which is the average amount of precipitation per time e g mm hour in the time inter val and Rainfall which is the measured amount of precipitation in the time interval e g mm The Name is simply the name of the data item in the resulting dfs0O file The
52. Item Info Constraints Info Title File Type Non Equidistant Time Axis Select Precipitation Rate _ The find out why there is no valid items you should look in the Con straints Info tab Select Item Period Info Item Info Constraints Info Number of dimensions 0 Item type Precipitation Rate Validation of Data Period YZ __ Start Date of Data Period before 02 01 1990 eZ End Date of Data Period after 01 11 1995 Here you can see that the Item type is supposed to be Precipitation Rate but this constraint has failed To find out what the Item Type of the selected file is look at the Item Info tab Select Item Period Info Item Info Constraints Info Total no of Items 1 ItemName ItemType Potential EvapoTranspiration Evapotranspiration Rate mm day where you can see that the current Item Type is Evapotranspiration Rate MIKE ZERO Options 353 Se EUM Data Units The next two sections outline how to change the EUM Type of an existing file 26 3 1 Changing the EUM Type of a dfs0 Parameter To change the EUM Data Type of a parameter in a dfsO file open the time series in the Time Series Editor and then select the Properties item from the Edit drop down menu MIKE Zero rainfall equ dfs0 File Edit view Settings Tools Window Help oa luk Cut Ctri 52 Copy Ctrl C ae Paste Ctrl V 50 fan Properties 481 5 pon 46
53. Karup Ka Well 22 fC MikeZerot ATIMEH Obs Well 22 RMSE 1 RMSE_Vells is AE_WellS C MikeZero Karup Ka Well 5 C WlikeZero TIME H Obs Well 5 Avg Error 1 AE_Wells AE_Wellg C MikeZero Karup Ka Well 9 C MikeZero TIMEIH Obs Welg Avg Error 1 AE_Wells a AE_Welll2 C MikeZero Karup Ka Well 12 JE MikeZerot TIME H Obs Well 12 Avg Error 1 AE_Wells 3 AE wen C MikeZero Karup Ka Vell 21 aa fC MikeZero TIMEIH Obs Well 21 Avg Error 1 AE_Wells 10 AE_Well22 C MikeZero Karup Ka Well 22 C MikeZerot TIME H Obs Well 22 Avg Error 1 AE_Wells 111 _ RMSE_2005 C MikeZero Karup Ka Station 20 05 C MikeZero TIMEK 20 05 RMSE 1 RMSE_Runoff 12 RMSE_2006 C MikeZero Karup Ka Station 20 06 20 06 RMSE 1 RMSE_Runoff Figure 27 5 Objective Functions page 27 4 1 Output measures Name Name of the output measure Output file and item name File name and corresponding item name of the time series of the simula tion results at the observation point Observation file and item name File name and corresponding item name of the observation time series Statistic type AUTOCAL includes three basic comparison statistics Average error Avg Error N 1 AE 3 OBS SIM 27 1 i 1 AUTOCAL 371 Auto Calibration Tool Root mean square error RMSE N 1 2 RMSE h
54. LIMITATIONS OR THE MAXIMUM LEGALLY APPLICA BLE SUBSET OF THESE LIMITATIONS APPLY TO YOUR PUR CHASE OF THIS SOFTWARE Printing History December 2006 Edition 2007 MIKE SHE CONTENTS Se MIKE SHE Getting Started 2 2 15 1 INTRODUCTION x 4 ea a ke 0 a a ann 17 1 1 Service and Maintenance 222 Cm onen 20 1 1 1 Service Packs 24 cg O64 raona 2 bw Re nn we ERY 21 2 RE SHE s Se anne de ae ay Set Sh cat ad Me de tata Mion PA Ns a ER a 23 2 1 Getting Help at u Se Gk ek ore oe een Bee EH ne 23 2 2 Hardware Requirements 02 nn 23 23 MIKE Zero au cma eee Bd es ee Sb eke ee eR ek a 25 2 3 1 Creating anew MIKE SHE Project 26 2 3 2 CreatingaNewModelFile 27 2 3 3 Opening an Existing Model File 29 2 4 Importing Existing Release 2005 Projects 30 2 4 1 Linking 2005 Results ina 2007 she Set Up File 31 2 5 MIKE Zero Editors dita tate Si bine Belk ae ow eo eS 32 2 6 The MIKE SHE User Interface 2 005 33 2 6 1 The Setup DataTree 005 35 3 BUILDING A MIKE SHE MODEL v4 4 eos os baw eA Oe SS 37 3 1 Adding Background Maps aaa aa aaa 00000 ee 37 3 2 Selecting the Processes 2 2 22 Coon 37 3 3 Setting up the Simulation parameters 38 3 3 1 Hot Starting from a previous simulation 39
55. Odensee mshe_flo_test 06 10 2006 24 10 2006 C 3 TechSupport Berge mshe_Flo_test 2 New Project Open Project Delete Project The Project Overview table lists the projects that you have created along with their creation and last modified dates The core of each project is a mzp file which contains all of the references to all of the files The Location listed is where the projectname mzp file is located 26 MIKE SHE MIKE Zero ee New Project button New Project E x Project Type Templates Coasts amp Estuaries River Hydraulics MIKE 11 HD Flooding EHRriver Morphology MIKE 21C General Surface amp Groundwater interactions MIKE SHE Lakes amp Reservoirs Open Seas Rivers amp Basins E My Templates i Project Name Snake River Watershed IV Create directory for Project Client Name Snake River Commision Location C Data MIKE Zero Projects one Project will be created at C Data MIKE Zero Projects Snake River Watershed Cancel Help The easiest way to create anew MIKE SHE project is to use the New Project Button which will display the above dialogue When you create anew MIKE SHE project with the New Project button a series of project templates are available For MIKE SHE you can use the Surface and Groundwater Interaction template under the Rivers and Basins section Typically each project is stored in one directory with a number
56. Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when this Type process is selected Code 229 SZ concentration immobile phase SZ 230 ISZ sorbed concentration immobile phase SZ 231 SZ soil temperature SZ 232 ISZ porosity SZ 233 Number of particles SZ 234 Number of registered particles SZ 235 Most recent registration zone code SZ 236 Average age SZ 237 Average transport time to nearest registration SZ cell 90 MIKE SHE Run Statistics Table 6 2 Additional output items for time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion PT Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when this Type process is selected Code 145 SimStatus Basic time step length UZ OL 146 SimStatus SZ time step length SZ 147 SimStatus No of SZ iterations time step SZ 148 SimStatus Avg no UZ iterations column UZ time step 149 SimStatus No of Overland iterations per OL time step 29 recharge to interflow reservoirs LR 30 interflow from interflow reservoirs LR 31 percolation from interflow reservoirs LR 32 interflow reservoir storage LR 33 ichange
57. SCE algorithm e Monte Carlo sampling In this case the initial parameter sets are ran domly generated within the feasible parameter range specified on the Model Parameters page assuming a uniform distribution e Latin hypercube sampling In this case the individual parameters are sampled according to a stratified sampling scheme where the feasible parameter interval is divided into s equal intervals s being the sample size and a point is then randomly selected within each interval e Initial sample from previous optimisation run This option allows con tinuing the optimisation from the last iteration loop of a previous opti misation run AutoCal Parameter Optimisation Im File name File name of the file containing the optimisation results from a previous optimisation run to be used as initial conditions The file to be specified is the AUTOCAL SCE optimisation output file see Section 27 11 3 Stopping criteria Three stopping criteria are defined e Maximum number of model evaluations e Convergence in objective function space In this case the optimisation terminates if the objective function of the best parameter set has not changed more than a user defined minimum value in a given number of shuffling loops e Convergence in parameter space In this case the optimisation termi nates if the range of parameter values of the entire population in the parameter space is less than a given value not user defined T
58. Select Values p 333 Calculator p 336 Interpolation p 334 Move one step forward in time Rewind one step in time Move one layer up 3D only Grid Editor 329 LAA View Si Move one layer down 3D only Select item 23 11 Status Bar A status bar at the bottom of the application can be switched on and off When the pointer is in the graphical view the status bar shows you the coordinates of the point and the value at the point that you are pointing at 330 MIKE Zero Navigation I 24 TOOLS 24 1 Navigation Navigation x Layer 0 0 D f 1 Time Step Item P m 3 s m flux Q m 3 s m flux Close The navigation dialog is used to position the editor at the desired layer of data in 3D at the desired time step and the desired item Simply choose the wanted layer time step and item and close When you are working with a 3D dataset and want to switch to another plane you should click the appropriate view at the bottom of the graphical view You may also conveniently use the Grid Editor Toolbars for navigating the data 24 2 Goto Using this option your active cursor will move to the minimum or maxi mum value in the Tabular View The Graphical View will not be synchronized accordingly 24 3 Synchronize Synchronize tab to map moves the Tabular View to the area displayed in the centre of the Graphical View Grid Editor 331 I
59. TIME cell format followed by the data values name namel2 name3 01 01 1981 00 00 00 0 1 0 2 0 3 02 01 1981 00 00 00 0 304 0 304 0 304 03 01 1981 00 00 00 0 025 0 025 0 025 04 01 1981 00 00 00 0 604 0 604 0 604 15 1 3 Import from old tO file The old tO file format is from the X Motif version of MIKE SHE that existed before the Windows version was introduced in 2001 The tO file format contains all of the relevant time information For more information on the tO file format please refer to your original MIKE SHE documenta tion 15 2 Working with Spatial Time Series In the MIKE SHE Toolbox there is a Tool in the File Converter section called dfs2 dfs0 to dfs2 In this utility you specify a dfs2 grid file with integer grid codes and a dfsO file with time series data where the dfs2 file grid codes are the item numbers in the dfs0 file Working with Time Series 243 Time Series Data The utility will read the dfs2 file and for each time step in the dfs0 file it will substitute the grid code with the time series value The result is a dfs2 file with one grid for each time step and the grid values are the time series values 15 3 Time Series Types Specifies how the time step is being defined and how the measured value is being assigned to the time step There are five different value types available Instantaneous The values are measured at a precise instant For example the air temper ature at a particular ti
60. The first item is used for the X axis and the succeeding items are plotted against this item The start time and the time step are not applicable in this case You can also specify the unit for the X axis Start Time The start time of the data This is only relevant for calendar axis data The format used is the standard windows format To change this edit the regional settings in the windows control panel Time Step The timestep for the data Only relevant when the time axis is equidistant Equidistant Calendar Axis or Equidistant Time Axis You can specify days hour minute second and milliseconds A timestep of one hour would thus be given as 01 00 00 in the hour min sec input box No of Timesteps Number of time steps If this number is changed time steps are added or removed as appropriate at the end of the time series When adding timesteps the new timesteps added will be filled with an empty value meaning that no value has been inserted 17 2 3 Item Information Name Text that identifies the item Type The type of the data contained in the item indicating if it is e g a water level wave height etc It is possible to select from a number of types using the combo box which appears if you click in the field If a type not contained in the list is needed write the type in the text field This also applies to the unit below Unit Text that identifies the unit of the item Unit is always related to
61. Title Dim Geo etc The Header Information ends with an empty line The lines specify the following Grid Editor LAA File Title Dimension Can be either 2 or 3 Geographic Information UTM zone origin longitude origin latitude and orientation Time Information A Time Axis Description Start Date yyyy mm dd Start Time number of Time Steps and Time Interval in seconds Grid Information Number of Grid points in first second and third dimension Numter of Static Items a Static Item is data related to time series data but not a part if it For example the bathymetry in a file from a HD run with H P Q as Dynamic Items Static Items Name Type Unit these can be left unspecified Number of Dynamic Items Dynamic Item Name Type Unit these can be left unspecified Delete value The Delete value should be a number not typical of the data Data follows after the Header Information and must be arranged in blocks An example of a data block is shown below tstep 187 item 1 layer 0 20 20 0313 21 093 21 1076 21 2892 1E 030 20 20 2856 21 1294 21 1587 21 2748 1E 030 1E 030 1E 030 1E 030 21 0826 21 2092 1E 030 1E 030 1E 030 1E 030 20 8634 20 8749 1E 030 lt Empty line gt The first data blocks must contain the Static Items The Dynamic Items follow and must be presented in the following order tstep 0 item 1 layer 0 tstep 0 item 1 layer 1 until all layers are specified tstep 0 item 2 layer
62. Working with Water Quality 205 LAA Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 4 Possible combinations of sources in the groundwater Areal distribution Source Type in input Source description point or line over 1 mass flux in a specific grid depth source 3 fixed concentration in a specific grid 2 time varying mass flux spatially distributed over a certain area Source 4 fixed concentration over a certain area Table 13 5 Possible combinations of sources in the unsaturated zone Areal distribution Source Type in Base Unit Source description input point or line over 1 kg s mass flux in a spe depth source cific grid spatially distrib 2 g m s time varying mass uted source flux over a certain area Table 13 6 Possible combinations of sources in the overland component Areal Distribution Source Type in input Source Description point source 1 mass flux in a specific grid spatially distributed 2 time varying mass flux source over a certain area 13 3 2 Species DEPENDENT Data As MIKE SHE is able to handle simultaneous transport of several species some of the parameters have to be specified for each of the species These parameters include the initial concentrations the source strengths for the sources specified in the species independent input part and some special parameters for groundwater and surface water transport 206 MIKE SHE W
63. along river links rather than directly at H points Furthermore this Additional Options 149 Extra Parameters option can be used with MIKE 11 branches that are not defined in the MIKE SHE coupling section of the MIKE 11 network file The water balance utility e g Saturated zone detailed can be used to look at differences between drainage discharges from areas using the orig inal drainage option and the RFD option The MIKE SHE water balance configuration file MSHE_Wbl_Config pfs in the Program Files DHI MIKEZero bin subdirectory should be reviewed to see which water balance types segregate standard drainage flow data type sz qszdr torivin and RFD drainage flow data type sz qszdrtoM11Hpoint The following steps are required to activate the RFD option 1 Generate a pfs file containing information for each specified drainage area to be routed to specific MIKE 11 h points using the command line program MakeSM11RFDpfs exe The program requires a tab delim ited file with the format shown below BRS_ID BRS _ START BRS _END Drain_code The file expects a header line in the tab delimited file and will ignore the first drainage area if a header is not included The program will query you for the name of the tab delimited input file and the name of the RFD pfs file to create If program execution is successful the pro gram will indicate that it has terminated normally If the program indi cates an abnormal termination h
64. and saturated zone modules if the UZ module for the simulation is not using the calculation in all cells option An example of when use of the UZ scatter plot is useful is shown in Figure 7 30 116 MIKE SHE UZ Specific Plots 7 6 2 UZ Plot Figure 7 30 A UZ Scatter Plot and its relationship to B the UZ calculation cells An example of a UZ Filled Plot is shown in Figure 7 31 In cases where the UZ module for the simulation is not using the calculation in all cells option the Result Viewer interpolates values from the calculation cells to adjacent inactive UZ cells Figure 7 31 Filled UZ plot UZ Plots can only be extracted from simulated unsaturated zone water contents and flow This is because UZ plots display results for a single col umn for all of the UZ calculation nodes in the column Other simulated UZ results show net values for the entire UZ i e infiltration recharge to the SZ etc After selecting the UZ Plot extractor tool move the cursor over the column you want to extract the results from and double click Figure 7 32 Results from multiple UZ columns cannot be displayed on the same UZ Plot 117 The Results viewer Figure 7 32 Extracting a UZ Plot from simulated unsaturated water contents and flow The simulated water content results for the selected column are displayed in Figure 7 33 The UZ Plots show either water content or unsaturated zone flow for each no
65. are going then specify the area of your model that you want the water bal ance for and finally extract the MIKE SHE water balance data from the results files Once you have created a new water balance document the first tab is as shown below 123 Using the Water Balance Tool 7 Water movement simulation Flow result catalogue file C 5 Testing MSHE projects Odensee Odense2003 hrs Type of extraction Area Type Catchment X Resolution Type Area X r Sub catchment ord codes Type of input file Dfs2 z Item Dfs2 file Gross files Pre name of gross files IV Use default filename Flow result catalogue file A MIKE SHE simulation generates various output files depending on the options and engines selected for the MIKE SHE simulation The sheres file is a catalogue of all the various output files generated by the current MIKE SHE run When you select the sheres file you are not specifying the particular output but actually just a set of pointers to all the output files The extraction process reads all of the output files and makes itself ready to produce specific water balances In the extraction dialogue you specify the sheres file for the simulation that you wish to calculate the water bal ance for The sheres file is located in the same directory as your results Note Although this is an ASCII file you should be careful not to make any changes in the fi
66. balance which will create your map of UZ errors Vertical discretisation The vertical discretisation of the soil profile typ ically contains small cells near the ground surface and increasing cell thickness with depth However the soil properties are averaged if the cell boundaries and the soil boundaries do not align The discretisation should be tailored to the profile description and the required accuracy of the simulation If the full Richards equation is used the vertical discretisation may vary from 1 5 cm in the uppermost grid points to 10 50 cm in the bottom of the profile For the Gravity Flow module a coarser discretisation may be used For example 10 25 cm in the upper part of the soil profile and up to 50 100 cm in the lower part of the profile Note that at the boundary between two blocks with different cell heights the two adjacent boundary cells are adjusted to give a smoother change in cell heights 3 10 Adding Groundwater 3 10 1 Your Conceptual Geologic Model The development of the geological model is probably the most time con suming part of the initial model development Before starting this task you should have developed a conceptual model of your system and have at your disposal digital maps of all of the important hydrologic parameters such as layer elevations and hydraulic conductivities MIKE SHE Getting Started 47 Building a MIKE SHE Model In MIKE SHE you can specify your subsurface geolo
67. balance type to calculate the net vertical flow in a specified SZ layer This water balance type can only be used with the single cell resolution and specified output layers options Line item Comment Created 2004 06 2 16 28 48 File header DLL id C WINOWS System32 pfs2000 d11 PES version Mar 3 2004 21 35 12 NoWblTypes the number of water bal MIKESHE_WaterBalance_ConfigFile ance types in the configuration file FileVersion 3 Remember to change this number if you NoWblTypes 31 add a water balance item to the file WblTypeDefinition Existing water balance definitions Name TOTAL Group SZ Storage sz szsto EndSect WblTypeDefinition WblTypeDefinition First line of the water balance definition Name SZ_LAYER_NET_VERT_FLOW_MAP Internal name No spaces allowed DisplayName Map output Net Vertical Name displayed in the combobox Saturated Zone Flow layer s Description Distributed output Description displayed under the com Saturated zone Storage specified bobox layer NoGroups 1 Number of calculation groups in the out put file Group SZ Vertical Flow sz qszzpos Definition of the calculation group con sz qszzneg sisting of aname and a sum of the particu lar water balance items no spaces from Table 8 1 to Table 8 5 Map items can only have one group NoGroups 1 EndSect WblTypeDefinition
68. concentration This parameter is not used if INITSPEC refers to number of particles INITSPEC This line refers to how initial concentration is specified through the parameter INITSPEC i e either as number of particles or as concentration which then is converted into number of particles from the particle mass given above 1 If INITSPEC is set to 1 the initial concen tration given in the MIKE SHE AD input part refers to number of particles in each cell 2 If INITSPEC is set to 2 the initial concen tration given in the MIKE SHE AD input part refers to concentration This concentration will be converted to a number of particles by using the particle mass and the saturated volume of each of the compartments If the resulting number of par ticles is not an integer a truncation to nearest inte ger is performed ve If INITSPEC is specified positive it speci fies the number of particles in each cell and the concentration given in the MIKE SHE AD input part is disregarded VERTICAL CORRECTION 1 This line ensures that only a limited number of particles leaves the groundwater and moves to the overland by a correction of the vertical particle co ordinate when moving between compartments with changing thickness 1 turns this option on default 2 turns this option off 229 Se Working with Particle Tracking Line item Comment CONSTANT CELL PARTICLES
69. copy colours with transparency and blend colours The shaded contour option generates a smooth interpolated surface rather than displaying results in raster format as is done with the box contour and box contours with transparency interpolation options Note in some case the smoothing done by the shaded contour option may not be appropriate for your application and should be thoroughly evaluated before generating images to use for result interpretations The copy colours option will over print any underlying overlay layers The copy colours with transparency option allows underlying overlays to be visible under the contour plot depending on the degree of transparency used The blend colours options can be used to clearly visualize underlying image files through the con tours The resulting Result Viewer file using the blend colour option is shown in Figure 7 7 102 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot Figure 7 6 Specification of the shaded contour interpolation option with colour blending Figure 7 7 Shaded contour interpolation option with colour blending Isolines can also be added to all of the interpolation methods to visualize the breaks between contour levels Isolines can be activated by selecting the isoline check box on the Results Data Properties Style tab for the grid file Figure 7 8 The resulting Result Viewer file using the blend colour option with isolines is shown in Figure 7 9 As shown on Figure 7 8 addi
70. create a drain level map that does not contain wrong local depressions For large models this may be difficult and time consuming In this case one of the other drainage options may be better Note This method is not allowed when using Time varying drainage parameters VI p 152 Drainage routing based on grid codes This method is often used when the topography is very flat which can result in artificial depressions or when the drainage system is very well defined such as in agricultural applications In this method the drainage levels and the time constants are defined as in the previous method However a grid code map is also required which is 52 MIKE SHE Adding Groundwater Sx used to link the drain flow producing cells to a recipient node The drain levels are still used to calculate the amount of drain flow produced in each node but the routing is based only on the code values in the drain code file Distributed drainage options Choosing this method adds the Option Distribution item to the data tree With the Option Distribution you can specify an integer grid code distri bution that can be used to specify different drainage options in different areas of your model If the grid code equals 1 then the first option is used If the grid code equals 2 then the second method above is used If the grid code equals 3 then the drainage can be routed directly to a particular MIKE 11 branch If the grid code
71. dfs2 file in the Setup tab The preprocessed and saved dfs2 file is also useful if you are using a very large shp file or ASCII file in the Setup tab A large file such as this will be reinterpolated every time you enter the dialogue and during the pre processing step which for a very large file can be time consuming The last option in the right click menu is to save the file to a point theme shp file which will contain point values at every node shp file which is useful if you want to create report graphics or otherwise process the data inaGIS 4 1 3 Updating Overlays in Pre processed views The map view displays all of the overlays specified in the Display V 2 p 20 item of the Setup Tab If you want to change the overlays you can change them in the Setup Tab and they will be automatically updated in the Pre processed view without having to re preprocess your model 4 1 44 Pre processed Data Views MIKE SHE Flow Model Descrip Processed data Surface Topography Model Domain and Gric s Precipitation Stations x Evapotranspiration Overland Manning Number Detention Storage Initial Water Depth s Overland SZ exch Overland SZ Leak Inundation Area Separated Overlan River Links Unsaturated Zone Saturated Zone meter Manning Number 610000 oe fees z 600000 2 590000 4 a E 580000 570000
72. ee ee OE ae 330 24 TOOLS sae ea ag ae aes fr A Me Se de wer Be Hk de ir th OG es Se a AS A 331 24 1 Navigation 2 4 Since Hed Se he eee EES Heke HS ee 331 DA 2 0 10 cts ga en an Gand oe alee Beanies oH tata Mi ave an 5 331 243 SYNENTONIZE 2254 2 eee sei Bh hk Ob Db DADE oe amp De Se oS 331 24 4 Selection 0 00000000 a 332 24 4 1 Selectanddeselect 00004 332 24 4 2 Selecta Sub Set of Data 0 333 24 5 Interpolation 24004 katenedecedunedieak sas Kr de Rae 334 24 5 1 Active Dataset 2 2 2 2 oo non 334 24 5 2 Interpolation Settings 2 2 222mm 334 24 5 3 Search Type 246 4 48 wurd a ee 334 24 6 Eier 264 Se Bay eos he a Bra sie Kafka 335 24 7 SOUVAUG ash ha Oe eR Gene en RR a 335 24 8 Galculator ry a Gm Se va amp th beh bw bb bh ba he ae 336 24 8 1 List of Functions 336 24 9 Calculate Statistics ooo ee 339 24 10 Copy File into Data u cr uw ee Ge Ba ee 340 24 10 1 File to Copy 22 2 ace ee a tt eee a a 340 24 10 2 Item Mapping 2 2 2 on nn 340 24 10 32D to 3D Layer Mapping 2 nn nn nn 341 24 10 4 Sub area Position 0 000000 eee 341 24 10 5 Time Position 2 2 22 2 22cm 341 24 10 6 Operation u a amp aa 0 dee wa an Kuna ah 341 2411 CMO oo oo be wh Ge e846 b en ee ee be oe oe 341 29 DATA OVERLAY lee we ac ale a whee ete ee eae MU a ee g 343 25 1 Image Manager 2 c0 Ss 33a hr ine ri gu ea de G
73. encountered during execution and a print log which contains execution step information statistics on the run and a mass balance if requested Normally the results from the saturated zone species concentration in each grid is by far the most disk consuming parameter So be careful with the storing time step Mass balances which includes time series of mass storage and fluxes between components and sources drains bound aries etc can be stored at smaller time steps When you select the time step you should also be aware of the time scale of the process The time scale for transport processes in groundwater is usually much larger than the time scale for transport in a river Enter the desired time steps notice that the unit is hours in each of the edit fields There are no limitations on this time step but if you select a time step less than the simulation time step the storing time step will be the new simulation time step 192 MIKE SHE Simulation and Time Step Control LEA 12 3 Simulation and Time Step Control Simulation time steps are to some extent controlled by the user Several possibilities for time step control exist to make the execution as fast as possible with no numerical dispersion and instabilities The first possibility for controlling the simulation time steps in the differ ent components is simply to define the maximum time step in each com ponent Note that time steps should be given in increasing
74. file name has a default value that you should change if you will be creating several files of the same type such as multiple rain gauge time series files Otherwise you may accidentally overwrite the previous file 15 1 1 Import from ASCII The easiest way to import ASCII data into a dfs0 file is via the Windows clipboard In this case create a uniform time series file with the correct 242 MIKE Zero Working with Spatial Time Series Se number of time steps and then highlight all of the data values Then copy and paste the data from the ASCII file into the table However if you want to import the data from an ASCII file then you need to create the file from the File New menu and choose ASCII file This is part of the Time Series Editor itself 15 1 2 Import from Excel Only the first Excel Worksheet will be read when reading the Excel file However the worksheet can contain any number of columns of time series data If there are multiple columns of data each will be assumed to be the of the same type If the Excel file columns are of different types then you can change the data type in the Time Series Editor The time series is assumed to have a non equidistant time axis and the time series period is read from the first column of the Worksheet Worksheet Format The first row is a header containing the names of each of the columns Each subsequent row contains the data The first column is the date and time with DATE or
75. have the following dia logue 126 MIKE SHE Creating a water balance Se m Water balance Water balance type Total waterbalance 7 Description 5 water balance of the entire model setup M Output period Start date End date IV Use default period 1800701701 00 00 aj gt 2200701701 00 00 x M Output Timeseries Specifications Gutput time step hrs Type IV Use default output time step 0 Accumulated 7 Layer Output Specitications Layer aw layers Layerno 0 Sub Catchment Selection I Single Bell Location Grid code 0 rar 0 Y indew 0 r Output File Type Table Txt file B Water Balance Multiple postprocessings can be run on each water balance extraction More detail on the types of available water balances data are discussed in the Available Water Balance Items V p 130 section In brief the avail able types include e The total water balance of the entire model catchment or sub catch ments in an ASCII table a dfs0 file a dfs2 map file or a graphical chart also by layer e Model errors for each hydrologic component overland unsaturated zone etc in an ASCII table a dfsO file or a dfs2 map file also by layer e The snow melt and canopy interception water balance in an ASCII table or a dfsO file e An abbreviated or detailed water balance for overland or unsaturated flow in an ASCII table or a dfsO file and e
76. in interflow reservoir storage LR 34 inflow to baseflow reservoir LR 211 dead zone inflow to baseflow reservoir LR 35 baseflow from baseflow reservoir LR 36 groundwater feedback from baseflow reser LR UZ LR 2LUZ voir 44 pumping from baseflow reservoir LR 46 storage in baseflow reservoir LR 212 dead zone storage in baseflow reservoir LR 38 ichange in subcatchment storage in baseflow LR reservoir 213 change in dead zone storage in baseflow res LR ervoir 155 simple overland water depth SubOL Working with your Results 91 Se Output Items Table 6 2 Additional output items for time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion PT Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when this Type process is selected Code 156 simple overland exchange to lower zone or SubOL river 157 simple overland recharge SubOL 92 MIKE SHE Toolbars 7 THE RESULTS VIEWER 7 1 Toolbars M SS om e ud Ts 4 EREE Many of the functions in the Results Viewer are the same as those availa ble in other DHI software tools e g 2D Grid Editor Additional tools available in the result viewer are summar
77. in the palette 23 3 2 Palette Wizard step 2 of 3 Palette Wizard Step 2 of 3 ee e eef mae va hg fs ate Palette Table In the example above we have chosen 16 colours and used Rainbow as the colour model in step 1 We can now select any number of these levels and modify the colour and enter the value we want for this level Note that the value defines the upper boundary of the interval The colour can be speci 324 MIKE Zero Palette Ss fied either by the RGB value or by opening a colour dialog by pressing the button Land Colour If you are working with a land water palette then you may select the col our for land Land Value If you are working with a land water palette choose the value such that cells with a value larger or equal to this value will be shown as land 23 3 3 Palette Wizard step 3 of 3 23 3 4 Open Palette Wizard Step 3 of 3 m m E E F 51 of z oF 51 Mm I I IE m IE 75 In the third step you can verify that the palette that you have chosen corre sponds to what you were aiming at if so then press Finish otherwise press lt Back gt A palette that has been saved on the disk can be loaded and will immedi ately take effect The palette files have the extension pal Grid Editor 325 Se View 23 3 5 Save Save the present palette to disk for later re use The palette file should have the extension pal 23 4 Overlay A
78. interflow reservoirs There are no restrictions with respect of the baseflow reservoir distribu tions The pre processor warns in case the above restrictions are violated It can t give an error because this program doesn t know which type TOTAL OL SZ the user will specify in the water balance Post proces sor 140 MIKE SHE ADDITIONAL OPTIONS 141 142 MIKE SHE Sheet Pile Module on 9 EXTRA PARAMETERS The Extra Parameters section is a special section of the Setup data tree that allows you to input parameters for options that have not yet been included in the MIKE SHE user interface The Extra Parameters are only recognized if the Name e g sheet piling module are spelled exactly correct After the initial run you should check in the Preprocessor_print log file to ensure that the module has actu ally been activated Available Extra Parameters include e Sheet Pile Module V 1 p 143 e Negative Precipitation V p 148 e Precipitation Multiplier V p 149 e SZ Drainage to Specified MIKE 11 H points VJ p 149 e Time varying drainage parameters V p 152 e Distributed Snow Melt Constants V 1 p 155 e Canyon exchange option for deep narrow channels V p 155 e Simplified Overland Flow Options V p 156 e 2 Layer UZ Options V p 157 e GeoViewer Output V 1 p 158 9 1 Sheet Pile Module The Sheet Piling module is not yet included in the MIKE SHE
79. is used to view and change the properties of the time series being visualized 256 MIKE Zero File Properties Dialog File Properties r General Information Title Axis Information Asis Type Equidistant Calendar Axis v Start Time 12 07 2001 13 52 38 Time Step 0 days 00 00 10 hour min sec 0 000 fraction of sec No of Timesteps 10 Axis Units undetined xl OK Cancel E Help Item Information Undefined Insert Append Delete 17 2 1 General Information Title The title for the data contained in the file Any text can be typed here 17 2 2 Axis Information Axis Type The type of the time axis You can select between the following types e Equidistant Calendar Axis Data is stored with a fixed time interval and start at an absolute date and time e Equidistant Relative Axis Data is stored with a fixed time interval but do not have a absolute start date and time The start time is not applicable in this case e Non Equidistant Calendar Axis Each data point is stored at a specific arbitrary absolute time The time step is not applicable in this case e Non Equidistant Relative Axis Each data point is stored at a specific arbitrary relative time The start time and time step are not applicable in this case Time Series Editor 257 Properties e Relative Item Axis Non time varying data
80. meter or more On the other hand if you need more detailed site specific results and you have data and measurements to calibrate against then you will use a local scale model with a smaller grid say 50 200m and discrepancies between topography and river bank elevation will largely disappear In this case you will be more likely to be able to make accurate local scale predictions of groundwater surface water exchange The upper half of the dialogue displays the properties of the current cou pling reach While the bottom half of the dialogue is a table listing all of the coupling reaches defined 168 MIKE SHE MIKE 11 Ss M Location Branch name BelReservoir Upstream Chainage fo Downstream Chainage 835 r River aquifer exchange Conductance River bed only r Leakage Coef 1E 006 r Weir data for overland tiver exchange Select weir option in MIKE SHE Weir coefficient 1 838 Head exponent is Minimum upstream height above bank for full weir width 0 1 IV Allow overbank spilling Minimum flow area for overbank spilling 1 r Inundation options by Flood Code Flood Area Option Manual i Flood Code E Bed Topography Use GridData x eal bane Bed Leakage fu se River data x M Overview of MIKE SHE Coupling Reaches __ Branch Nam us ChainagDS Chainag Conductance Leakage Co Floo
81. methods The statistics contained in the HTML document and the shape file are cal culated using the same methods used to calculate statistics for the detailed time series output The reader is referred to the Detailed Time Series Out put section for more information on how the statistics are calculated Working with your Results 83 The Results Tab 84 MIKE SHE Run Statistics a 6 OUTPUT ITEMS The available output items for gridded data and time series data are listed in Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 Table 6 2 lists a number of additional output items such as the number of solver iterations that can only be displayed as a time series The list of available output items depends on the processes selected in the Simulation Specification dialogue Thus for example the items for Over land Flow only appear when Overland flow is being calculated Some of the items in the list are calculated as part of another process For example the depth of overland water is calculated based on seepage to and from the groundwater and as part of the MIKE 11 surface water calcu lations even if the overland flow is not directly simulated Furthermore some of the output items require that more than one process be simulated For example the leaf area index is only available if both evapotranspiration and unsaturated flow are calculated Also some of the items are input items such as precipitation which is usually input as a ti
82. must be an integer multiple of the maximum of all the storing time steps usually the SZ Flow storing time step For example if the Maximum allowed SZ time step is 24 hrs then the SZ Storing Time Step can only be a multiple of 24 hours i e 24 48 72 hours etc Speeding up your simulation In most cases the best way to speed up your model is to make it simpler You should look very carefully at your model and ask yourself the follow ing questions for example Do you really need a fine discretisation during calibration A coarser grid may allow you to do many more calibration runs Then when the model is calibrated you can refine the grid for the final simu lations but remember to check you calibration first Do you really need the Richards equation for unsaturated flow For regional models the two layer water balance method is usually sufficient which is very fast The gravity flow method is also typically 2 5 times faster than the Richards equation method Again during the calibration it can be a good idea to use one of the simpler methods and the more detailed method for the final simulations Is your MIKE 11 simulation too detailed If your MIKE 11 cross sections are too close together MIKE 11 will run with a very short time step Regional models can often be run with the simple routing meth ods in MIKE 11 which are very fast If your simulation is still too slow then the section Hardware Require ments VJ
83. next lines specifies the processes included in the Ou Of processes 3 simulation how many processes and which ones Extensions Sorption T Decay T Soil temperature T Plant uptake T The next lines specify the temperature distribution in FR INPUT PART space and time which is relevant for the plant uptake sim Air temperature ulation The temperature is specified as a combination of Air temp grid codes 1 the spatial distribution and the temporal variation i e a Air temp tim ser TIME tempture dfs0 dfs2 file or constant value with grid codes determining the distribution of the temperature stations and the temper ature specified in a time series data files Remember to specify the record number if the distribution is given as a dfs2 file 214 MIKE SHE Working with the XTSF File Se Table 13 12 MIKE SHE AD xtsf file format and description Line item Comment SZ INPUT PART Lower layer Bulk density Lower layer Init soil temp No of data elements Bulk density 1 999 1600 0 Hesssansse Initial soil temperature No of data elements 1 999 6 0 The next lines specify the bulk density and initial soil temperature for the saturated groundwater zone SZ The input consists of one or more data elements Each data ele ment consists of a lower layer input indicating the layer down to which the input is valid and a concentration input The data elements should cover all layers in the model i e the l
84. number of items can be laid over the graphical view for various pur poses Many of these options are switched on and off Grid overlays a grid following the grid cells in the view Position of tab view overlays a grid mask corresponding to the tabular view to the right Placing the pointer near the bottom end of the mask may move around this grid mask When the pointer changes character you can move the mask freely by keeping the left mouse button down Drop the mask at the new location by releasing the mouse button again The active point in the tabular view is highlighted in the mask with a distinct colour Position of perpendicular slices used only in connection with 3D files Selection highlights the cells which have been selected by use of the Selection tool Color legend places a colour legend next to the graphical representa tion the colours should be set using the Palette p 322 Geographical net lines of constant longitude and latitude are placed over the graphical view UTM Net lines of constant Eastings and Northings are overlaid You have to choose which UTM zone type and if it is a standard type then you should also choose the zone number For more information on the UTM coordinate system see the MIKE Zero Digitizer North arrow shows an arrow indicating the direction towards the geo graphical north pole 326 MIKE Zero Grid Settings 23 5 Grid Settings Grid Settings a M Contour ty
85. of subdi rectories The template describes the default organization of the directory and its subdirectories When you select OK a new empty project directory structure will be created Delete Project button After you are finished with a project you can use the Delete button to either delete just the mzp project catalogue file or the entire project with all of its artifacts This is a particularly useful function when your project is complete and you have safely archived all of your project data 2 3 2 Creating a New Model File After starting MIKE Zero you can create anew MIKE SHE model file by selecting FilelNewlFile in the top pull down menu or by using the New File icon in the toolbar When the New File dialogue appears select MIKE SHE on the left hand side MIKE SHE Getting Started 27 I MIKE SHE If you want to create new flow model set up file then select Flow Model she on the right hand side and click OK Product Types Documents 8 EE H MIKE Zero MIKE 11 well Editor wel MIKE 21 Suz Soil Properties uzs iO MIKE 3 IRET Vegetation Properties etv MIKE 21 3 Integrated Models ME water Balance Calculation wbl LITPACK F simple Shape Editor shp 2 cm FRMIKE SHE Toolbox mst F MShe Particle Tracking trpt Flow Model Alternatively you can select any of the listed file types on the right hand side or even navigate to one of the othe
86. of the text and graphics can be controlled through the graphics and font commands in the Settings menu or the pop up menu In the graphics settings you can select which point style or no point at all you want to use for each item which line style or no line at all you want to use to connect the points and the text format to apply to the points labels if desired In the font settings you can select the font font style size font effects and font color to use in the legends Please refer to Graphical Settings Dialog and Font Settings Dialog 17 4 4 TS Types graphical representation The representation of the data depends on the TS Type of the items e Instantaneous Points are connected by lines Empty data delete val ues are marked at the x axis 262 MIKE Zero Graphical View I Instantaneous Untitled undefined 161837 161647 161657 16 17 07 1817 17 18177 1817 37 1617 47 16 17 57 181807 2001 07 12 e Accumulated The same as Instantaneous However an Accumulated timeseries shall be always and increasing line Time Series Editor 263 I Properties Accumulated Untitied undefined 105333 105346 105353 105408 105418 10 54 28 2001 08 10 105633 1054 43 10 5458 105508 e Step Accumulated A line is drawn from the x axis previous timestep till the point 264 MIKE Zero Graphical View I Step Accumulated Untied undefined
87. of type Undefined unit percent and TS Type Instantaneous Item 2 to 15 Source Value of type Undefined unit m 3 s and no TS Type defined 254 MIKE Zero New File Dialog LEA The Title is Source and Start time is 01 01 2000 00 00 00 You can only edit the title and the number of time steps It is always possible to customize the data set When the data set has been created you can right click in the graphical view and select Properties The File Properties Dialog is displayed and all the properties can be edited 17 1 5 STPBatch template STPBatch template creates a timeseries with the following pre defined properties e Equidistant Calendar Axis e 10 seconds timestep e 10 Timesteps e 13 Items Water Depth of type Water Level unit meter and no TS Type defined Wave Height of type Wave height unit meter and no TS Type defined Wave Period of type Wave period unit second and TS Type Instan taneous Wave Direction of type Wave direction unit degree and TS Type Instantaneous Breaking Wave 0 1 of type Undefined unit undefined and no TS Type defined Current Speed of type Flow velocity unit m s and no TS Type defined Current Direction of type Flow direction unit degree and no TS Type defined Mean Grain Size of type Grain diameter unit millimetre and no TS Type defined Sediment Spreading of type Geometrical deviation unit and no TS Type defined Water
88. order i e dtRIVER lt dtOVERLAND lt dtyz lt dtsz Also note that this is the MAXIMUM time step That is the actual simulation time step is controlled by the sta bility criterions with respect to advective and dispersive transport given below Furthermore time steps for transport cannot exceed the storing time step for the relevant data in the flow result file from a MIKE SHE flow simulation Enter the maximum allowable Courant number for each component The Courant number is defined by V x dt dx velocity times time step divided by grid size This number should normally not exceed 1 0 for one and two dimensional transport UZ OVERLAND and RIVER and 0 8 for three dimensional transport SZ The maximum time step will be calcu lated accordingly Enter the maximum allowable dispersive Courant number for each com ponent The dispersive Courant number is defined by D x dt dx2 Disper sion coefficient times time step divided by grid size squared This number should normally not exceed 0 5 The maximum time step will be calculated accordingly The transport limits are used to avoid negative concentrations in cases with extreme gradients e g close to sources or in areas with highly irreg ular velocity fields Enter the maximum allowable transport from a node or grid as a fraction of the storage in the node or grid A recommended value for all components is 0 9 which ensures that this option is in use the value 0 determin
89. raphy modifications Hint You can also use one of the Flood code options to automatically modify your topography if you have wide cross sections or a detailed bathymetry file In this case after you have set up your MIKE 11 model you can specify a constant grid code for the whole model and let MIKE SHE calculate a modified topography based on the cross sections or bathymetry Then save the topography file as above and then use it as the model topography Flooding with Overbank Spilling If you are simulating flooding on the flood plain using the Direct Over bank Spilling to and from MIKE 11 V 2 p 240 option then the MIKE 11 cross sections are normally restricted to the main channel The flood plain is defined as part of the MIKE SHE topography Since the bank elevation is used to define when a cell floods it is more critical that the cross sec tions are consistent with your topography in the areas where you want to simulate flooding The table in the simulation log file mentioned above is useful to locate these inconsistencies It is usually necessary to have a very find grid and a detailed DEM for such simulations which tends to reduce the inconsistencies because it reduces the amount of interpolation and averaging when creating the model topography Flooding with Flood Codes If you are simulating flooding on the flood plain using the Area Inunda tion using Flood Codes areal source sink V 2 p 239 option then flood plain ele
90. s Lower layer input should be equal to or larger than the lowest layer number The layer intervals in the data elements may also not over lap If a constant value is specified the Base Unit for the sorption parameter applies If a dfs2 file is used you spec ifies the unit in the file Half life time EUM Data type Time scale Base Unit Seconds UZ RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS In the next lines specifies the decay parameters valid in Half life tim the unsaturated zone These parameters are specified using No of data elements 2 a number of data elements where each of these consists of Depth 0455 a lower depth and the sorption constant either given as a Sngl por T1 2 sec MAPS tc dfs2 1 uniform value or as a distributed value in a dfs2 file The DP T1 2 frac sec value specified in a data element applies from the soil sur DP T1 2 matr sec face in case it s the first input or the lower depth of the Depth 999 0 previous data element to the lower depth for the data ele Sngl por T1 2 sec 0 0 ment The depths are specified in meter below ground m DP T1 2 frac sec 0 0 Half life time DP T1 2 matr sec 0 0 EUM Data type Time scale Base Unit Seconds OL RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS Decay may also apply for the solutes in overland water Half life tim and the next lines specify the half life time for the over T1 2 sec 0 land component FHERERERE PA HH HH HH RE RP HH HH 13 5 Example input files 13 5 1 The followin
91. should be positioned As an example we have a grid with the dimensions 0 20 0 20 and we wish to copy data into the rectangle given by the four points 10 14 13 14 13 17 and 10 17 We select a file which has data in a grid 0 3 0 3 and specify j origin 10 and k origin 17 This will place the copied data in the desired rectangle 24 10 5 Time Position The copied data can be placed in the dataset being edited from a given time step and forwards You can specify either the time step or the time If you specify the time and that time is not coincident with a time step in the edited dataset then the nearest time step which is shown in the time step origin edit field will be used 24 10 6 Operation When the data is copied to the dataset this may be done in a number of ways e Copy all values are copied such that they replace the existing data in the dataset e Copy if target differs from delete value e Copy if source differs from delete value e Copy if source AND target differs from delete value e the values are added to the existing data in the dataset e the values are subtracted from the existing data in the dataset e the existing values are multiplied by the values in the file e the existing values are divided by the values in the file 24 11 Crop This tool is used to crop or reduce the dataset in one or more ways Grid Editor 341 LAA Tools x m Spatial Crop to view min max OK
92. temp of type Temperature unit degree Celsius and no TS Type defined Bed Slope x dir m m of type Bed slope unit and no TS Type defined Time Series Editor 255 LEA Properties Bed Slope y dir m m of type Bed slope unit and no TS Type defined Duration pct year of type Undefined unit percent and no TS Type defined The Title is STPBatch and Start time is 01 01 2000 00 00 00 You can only edit the title the time step and the number of time steps It is always possible to customize the data set When the data set has been created you can right click in the graphical view and select Properties The File Properties Dialog is displayed and all the properties can be edited 17 1 6 Wind template Wind template creates a timeseries with the following pre defined proper ties e Equidistant Calendar Axis e 10 seconds timestep e 10 Timesteps e 2 Items Speed of type Wind velocity unit m s and no TS Type defined Direction of type Wind direction unit degree and TS Type Instanta neous The Title is Wave Climate and Start time is 01 01 1990 00 00 00 You can only edit the title the time step and the number of time steps It is always possible to customize the data set When the data set has been created you can right click in the graphical view and select Properties The File Properties Dialog is displayed and all the properties can be edited 17 2 File Properties Dialog This dialog
93. the type It is possible to select from a number of units using the combo box which appears if you click in the field If a unit not contained in the list is needed write the unit in the text field TSType The Item type of data It s used to specify the meaning of the data values You can select between the following types 258 MIKE Zero File Properties Dialog Se e Instantaneous means that the values are representative at one precise instant For example the wind velocity is an instantaneous value e Accumulated means that the values are representative of one succes sive accumulation over the time and always relative to the start of the event to register values from For example the rainfall accumulated over the year if we have monthly rainfall values e Step Accumulated means that values are representative of an accumu lation over a timestep For example rainfall is a step accumulated value in the following context Let s say that we start measuring rain fall at 10 00 00 At 11 00 00 someone picks the recipient where rain felled registers the value of 10 and empties the recipient At 12 00 00 the same process but with a value of 15 and so on So in a timeseries we shall have the value 10 at timestep 11 00 00 and the value 15 at timestep 12 00 00 and so on Values represent the timespan between the previous timestep and the current timestep e Mean Step Accumulated means that values are representative of
94. their is an extra option that allows you to used Mean Step Accumulated values if you want Note The code does not check for the time series type All specifications are printed to the projectname_PreProcessor_Print log and projectname_WM_Print log files 9 6 Irrigation River Source Factors A global river source volume factor and river source discharge factor are available as extra parameters for increased control of river sources during irrigation Parameter Name Type Value river source vol float positive ume factor river source dis float 0 or positive charge factor Additional Options e 153 Extra Parameters None one or both can be specified If the factor is not specified then a Volume factor of 0 99 and a Discharge factor of 0 0 will be used The factors are used in the calculation of the available water depth of a river source C At Fy Vi ap nS E D h MIN ept N A A A 9 1 where Depth is the available water depth in the river link C is the source capacity Ar is the time step length F is the specified volume factor Vz is the volume of water in the link Fp is the specified volume discharge Dz is the river link discharge and A is the cell area The river link discharge is the same as used when checking with the threshold discharge for switching on off the source It is the absolute dis charge in the middle of the MIKE SHE river link i
95. this Type process is selected Code 104 groundwater flow in z direction SZ a vertical darcy flow rate e g in mm day SZ head elevation stored with SZ flows SZ for SZ cross sections in Results Viewer 109 groundwater extraction SZ Extraction 115 SZ exchange flow with river SZ River 112 SZ drainage flow from point SZ Drainage 105 SZ flow to general head boundary SZ GHB 216 Overland concentration OC 217 Overland sorbed concentration OC 218 Overland mass area OC 219 Air temperature OC 220 UZ concentration matrix phase UZ 221 UZ sorbed concentration matrix phase UZ 222 UZ concentration macropore phase UZ 223 UZ sorbed concentration macropore phase UZ 224 UZ mass flux matrix phase UZ 225 UZ mass flux macropore phase UZ 226 UZ soil temperature UZ 227 SZ concentration mobile phase SZ 228 SZ sorbed concentration mobile phase SZ Working with your Results 89 Se Output Items Table 6 1 Available output items for gridded data and time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion Water Quality PT
96. those that receive feedback and those that don t e Specified classification Alternatively a data file specifying Integer Grid Codes where UZ computations are carried out can be specified with grid codes range from 2 up to the number of UZ columns see Specified classification The location of the computational column is specified by a negative code and the simulation results are then trans ferred to all grids with the an equivalent positive code For example if a grid code holds the value 2 a UZ computation will be carried out for the profile located in that grid Simulation results will subsequently be transferred to all grid codes with code value 2 An easy way to generate a dfs2 file to be used for specification of UZ computational columns is to let the MIKE SHE setup program generate an automatic classifica tion first and subsequently extract the UZ classification grid codes The extracted dfs2 file can be edited in the 2D editor as desired and used to specify UZ computational grids e Calculated in all Grid points For smaller scale studies or studies where the classification system becomes intractable you can specify that computations are to be carried out in all soil columns e Partial Automatic Finally a combination of the Automatic classifica tion and the Specified classification is available If this option is cho sen an Integer Grid Code file must be provide see Partial automatic classification with the following grid
97. time series of values In the reverse direction all gridded data in the MIKE SHE Setup Editor can be easily saved as a point theme shape file from the pop menu when you right click on a colour shaded map This includes both interpolated data in the Setup tab and pre processed data in the Pre processed tab ArcGIS grids yet cannot be added directly in the MIKE SHE Setup Editor but they can be converted to the dfs2 file format Select New then the MIKE Zero Tool box and choose GIS in the list The Grid2Mike tool will convert your ArcGIS grid files to the dfs2 file format Support for native ArcGIS grid files will be available in a service pack later this year The MIKE Zero Tool box also contains tools for converting dfs2 files to ArcGIS shape files Mike2Shp and Grid files Mike2Grd These tools can be useful if you have manipulated your grid files in the MIKE Zero Grid Editor since it does not directly support shape file export Alterna tively you can open any dfs2 file in the MIKE SHE Setup Editor as along as the unit type is the same and then use the right mouse function to export to a shape file If you want to convert a dfs3 file to a shape file or a grid file then you will need to extract a dfs2 file from the dfs3 first using the 2D Grid from 3D file tool that is found under the Extraction item in the MIKE Zero Toolbox Some items in the MIKE SHE Setup Editor do not support shape files Mostly these are related to integer grid code
98. zoom enable options customize the representation select sub sets are select which items are shown You can know the precise point where the mouse pointer is positioned looking at the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen 02 01 1990 13 30 57 228 686 Select Mode num A You can zoom in and out on the data shown use previous zoom use next zoom or refresh the view using the Zoom In Zoom Out Previous Zoom Next Zoom and Refresh commands accessible from the menu that pops up right clicking on the view from the View menu or even from the Zoom toolbar jaa s E The first icon represents the Zoom In command the second one the Zoom Out The third one the Previous Zoom the fourth one the Next Zoom and the fifth one enables or disables the grid lines in the view which is also accessible from the menu that pops up right clicking on the view When you zoom in scroll bars are displayed at the bottom and right hand side of the view You can pan by moving the scroll bars 17 4 2 Editing modes Data can be edited graphically by using four modes e Select points allows you to select points When clicking in a point that point is selected A red square around the point appears and the corre spondent cell in the Tabular View is selected e Move points allows you to move points When the mouse pointer is near a point the pointer becomes a moving cross and you can move the point by moving the mouse pointer while keeping the left b
99. 0 tstep 0 item 2 layer 1 until all Dynamic Items are specified tstep 1 item 1 layer 0 Etc Files saved in this format can have any extension although dfs2 dfs3 dfs dt2 and dt3 should be avoided 21 1 3 Grid State Format You can save your grid file as a Grid State File gsf This will save your normal grid file together with extra information about a specific palette and background layers if any 308 MIKE Zero New File Bat1_0 dfs2 Bathymetry a Bathymetry m 33 81213 24 46291 19 3154 10 6 795625 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 4494 6 10 1277364 5 701092 10 1411848 12 2831 7 76279 1374738 11 05228 10 42219 125621 10 29478 11 28787 100 12 310668 11 13174 11 75838 Grid spacing 500 meter 11 97243 13 35617 13 70171 01 01 2003 00 00 00 Time step 0 Layer 0 12 45743 13 39727 12 88367 12 97459 13 53642 13 80042 1413465 13 86114 13 96189 gt a 2 pi E o D 3 a a w 2 e L__ Undefined Value J ik Projection Figure 21 1 Example of saved grid file in gsf format as interpreted by the grid editor 21 2 New File The new dialog is used to create new 2D and 3D grids A wizard takes you through five steps to input the basic information needed to define the grid 21 2 1 Step 1 Select the type of grid to be created 2D and 3D refer to the number of dimensions of the
100. 0 x Cancel WS Spectral Analysis wsS amp a 4 MIKE 21C Flow models M21C MIKE 21 Toolbox 21T MIKE 3 Toolbox 3T Litpack Files i pa oolbox LPKT KOMIKE SHE Flow Model SHE NIT li D ee ej In the File Type combobox is a drop down list of all of the file types that are available The length of the list depends on which MIKE Zero prod ucts you have installed Scroll down to and select the file type that you want This will display a list of available files of that type in the current directory from which you can select the file that you want to open If your file is in a different directory you can browse to the correct directory using the navigation tools at the top Finally click Open to open the file Importing Existing Release 2005 Projects You are not required to use the new project functionality in the 2007 Release If can simply open any MIKE Zero file in the main MIKE Zero dialogue However to take advantage of the new project focus of the 2007 Release you will need to import your existing MIKE SHE projects A MIKE Zero project can be created from an existing 2005 Release MIKE SHE models by either Reading the directory structure and adding all of the files in the directory and all of the sub directories or 30 MIKE SHE Importing Existing Release 2005 Projects a oa Reading the she file or any valid MIKE Zero pfs type file and adding all of the files referenced
101. 261 396 MIKE Zero
102. 2703701 02 00 z 2003708702 02 00 al z Name f Data type X Y Layer ME MAE RMSE STDres Correlation c 005N003W06R001M fi f head elevation in 1 97985e 006 570854 2 61 5017 61 5017 62 2307 9 49734 1 saturated zone c 005N003WO8E001M head elevation in 1 98032e 006 569892 2 113 682 113 682 113 989 8 37141 1 saturated zone c E ee 1 97639e 006 1575988 1 6 69369 6 69369 6 69454 0 10662611 head elevation Similar to the detailed time series output the Run Statistics can be viewed during a simulation Press the Refresh button on the Run Statistics page to update the Run Statistics using the most recent model results during a sim ulation For information on the statistics see Statistic Calculations V2 p 161 82 MIKE SHE Run Statistics Se 5 5 1 Shape file output for run statistics A shape file of statistics is also generated when the html document is gen erated The shape file contains all of the information contained in the HTML document and can be used to generate maps of model errors that can be used to evaluate spatial bias The shape file is created in the simula tion directory and is named ProjectName_Stat shp where ProjectName is the name of the she file for the simulation Note the Run Statistics shape file does not have a projection file associated with it and this file should be created using standard ArcGIS
103. 307 21 1 3 Grid State Format aaa aaa ew ORs wd ew 308 21 2 New File 202 000 toe 4 ee Ok eee ee eee 309 Se 21 2 1 Step 1 Select the type of grid to be created 309 21 2 2 Step 2 Specify the projection the geographical position of the origin of the dataset and the orientation 309 21 2 3 Step 3 Specify the temporal and spatial properties 311 21 2 4 Step 4 Specify the items to be included 311 21 2 5 Step 5 Overview 020000 ee eee 311 21 3 Import from ASCII File 24 eB van eg es a EE 311 21 3 1 File to Import 2 eee oe ee he ae a ea BR 312 21 3 2 Completion and Editing 2 46 Pa wh dae ee 843 312 2133 HINT zer arg ieee ee ob ee we hk amp de oe eo tg 312 21 4 Export to ASCWPIG 4 da wars bo stein Cw Sa R ei 312 21 5 Import from Dist File 2 2 245 ee eee ik bee be Ea ed ee 312 21 5 1 Step 1 Select Filetolmport 312 21 5 2 Step 2 Specify geographical parameters 312 21 5 3 Step 3 Specify the spatial properties 313 21 5 4 Step 4 Specify land value 313 21 5 5 Step 5 Completion and Editing 313 22 EDIT u fae Boe Behe Ae en Bf u Bee ee 2 a 315 22 1 Geographical Information 2 20020005 315 222 Time SIGNS e 02 4064 62 su nah 6 obese be ee oaa ed 317 22 2 1 Modifying Time Steps 0 04 317 22 3 HOMS a en be ee 318 22 3 1 Editing an
104. AUTOCAL Typically post processing is required for MIKE 11 result files res11 and for models that provide results in 1D 2D or 3D grid files dfs1 dfs2 and dfs3 For application of AUTOCAL with modelling engines that are not included in MIKE Zero the COM components included in the MIKE Objects Time Series Package can be used to create DFSO time series files from the model output files Before setting up AUTOCAL the simulation model should be properly tested At least one model run should be performed to create the output files that are needed in the AUTOCAL setup 27 1 New AUTOCAL Dialog To create anew AUTOCAL dialog from MIKE Zero choose File New MIKE Zero Auto Calibration 360 AutoCal Simulation Specifications LEA See also Figure 27 1 MIKE Zero 2 Time Series H Profile Series EE Grid Series EE Plot Composer Result Viewer Fi Bathymetries Animator IR ECO Lab Pa Data Viewer ES Mesh Generator auto Calibration REE MIKE Zero Toolbox EVA Editor HE WS Wave Analysis Tools EH MIKE 11 OK Cancel Help Figure 27 1 New Auto Calibration dialog 27 2 Simulation Specifications On the Simulation Specifications page Figure 27 2 the model simulation sequence the model parameter files and the simulation option are speci fied AUTOCAL 361 Im Auto Calibration Tool Model simulation sequence Optional arguments 1 C MikeZero
105. Create buttons in the MIKE SHE Setup dialogues In this way you can avoid the confusing task of assigning the Type of time series e g precipitation and EUM Unit type e g millimetres and the TS Type e g reverse step accumulated Each of these items are specified automatically If you create time a time series using a Create button the following dia logue will appear Create a new Dfs0 file Contents Uniform in all time intervals Import from old MIKE SHE TO file format Cancel Import from excel file Uniform Yalue 0 Excel version r mmday pe Time series period Start Date 1971 06 01 00 00 a x EndDate 1974 06 01 00 00 Time Series Interval Days Hours Minutes GE Ee Eo Time Series File Item type Precipitation Rate v Item name Station Data Precipitation Rate Dfs filename C 18 Training Courses 2005 2005 Bangkok Basic Exercises Working with Time Series 241 I Time Series Data The principle choice in this dialogue is whether to create an initially uni form time series file or to import a time series from an Excel file or from a file with the older tO file format Uniform time series In a uniform time series every time step will have the same value You should use the uniform time series option if you want to create a time series file where you do not have any data to import Time Series Period The time series period is the extent of the time series
106. Creating a new time series requires specification of properties for the time series file and the File Properties dialog is therefore opened in this case If you are opening an existing time series data file the data are immedi ately presented in the Time Series data dialog where data can be viewed and edited both in a graphical and in a tabular view In this case if you wish to change the already defined file properties it is required to open the File Properties dialog from the graphical view You operate the Time Series Editor from the main menu the tool bar icons or by right clicking on the graphical view Time Series Editor 249 Introduction 250 MIKE Zero New File Dialog 17 PROPERTIES 17 1 New File Dialog This dialog is used to create a new Time Series It is possible to create a Blank data set import from ASCII file or select from a number of pre defined templates containing different sets of prop erties x Blank TimeSeries E From Ascii File E E Templates E Wave Climate amp LITProf amp LITTren E Source E STPBatch E wind Cancel If you chose Blank Time Series the File Properties Dialog is displayed with a set of default properties You can then customize the time series according to your own needs If you choose From ASCH File the import from ascii Dialog is displayed where you can set the properties to import from ascii If you choose one of the template files
107. DUCTION The appearance of the Grid Series Editor differs if you create a new blank time series compared to opening an existing data dfs2 file Creating a new grid or matrix series requires specification of properties for the grid series file and the File Properties dialog is therefore opened in this case If you are opening an existing grid series data file the data are immedi ately presented in the Grid Series data dialog where data can be viewed and edited both in a graphical and in a tabular view You cannot directly change the already defined file properties of a grid series You operate the Grid Series Editor from the main menu the tool bar icons or by right clicking on the graphical view 20 1 Create a New Dataset To create a new dataset containing a 2D or a 3D grid go to File New and select Grid Series under the MIKE Zero heading This will open the New Grid Dialog shown below Be Blank Grid HE From Ascii File HE From Dfsu File Cancel Figure 20 1 New Grid dialog Grid Editor 303 I Introduction By selecting Blank Grid you must define the grid parameters as described in the section New File p 309 By selecting From ASCII File you must follow the instructions given in section Import from ASCII File p 311 By selecting From Dfsu File you must follow the instructions described in the section Import from Dfsu File p 312 20 2 Open an Existing Dataset To open an existing data
108. E 11 AD is used these lines are ignored RIVER INPUT PART The input for the river system applies only to the MIKE FOREN Initial Conditions SHE AD river module The initial concentration of the Initial conc 0 0 water in the river system can only be given as a uniform value i e the value is applied throughout the entire river network The unit is the base unit for concentration and is pg m3 Source Strength No of data elements 2 Location number 1 Time series TIME SourceStrength dfsO Record number 5 Location number 2 Time series 1 e 6 Record number With respect to the source strenghts these can only be given as mass fluxes The source strength can be constant during the entire simulation period in which case a single value is specified with the unit is kg s time which is the base unit for a mass flux If the source strength is time var ying the name of the dfsO is specified and the record number corresponding to the relevant time series The item in the dfs0 file has to have the data type eumlSolute Flux Solute flux The input consists of a number of data elements one for each overland source location The data element has a Location Number for identification purposes and then two lines with the value or time series file name and in case a time series file is used the item record number PRECIPITATION INFILTRATION INPUT PART Source strength No of data elements 2 Location number 1 Time series TIM
109. E PrecipitaionSourceStrength dfsO Record number 5 Location number 2 Time series 5 0 Record number The last input item in the species dependent section is the precipitation sources strength The source concentra tion can be given as a time invariant constant value or a time series In case a constant value is used the unit is the base unit for concentration ug m3 In case a dfs0 file is specified the item in the file has the data type EumICon centration The input consists of a number of data elements one for each overland source location The data element has a Location Number for identification purposes and then two lines with the value or time series file name and in case a time series file is used the item record number ea ee ee KR RE EXTRA TSF FILE F EXTRA PARAMETER SECTION Input for newer options is given at the bottom of the tsf file The sorption degradation module for MIKE SHE AD reads its input from a separate tsf file with extension xtsf The option can be activated by adding the following line and setting the input to T 210 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files Se Table 13 7 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment MIKE11 AD iT For the river module MIKE SHE AD can also be linked MIKE11 FILE NAME MIKE11 Karup_AD_SR sim11 MIKEII time step 30 DISABLE VALIDATION OF HD RES FILE T to the MIKE 11 AD To use the option the user has to ru
110. E SHE can discharge overland flow directly into the MOUSE links In this case the exchange coefficient in Equation 11 1 is defined as C C L 11 7 where Cz is the conductance and L is the length of the MOUSE pipe link in the MIKE SHE cell If the exponent Equation 11 1 is 1 0 then this is a simple drain formula tion and the conductance is per length with units of m s If the exponent is 1 5 then this is a weir formulation and the units of the conductance term are m s Drainage modelling with MOUSE 181 Using MIKE SHE with MOUSE 11 1 MIKE SHE Overland flow to MOUSE Manholes If the MOUSE manholes are not sealed then MIKE SHE can discharge overland flow into the MOUSE manholes In this case the exchange coef ficient in Equation 11 1 is defined as Cac 11 8 where Cz is the conductance If the exponent Equation 11 1 is 1 0 then this is a simple drain formula tion and the conductance C7 is per length with units of m s If the expo nent is 1 5 then this is a weir formulation and the units of the conductance term are m s MIKE SHE SZ drain flow to MOUSE Manholes If drain flow is specified in MIKE SHE then the drainage can be dis charged to a MOUSE manhole The flow in the drain is calculated by MIKE SHE based on the groundwater height above the drain level In MIKE SHE the distributed drainage option must be chosen see Drainage V 2 p 123 and the cells that drain to a manhole must hav
111. For each of the processes defined a set of process dependent parameters must be defined for UZ and SZ The input section for a sorption process must contain a selection of sorption isotherm and related parameters which may be distributed in depth For each isotherm the two input lines K1 and K2 should always be filled out whereas K3 and K4 are only necessary when sorption kinetics is included See Table 13 11 The input section for a decay process must contain information on dependency of soil temperature and soil moisture content together with half life times distributed in depth If macro pore transport is simulated different decay parameters can be chosen for each domain The next lines in the xtsf file specifies the process dependent parameters For each process the parameters are given as general governing parameters groundwater SZ related parameters and unsaturated zone UZ related parameters The first process begins with the name of the process and the process type 1 2 3 4 i e 3 is sorption and 4 is degradation GENERAL PROCESS PARAMETERS Species definitions Dissolved species Solute Sorbed species Sorbed Solute Type of sorption description EQ EQ KIN 1 2 so ak Type of Equilibrium sorption Lin Freu Lang 1 2 3 1 Type of Kinetic sorption No Hyst Hyst 1 2 1 Fracture sorption Bias factor for DP Frac sorp bias fac 0 EQ sorption fraction 0 1 0 5 only
112. In the pop up window you can specify where the ASCII File should be saved and under which File Name 21 5 Import from Dfsu File This tool can be used to import grid data from a Dfsu File and convert it into a DFS File dfs2 dfs3 dt2 and dt3 21 5 1 Step 1 Select File to Import On the Import from dfsu file dialog select the Dfsu File from which you wish to import the data 21 5 2 Step 2 Specify geographical parameters You must specify the geographical position of the origin of the new grid and the orientation of the grid The projection of the geographical coordinate system is read from the Dfsu file See Geographical Information p 3 5 for further information 312 MIKE Zero Import from Dfsu File I 21 5 3 Step 3 Specify the spatial properties You must specify the number of grid points and the grid spacing in each direction respectively The time axis properties is read from the Dfsu file 21 5 4 Step 4 Specify land value You must specify the minimum value that defines land The items are read from the Dfsu file 21 5 5 Step 5 Completion and Editing To complete the importing of data press Finish Thereafter the new DFS File is shown with the Grid Editor Here you can edit data and finally save the DFS File Grid Editor 313 SX File 314 MIKE Zero Geographical Information Im 22 EDIT 22 1 Geographical Information The Geographical Information dialog is used to set
113. KE Zero tools for more customized and detailed analysis of the gridded output 2 6 1 The Setup Data Tree Your MIKE SHE model is organized around the Setup Data Tree The lay out of the tree depends on the model components that are active in the cur rent model which are selected in the Simulation Specification dialogue Opposite the data tree is the corresponding dialogue for the currently selected tree branch The data tree is designed to hide the components that are not needed for the current simulation However no data is ever lost if the branch is hid den That is all data is retained even if the branch is not currently visible The design of the data tree is such that when you make selections in the current dialogue the tree is automatically updated to reflect the selection However the layout of the data tree and the options available in the cur rent dialogue are such that the data tree will only change along the current branch That is if you make a selection in the current dialogue additional options or branches may become available further along the branch How ever no changes will occur in other branches of the data tree For exam ple if you make a selection in the Precipitation dialogue this will affect MIKE SHE Getting Started 35 MIKE SHE the Precipitation data branch It will not affect the Evapotranspiration branch The only exception to the above rule is selections made in the Simulation Specifi
114. KarupiKarup she C MikeZero Karup Karup she Fa C MikeZero Karup Karup_Autocal she 12 __ c wikeZerot MIKE11 karup nwk11 _JE iMikeZerot MIKE11 karup_Autocal re EH aa C MikeZero Karup UzSoilPropertiesKarup mi C MikeZero Karup UzSoilPropertiesKarup Edt m Simulation option r Simulation title Scenario runs AUTOCAL MIKE SHE Karup setup Sensitivity analysis Parameter optimisation Figure 27 2 Simulation Specifications page 27 2 1 Model simulation sequence A model simulation in AUTOCAL can be defined as a sequence of indi vidual model runs As an example a modelling sequence may consist of a hydrodynamic HD model simulation followed by an advection disper sion AD model simulation that uses the HD output In this case two indi vidual model runs must be defined in the Model simulation sequence table including the HD run in the first row and the AD run in the second row Another typical example is that a model simulation is followed by a post processing model run to extract the simulation results at measure ment points and save these in DFS0 files AUTOCAL supports execution of the MIKE Zero numerical engines shown in Table 27 1 In this case the model simulation file for the numeri cal engine e g a sim11 file for a MIKE 11 run and a m21 file for a MIKE 21 run has to be specified in the Model simulation sequence col umn AUTOCAL also supports exec
115. MIKE SHE Model 4 2 4 2 1 Drainage to local depressions and boundary All cells with the same positive code are drained to the cell with the same numeric negative code Drainage to river All cells with the same positive code are drained to the cell with the same numeric negative code Running your Model Running MIKE SHE from a Batch File A batch file contains native DOS commands in a programming structure When executed each of the DOS commands in the batch file is executed sequentially Since most MIKE Zero and MIKE SHE programs can be executed in this way a properly constructed batch file allows you to run multiple models sequentially when you are not at the computer such as over night Basically to run MIKE SHE in batch mode you must 1 Setup the different models with different names using the Setup Editor 2 Create a BAT file containing the DOS commands to run the models 3 Run the BAT file and analyse the results using the standard MIKE Zero analysis tools e g the Results Viewer Setup the different models Your original model can be saved to a new name and the necessary changes made in the new set up We highly recommended that you create and set up the different models in the MIKE SHE Setup Editor In princi ple you could edit the SHE file which is a text file containing all of the information on the model set up but the file is typically very large and confusing and the format of this file must
116. MIKE SHE USER MANUAL VOLUME 1 USER GUIDE DHI Software 2007 10 November 2006 12 49 pm Please Note Copyright This document refers to proprietary computer software which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved Copying or other reproduction of this manual or the related programs is prohibited without prior written consent of DHI Water amp Environment DHD For details please refer to your DHI Software Licence Agreement Limited Liability The liability of DHI is limited as specified in Section HI of your DHI Software Licence Agreement IN NO EVENT SHALL DHI OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES AGENTS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSO EVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS OR SAVINGS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR THE INA BILITY TO USE THIS DHI SOFTWARE PRODUCT EVEN IF DHI HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY TO CLAIMS OF PERSONAL INJURY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SOME COUN TRIES OR STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITA TION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL DAMAGES AND ACCORDINGLY SOME PORTIONS OF THESE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU BY YOUR OPENING OF THIS SEALED PACKAGE OR INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THAT THE ABOVE
117. MIKE SHE simulation run in batch mode e Running the water balance utility for a MIKE SHE simulation without using the water balance utility graphical users interface e Running multiple water balance Postprocessing stages automatically without using the water balance utility graphical users interface The water balance graphical utility stores all of its information in a wbl file The wbl file is an ASCII file that can be edited with Notepad or other text editor but the format of the water balance file must be preserved You can open and review several wbl files created by the water balance utility to get an understanding of the file format and structure Note we cannot provide support to debug configuration files created out side of the user interface To run the water balance utility in batch mode the wbl file must be cre ated prior to executing it and all file names in the wbl file need to be valid If during calibration the same MIKE SHE file name is used for each simulation then the same water balance file can be used for all calibration runs If the MIKE SHE simulation to be evaluated is different from the MIKE SHE simulation used to set up the water balance file you will have to edit the water balance file To run the Extraction and Postprocessing steps in batch mode the your PATH statement needs to include directory where MIKE SHE was installed The default directory is C Program Files DHI MIKEZero bin
118. Model UZ Classification Grid Codes meter Classification grid codes 6150000 F7 eae eae jersaseshs iansunse Hissandpasfennenes i 6145000 aoe a a 7 3 ee RED 6140000 aa 5 Bee OB A pe 3 er 6135000 6130000 6125000 P T 6120000 Ban 6115000 4 eier 105 Ae ga ee 6110000 6105000 nn ee unse 6100000 570000 580000 590000 600000 meter If certain conditions are met then the flow results for a 1D unsaturated zone column can be applied to columns with similar properties In this map each numbered item is a calculation point The cell with a calcula tion point is given an integer grid code with a negative value The flows calculated during the simulation in the cells with the negative code will be transferred to all the cells with the same positive grid code value For example if an UZ recharge to SZ of 0 5 m day is calculated for UZ grid 66 MIKE SHE Preprocessing your model LAA code 51 then all the SZ cells below the UZ cells with a grid code of 51 will also be given the same recharge By just looking at the map it can be difficult to distinguish which calcula tions are being transferred to which cells An easier way to look at this is to save the map to a dfs2 file right click and then open the file in the Grid Editor where it is much easier to search for cell numbers Saturated Zone Items The saturat
119. No transformation GAP pool i Frost 27 11 Transformation to a common distance scale Frooki 4 O BE poo i 27 12 i where o is the standard deviation of the i th objective function of the ini tial population used in the Shuffled Complex Evolution or Population Simplex Evolution optimisation algorithm and g is a transformation con stant given by F F amp mas min j 1 2 vo min 27 13 o O Transformation to a common probability scale 8i F poot i gee 27 14 O where is the cumulative distribution function of the standard normal distribution and u and o are the mean and the standard deviation of the i th objective function of the initial population The transformation functions that are applied in the transformation to a common distance scale and a common probability scale are introduced to compensate for differences in the magnitudes of the different measures so that all g have about the same influence on the aggregated objective function near the optimum When using a population based optimisation algorithm such as the Shuffled Complex Evolution method and the Popu lation Simplex Evolution an initial population within the feasible region is evaluated From this initial population the transformation functions are calculated AUTOCAL 375 Im Auto Calibration Tool 27 5 Scenario Runs If the scenario run option has been chosen the scenario run properties must
120. Note that files can be converted from one format to the other i e saved in a different format than they opened in but with restrictions see below DFS This format is developed by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic time vary ing data Both zero one two and three dimensional data can be stored although only zero dimensional data is relevant for the time series editor Files saved in this format must have the extension dfs0 or dfs dtO is also allowed since it is the old timeseries file format ASCII This is a generic text format which can be produced by almost any spread sheet or text editors Only non equidistant calendar axis data can be saved in this format Files must have the following format Title Time Itemname 1 Itemname 2 Unit 100182 1003 2 100256 1800 1 Time Series Editor 269 LEA Properties 1996 12 24 18 00 00 1 23 2 34 1996 12 24 18 30 00 1 44 3 38 1996 12 24 19 00 00 2 12 4 63 etc The first line contains the title The second line contains the string Time followed by the name of the items The list is separated with tabs The third line is optional It contains the string Unit followed by three values per item specifying unit item type unit type and time series values type usually as a result of a previous export Each of the following lines contain data for one time step Each line con sists of a date and time followed by one field for each of the data items The date and
121. O Record number 1 Location number 2 Time series 200 Record number The units for the source strength depend on the source type Each of the sources identified by their location number in the species independent section must be given a strength The source strength can either be constant during the entire simulation period in which case the unit is the Base unit or can be a dfs0 time series in which case the item has to have the correct EUM data type and the user is free to set the unit to one of the available units for the eum data type The input consists of a number of data elements one for each UZ source location The data element has a Location Number for identification purposes and then two lines with the value or time series file name and in case a time series file is used the item record number OVERLAND INPUT PART Initial Conc and Solubility Initial Conditions MAPS OLConcentration dfs2 2 Solubility 100 The initial concentration input for the overland is given as surface concentration M L2 In this way it is easier to control the mass of solutes introduced because you do not have to consider surface water depth It can be given as single value in which case the unit is the base unit for the data type eumIMassPerUnitArea Mass Per unit Area g m or as a distributed value in a dfs2 file As evaporation can cause the overland concentration to increase solubility needs to be specified to av
122. OCAL checks the file and if it is not empty it is assumed that the model simulation has failed In this case AUTOCAL handles the simulation in the same way as when it receives an error return code as described above To use this facility it is necessary to include as part of the model simula tion an option that writes an error message or any dummy string to the AutocalSimErr dat file if an error occurs during the model simulation If an error message is written to the file the file can be saved as part of the AUTOCAL run for later inspection by using the Save Output Files option AutoCal INDEX 393 Index A Equation parser 369 Actual time step EUM Data Units 349 ET isk gow oO wee Hea Sak 72 Change dx De Oe e See 352 OL a wiege neh eet a 72 Default units 352 UZ wes ae a oe ee es 72 Imperial 6 wok trea a Be 351 Aggregate measure 374 Sl adi a Pw ae Poe a a 351 ASGIW Fil acs amp aa a ee ee 270 311 Evolution 381 Auto Updater 21 Export to ASCII File 273 Axis information 257 ExtraParameters 143 B F Batch Files 68 File Formats 269 307 Create wala ee eS eee dere 68 File Properties Dialog 256 Results 69 Filter 2222 oo onen 335 Setup lt 6 ee oe ee eee ae 68 Finite difference approximation 378 Bilinear Interpolation 292 Flow Model
123. S 2 4 a wk were a0 Erd Bann Boece Be eh Kiet lea 251 17 1 New FileDi log 2 22 2 22 22 2 0550 HP a 251 17 1 1 Wave Climate Template 252 17 1 2 LITProf template asec ee aoe Era be OG ae 253 17 1 3 LIT Tien template 2 4 042 isses Byes ees 253 17 1 4 Source Template 2 2 moon 254 17 1 5 STPBaten template 244 444 24 5 454 4 u 4 a ahead 255 17 1 6 Wind template geek ae dee 22 20 Whe Ewe we Se eae eS 256 17 2 File Properties Dialog 2 2 00022 256 17 2 1 General Information aoaaa 257 17 22 Axis Information ok ee hoo ne aa her 257 17 2 3 Item Information zz 2 2 ee Be Bein de ae 258 17 3 Tabular View 22 4 kanns eek ees ade Oe BS RSS 260 174 Graphical View 2 24 24 6 6 ed eo nee ee Keen 260 WG ZOOM 2 02 2 lee a ee ee ee dee a eee ee A aN 261 17 4 2 Editing modes 222 222 Peed seh ea Gad 261 17 4 3 Graphical and font settings 262 17 4 4 TS Types graphical representation 262 10 MIKE Zero 17 5 Graphical Settings Dialog 2 2 moon 267 17 6 Font Settings Dialog 2 24 2 ara HH a naar a 268 177 File Formats es ased amat alas eat teure era 269 17 8 Import from ASCII File 20 2 22 270 17 9 Export to ASCII File 2 22422228 224 2 1 na 64 228 el 273 18 TOOLS 22 248 ar 0 a iu 2 ae ee rg 275 18 1 Calculator 2 wre a a a ee en ee ee 275 18 2 Interpolation gc au ecw 43 erben Bean 276 18 3 Sel
124. SHE installation directory before installing the Service Pack If you did not back up your installation directory and you need to restore a previous version DHI maintains an archive of all standard patch versions Contact your local support centre and we will send you a copy of your pre vious executable MIKE SHE Getting Started 21 Introduction 22 MIKE SHE Getting Help Ss 2 MIKE SHE The MIKE SHE is part of the MIKE Zero suite of modelling tools which is a global user interface for managing and manipulating data files and projects for many of the DHI Software products Thus when you launch MIKE SHE or one of the other MIKE Zero products you are really launch ing MIKE Zero MIKE Zero then provides the framework from which you can run MIKE SHE or any other product in the MIKE Zero family 2 1 Getting Help If you click Fl in any MIKE SHE dialogue you will land in one of the sections of The MIKE SHE Reference Guide Likewise if you click Fl in any MIKE 11 or other MIKE Zero dialogue you will land in a relevant section of the on line help This manual the MIKE SHE Getting Started manual is a supplement to the basic on line F1 help and provides you with additional information on how to use MIKE SHE to get the results that you want 2 2 Hardware Requirements The hardware requirements for MIKE SHE depend on the model that you are trying to simulate As a rule of thumb any good quality new compute
125. Sngl por T1 2 sec 864000 0 DP T1 2 frac sec 864000 0 DP T1 2 matr sec 864000 0 UZ RELATED PROC ESS PARAMETERS Half life tim No of data elements 2 Depth 0 55 Sngl por T1 2 sec MAPS tc dfs2 1 DP T1 2 frac sec DP T1 2 matr sec Depth 999 0 Sngl por T1 2 sec 0 0 DP T1 2 frac sec 0 0 DP T1 2 matr sec 0 0 OL RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS T1 2 sec Half life tim 0 HARHFHRAHH EHRE REE PILE RPP IL RE Rp REPRE Rp Kp Rp I 226 MIKE SHE Requirements in MIKE SHE WM I 14 WORKING WITH PARTICLE TRACKING MIKE SHE particle tracking PT is in fact a part of MIKE SHE AD PT allows the user to calculate the flow path of a number of hypothetical par ticles which are moved in the three dimensional saturated groundwater zone SZ The particles are displaced individually in a number of time steps The movement of each particle is composed of a deterministic part in which the particle is moved according to the local ground water veloc ity calculated by the MIKE SHE water movement module and a stochas tic part where the particle is moved randomly based on the local dispersion coefficients Particle tracking is only calculated for the saturated zone SZ and parti cles that leave SZ are not traced any further Initially the user assigns a number of particles to the compartments of the model grid the computa tional
126. Tool V 2 p 135 dialogue If you have forgotten to save the water balance data then you will need to re run your simulation I Default output folder Folder name C AWork main Products s ource MSHESRegT est 4D Karup KarupF or4D er After you have run your WM simulation creating and running a water bal ance in MIKE SHE is quite simple following these steps 1 Create anew water balance document V p 122 2 Extract the water balance data V p 123 3 Specify your water balance V p 125 and 4 Calculate and View the Water Balance VJ p 129 8 1 1 Create a new water balance document The new water balance document is created by selecting the File New item in the top menu or clicking on the New icon in the top menu bar In the dialogue that appears select MIKE SHE and Water Balance Calcula tions in the right hand box as shown below 122 MIKE SHE Creating a water balance oa x Product Types Documents sale H E MIKE Zero Flow Model she MIKE 11 well Editor wel MIKE 21 RUZ Soil Properties uzs iS MIKE 3 IRET Vegetation Properties etv MIKE 21 3 Integrated Models Water Balance Calculation wbl LITPACK simple Shape Editor shp ie F RMIKE SHE Toolbox mst ME Mshe Particle Tracking trpt Water Balance Calculation cm 2 R 8 1 2 Extract the water balance data To extract the water balance data you must specify which simulation you
127. Uniform Value 290 R Interpolation 276 Redistribution of ponded water 156 Introduction 303 Results Item information 258 Time Series Output 59 L S Latin hypercube sampling 382 Scaled sensitivity values 390 Log file 390 Select Sub Set 277 Logarithmic transformation 369 Sensitivity measures 378 Setup M Data Tree 35 Measurement uncertainties 373 Sheet Pile Module 143 MIKE 11 result file 363 Flux Units 3 4 u hs 2 Be es 195 MIKE GeoModel 158 Input File sx co ehG eee bees 145 MIKE Zero Toolbox 363 Leakage Coefficient 144 Monte Carlo sampling 382 Location ee BSA 144 MOUSE u weg eye Ge oe girs 179 shp file ur Jess naeh 40 MsheMouse pfs file 184 Simulation Parameters 214 Multi objective calibration 374 Solute Transport 195 Calibration weal de eee eo 193 N Concentration 195 Navigation 2 2 ate 2 2 Boe ead 331 Requirements 192 New File 251 309 Results 192 Number of complexes 381 Verification 193 Spatial Data O Stationary Real Parameters 283 Overland Flow Time Varying Real Parameters 283 Boundary Conditions 45 Species DEPENDENT Data 206 Overland Flow Routing Species INDEPENDENT Data 199 Directly
128. Value used in the file The Delete value should be a number not typical for the data and that represents meaningless data When a delete value is found on the data the correspondent cell in the tab ular view is empty and there is no point in the graphical view Time Series Export ASCII format When this option is enabled all the settings are set according to the format a timeseries is exported to ASCH using Timeseries Editor You can only disable this option if you set an Equidistant axis type Doing so you can than set the Start Time the timestep and the number of timesteps supposed to exist in the ASCII file File preview Just bellow the description properties there is the file preview where you can see the top part of the ASCII file specified Import preview Below file preview there is the import preview Here you can preview the result of the import with the selected description properties and change the properties till you get the expected result After all description properties are set as wished click the OK button and the import is done 272 MIKE Zero Export to ASCII File LA 17 9 Export to ASCII File You can Export a Timeseries to an ASCII File For further description of Time Series File Formats see File Formats Go to File and Export to ASCIT In the pop up window you can specify where the ASCII File should be saved and under which File Name The file is exported using default Timeseries Editor prope
129. Zlayer 115 7 5 Displaying a MIKE 11 cross section aoaaa aaa aa 115 7 6 UZ Specific Plots oaaao 116 7 6 1 UZ Scatter and Filled Plots oa aaa 116 1 02 UZ PIO sens 8420 ge ee erh ee eg 117 Se 8 USING THE WATER BALANCE TOOL 2 121 8 1 Creating a water balance 2 2 2 2 comme 121 8 1 1 Create anew water balance document 122 8 1 2 Extract the water balance data 123 8 1 3 Specify your water balance 125 8 1 4 Calculate and View the Water Balance 129 8 2 Calculating Water Balances in Batch Mode 129 8 3 Available Water Balance ltems 5 130 8 4 Standard Water Balance Types 2000 136 8 5 Making Custom Water Balances 2 2 rn 139 8 6 Water Balance Restrictions 000 0000004 140 8 6 1 Linear Reservoir and Simple Sub catchment Overland Flow 140 Additional Options 200222000000 141 9 EXTRA PARAMETERS 2 aoe 2 0 02 0 20 ee a en eee RD 143 9 1 Sheet Pile Module 4 4444 dw de ee de edhe RRM RE ORS 143 9 1 1 Sheet Pile Location 42 e 244440444 eee eee eda 144 9 1 2 Leakage Coefficient 05 144 9 1 3 Top and bottom levels optional 145 9 1 4 Input File for the Sheet Pile Module 145 9 2 Negative Precipitation 0 2000222 e
130. Zone Macro pores to Satu rated Zone Positive to UZ uz qtuz Transpiration from the root Positive up always posi zone tive uz qeuz Direct evaporation from soil Positive up always posi tive uz qgwfeedbackuz Feedback from LR to UZ Positive from LR uz duzdef Change in UZ deficit Positive when increasing 133 Using the Water Balance Tool Table 8 4 UZ Unsaturated Zone items Item Description Sign UZ UZSZStOTCOIT Correction to account for dif ference in unconfined storage Positive when storage increases capacity for UZ and SZ uz uzwblerr UZ Water balance error Positive if the sum of UZ inflows exceeds UZ out flows Table 8 5 SZ Saturated Zone items Item Description Sign sz qrech Recharge from UZ to SZ Positive to UZ sz qrechmp Recharge from UZ macropo __ Positive to UZ res to SZ sz getsz Evapotranspiration directly Positive up always posi from SZ tive sz golszpos Upward flow from SZ to over land Positive up always posi tive sz golszneg Downward flow from over land to SZ Positive up always nega tive sz szwblerrtot SZ water balance error for sub catchment Positive if the sum of SZ inflows exceeds SZ out flows sz gszprecip Precipitation added directly to SZ layer Positive up per layer sz gszout SZ flow out of the subcatch Positive out of SZ always per layer
131. _Option 2 1 Leakage coefficient based only on MOUSE pipe leakage coefficient 2 Leakage coefficient based on a series connection of the MOUSE pipe leakage coefficient and the MIKE SHE aquifer properties Mouse_MPR_file name I MOUSE_NASSJO handskeryd mprl Name of the mpr file The MIKEZero file name format indicates that the file name is relative to the location of this document SZ_Coupling 1 1 or O to include exclude SZ lt gt MOUSE coupling OL_Coupling 1 1 or 0 to include exclude Overland lt gt MOUSE coupling Dynamic_Coupling 1 1 for dynamic coupling Otherwise the initial MOUSE conditions will be used Drainage_To_Manholes 1 1 to include SZ and paved area drain to manholes In this case the SZ drain option must be Levels and Codes should rather be named Distributed Option In the areas with drain to MOUSE the Distributed option code must be 4 For each drain code value found in areas with Distributed code 4 a reference from the code to a MOUSE manhole must be defined in the Drainage_Manholes section see below MIKE SHE Coupling MIKE SHE and MOUSE Ss Table 11 1 MsheMouse pfs file format and description Line item Comment Smooth_SZ_Inflow 1 Smooth_OL_Inflow 1 Ensures a more smooth calculation of flows to MOUSE when the MIKE SHE time steps are large compared to the MOUSE time step The MOUSE coupling is only made a
132. a e The Plot Composer for creating standard report plots 32 MIKE SHE The MIKE SHE User Interface I e The Results viewer V 1 p 93 for results presentation e Bathymetries for sea bed elevations e Animator for 3D visualization of surface water and waves e EcoLAB for water quality in surface water which can be used in MIKE 11 but not yet in MIKE SHE e Auto Calibration Tool V 2 p 359 for autocalibration sensitivity analysis and scenario management e EVA Editor for extreme value analysis of surface water flows e Mesh Generator for the finite element versions of MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 e Data Extraction FM for the finite element data e MIKE Zero Toolbox various tools for data manipulation 2 6 The MIKE SHE User Interface The MIKE SHE user interface is organized by task In every model appli cation you must 1 Set up the model 2 Run the model and 3 Assess the results The above three tasks are repeated until you obtain the results that you want from the model MIKE SHE Getting Started 33 Sse MIKE SHE When you create or open a MIKE SHE model you will find your self in the Setup Tab of the MIKE SHE user interface lolx File Edit View Refresh Run Window Help lej x bsulsBelser ljaser2el lsir m MIKE SHE Flow Model Descriptic of Diy Peru Context Sensitive dialogue rid file dfs2 E s Simulation specification Filename Attribute xf Model Domain and Grid
133. a set has been created you can right click in the graphical view and select Properties The File Properties Dialog is displayed and all the properties can be edited 17 1 3 LITTren template LITTren template creates a timeseries with the following pre defined properties Time Series Editor 253 Properties e Equidistant Calendar Axis e 1 hour timestep e 10 Timesteps e 7 Items Time of type Undefined unit hour and TS Type Instantaneous Wave Height of type Wave height unit meter and no TS Type defined Wave Angle of type Wave direction unit degree and no TS Type defined Wave Period of type Wave period unit second and no TS Type defined Current Speed of type Flow velocity unit m s and no TS Type defined Current Angle of type Flow direction unit degree and no TS Type defined Mean water level of type Water Level unit meter and no TS Type defined The Title is LITTren and Start time is 01 01 2000 00 00 00 You can only edit the title and the number of time steps It is always possible to customize the data set When the data set has been created you can right click in the graphical view and select Properties The File Properties Dialog is displayed and all the properties can be edited 17 1 4 Source Template Source template creates a timeseries with the following pre defined prop erties e Equidistant Calendar Axis e 1 hour timestep e 10 Timesteps e 15 Items Duration pct year
134. above ground m negative value when relative In cells where the sheet pile extends across the entire layer the top and bottom levels should simply be set to large positive and negative values respectively e g 1 0E 30 and 1 0E 30 9 1 4 Input File for the Sheet Pile Module The name of the input file is specified in the Extra Parameters section described above The file has the general MIKEZero parameter file pfs format The exact format of the file is given below along with a descrip tion of the different data items Line item Comment MIKESHE SheetPiling_File File Version can be or 2 but FileVersion 2 must be 2 if you want to check SheetPiling for the SpecifiedX Y Levels option NrOfLayers 1 Total number of SZ layers with sheet piling SpecifiedX YLevels 1 0 not specified 1 top and bottom levels specified for each layer Note only checked when FileVersion gt 1 Layer_1 This section must be repeated for each NrOfLayers sheet piling layer The sections must be named Layer_1 Layer_2 etc LayerNumber 1 The MIKE SHE SZ layer number of the actual sheet piling layer 1 top layer Additional Options 145 Extra Parameters Fixed Value 0 DFS_2D_DATA_ FILE FILE_NAME SPGrid_1 dfs2I ITEM_COUNT 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 1 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect GridCodes Line item Comment GridCodes GridCodes section Specifica Type 1 t
135. al conditions The file to be specified is the AUTOCAL PSE optimisation output file see Section 27 11 3 Stopping criteria The same stopping criteria as used for the SCE algorithm are applied 27 8 Save Output Files AUTOCAL allows output files from the individual model simulation runs to be saved The names of the files to be saved are specified in the Output files table Figure 27 10 The saved output files from the individual simu lations are given an extension in the file name that contains the simulation number For instance if the simulation model produces a result file called 386 AutoCal Office Grid Si MyResults dfs2 the saved files are named MyResults_1 dfs2 MyResults_2 dfs2 etc C MikeZero Karup KarupDetailedTS_M11 dts0 15 Figure 27 10 Save Output Files page 27 9 Office Grid AUTOCAL includes an Office Grid extension for distributed computing whereby the calculations can be run on a number of PCs connected in a network This includes also execution on multi processor PCs To use this facility the OfficeGRID software must be installed on all computers to be used in the network The OfficeGRID is configured by defining a primary server that acts as the master for the AUTOCAL Office Grid application and a number of clients that do the model evaluations Note that an OfficeGRID primary server can also be used as a client in the OfficeGRID network AUTOCAL Office Grid can be used with all the s
136. ality _ MIKE 21 MIKE 3 Sediment MIKE BASIN Other Irrigation Rate Immjh 50 Item geometry O dimensional meter si Item geometry 1 dimensional meter s2 Item geometry 2 dimensional meter S3 f Item geometry 3 dimensional meter 54 Kinematic Viscosity 105 6 m 2 s Layer Thickness milimeter S6 Leaf Area Index iO is7 Leakage Coeff Drain Time Const per sec Length Error lijm 59 Logical 0 3 s Manning s M Imes 7 161 Porosity Coefficient O 162 Precipitation Rate mmiday ea Pressure Head meter Pumping Rate im 3 s Recharge mmjh s Relative moisture content 0 lw tre who should forward your request to Mite developer for inclusion in the next release 26 1 Changing from SI to Imperial American data units The default Unit Base Groups ubg file C Program Files Common Files DHI MIKEZero MIKEZero ubg is read every time you open a model In the same directory there are two standard Unit Base Group files MIKEZero_Default_Units ubg MIKEZero_US_Units ubg MIKE ZERO Options 351 EUM Data Units The first is the default file and contains standard SI units for all data items in all of the MIKE Zero products The second contains standard Imperial US units for most data items in all of the MIKE Zero products To change the display units for all of your data items to Imperial units load the MIKEZero_US_Units ubg file Save and Close the dialogue and then reopen your model
137. also includes general tools for data editing anal ysis and manipulation After starting MIKE Zero you can create a new MIKE Zero file by selecting FilelNewlFile in the top pull down menu or by using the New File icon D in the toolbar When the New File dialogue appears select MIKE Zero on the left hand side see below ME j x Product Types m MIKE Zero alles Documents 53 EE Time Series dFs0 MIKE 11 profile Series dfs1 MIKE 21 W Grid Series dfs3 dfs2 MIKE 3 Foata Manager dfsu mesh MIKE 21 3 Integrated Models PAP lot Composer plc LITPACK PResult Viewer rev MIKE FLOOD Tk Bathymetries batsf E MIKE SHE ae Animator mza ECO Lab ecolab BM Auto Calibration auc FREVA Editor eva T Mesh Generator mdf Data Extraction FM dxfm SDAMIKE Zero Toolbox mzt MIKE Zero a framework that gives access to DHI Software modelling systems The most commonly used MIKE Zero tools in MIKE SHE are described in the printed manual However those tools that are either infrequently used or irrelevant to MIKE SHE are not included here The MIKE Zero tools include with the tools relevant for MIKE SHE in bold e The Time Series Editor for time series data e The Profile Series Editor for time varying 1D data not used in MIKE SHE e The Grid Editor for time varying 2D and 3D data e Data Manager for finite element dat
138. an average accumulation per timestep Picking the previous example a mean step accumulated type could be used to register the average rain fall per 15 minutes Which would be 2 5 we are working now with 15 minutes and registering in 1 hour timestep for 11 00 00 and 3 75 for 12 00 00 and so on Values represent the timespan between the previ ous timestep and the current timestep e Reverse Mean Step Accumulated is equal to Mean Step Accumulated type but values represent the timespan between the current timestep and the next Timestep Used for forecasting purposes The representation for each of the TS Types is different since the physical meaning of values is also different Please refer to TS Types graphical rep resentation Min Minimum value for all data in the item This value is not editable since it s based on statistical information of the Item Max Maximum value for all data in the item This value is not editable since it s based on statistical information of the Item Mean Mean value for the data in the item This value is not editable since it s based on statistical information of the Item Time Series Editor 259 LEA Properties Insert Insert an item before the selected one This item will be named Untitled and you can immediately edit the Item properties Append Append an item at the end of the list This item will be named Untitled and you can immediately edit the It
139. and channel flow and their interactions Each of these processes can be represented at different levels of spatial distribution and complexity according to the goals of the modelling study the availability of field data and the modeller s choices Butts et al 2004 The MIKE SHE user interface allows the user to intuitively build the model description based on the user s conceptual model of the watershed The model data is specified in a variety of formats independent of the model domain and grid including native GIS formats At run time the spatial data is mapped onto the numerical grid which makes it easy to change the spatial discretisation MIKE SHE Getting Started 17 sae Introduction Rain and Snow m Canopy interception PN Net precipitation Snow melt fir BZ Overland Infiltration Flow Root zone Unsaturated flow Moving water table Groundwater flow z Ree Figure 1 1 Hydrologic processes simulated by MIKE SHE MIKE SHE uses MIKE 11 to simulate channel flow MIKE 11 includes comprehensive facilities for modelling complex channel networks lakes and reservoirs and river structures such as gates sluices and weirs In many highly managed river systems accurate representation of the river structures and their operation rules is essential In a similar manner MIKE SHE is also linked to the MOUSE sewer model which can be used to sim ulate the interaction between urban storm water and sanitary sewe
140. are called the transport set up files tsf and xtsf These are both text files which contain all relevant information for the simulation They must be located in the project s home directory It is essential for a successful simulation with the advection dispersion mod ule that the formats described below are followed Two dimensional input data as well as time dependent input data are given in the usual MIKE ZERO formats for such data i e dfs2 and dfsO formats All results are also stored as dfs2 data and are ready to be handled by the different editing and presentation tools 13 1 Data Units All units for constants related to distances areas and volumes should be given in metric units m m2 and m All units for constants related to time should be given in seconds Internally the AD module is using g for mass and g m for concentration Units for Constants must be Base Units For data that can be read as either a constant or from a dfs file the unit for constant values depends on the Base Unit for the data type For the dfs2 dfsO files you can select the most suitable unit The Base Unit can be found by looking at the available units for a data type The first allowed unit for the data type is the Base Unit 13 2 Executing MIKE SHE AD The fully integrated 2005 version of MIKE SHE AD is executed from a DOS prompt Open a DOS window and navigate to the directory where the transport set up file is located The simulation is s
141. as occurred you should review your tab delimited file to make sure there are no errors in the input file The most common error is use of a space delimited file that contains branch names with spaces in the names BRS_ID The first column is the MIKE 11 branch name The branch name must be spelled correctly and include all spaces con tained in the name if any The branch name should not be enclosed in quotes An error condition will occur if the specified branch is not present in the MIKE 11 network BRS_START and BRS_END The second and third column is the starting and ending chainage of the specified branch column one which drainage and or paved area discharge is routed to The inter val does not have to correspond exactly to specific MIKE 11 H points because the MIKE SHE pre processor finds the closest H points to the specified interval However BRS_START must be greater than or equal to BRS_END If BRS_START and BRS_END are the same the all drainage and or paved area discharge is routed to the closest H point 150 MIKE SHE SZ Drainage to Specified MIKE 11 H points LEA Drain_code The fourth column specifies the drain code for the area that drainage and or paved area discharge is routed to the spec ified MIKE 11 branch and chainage The drain code must be greater than or equal to zero Drain code values equal to zero 0 are not included in the reference drainage system Furthermore an error condition will occur if t
142. ast data element s Lower layer input should be equal to or larger than the lowest layer number The layer inter vals in the data elements may also not overlap Bulk Density EUM Data type Density Base Unit kg m Soil Temperature EUM Data type Temperature Base Unit Celcius UZ INPUT PART depth Bulk density sity dfs2 1 Depth Init soil temp No of data elements Initial No of data elements Bulk density 1 999 MAPS bulkden soil temperature 1 999 0 MAPS inTemp dfs2 1 FAR ERER EERE ERP RE REL REIL Rp RE Rp Kf The next lines specify the bulk density and initial soil temperature for the unsaturated zone UZ These parame ters are specified using a number of data elements where each of these consists of a lower depth and a bulk den sity temperature either given as a uniform value or as a distributed value in a dfs2 file The value specified in a data element applies from the soil surface in case it s the first input or the lower depth of the previous data element to the lower depth for the data element Bulk Density EUM Data type Density Base Unit kg m Soil Temperature EUM Data type Temperature Base Unit Celcius The depths are specified in meters below ground m Working with Water Quality 215 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 12 MIKE SHE AD xtsf file format and description FR INPUT PART
143. ate that lists all the river links where the bank elevation is different than the topography of the adjacent cell The critical river links with bank elevations above the topography are highlighted with the gt symbol This list can be surprisingly long because the river link bank elevations are interpolated from the neighbour ing cross sections Whereas the topography is already defined So fre quently the interpolated bank elevations do not line up precisely with the topography If overland flow on the flood plain is essentially absent for example due to infiltration or evapotranspiration then these differences are not relevant and there is no need to modify the topography However if the overland to river exchange is important then you may have to carefully modify your topography file or your bank elevations so that they are consistent Hint In many cases your topography is from a DEM that is different from your model grid either because it is a shp or xyz file or if it is a different Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 165 Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE resolution than your model grid In this case it may be easier to save the pre processed topography to a dfs2 file right click on the topography map in the pre processed tab Then modify and use the new dfs2 file as the topography in your model setup The disadvantage of this is that if you change your model domain or grid then you will have to redo your topog
144. ax infiltration amount per time step If the total amount of infiltration due to ponded water mm in the current time step exceeds this amount the time step will be reduced by the increment rate Then the infiltration will be recalculated If the infiltration criteria is still not met the infiltration will be recalculated with progressively smaller time steps until the infiltration criteria is satisfied Input precipitation rate requiring its own time step If the amount of precipitation mm divided by the time step length hr in the current time step exceeds this amount the time step will be reduced by the increment rate until this criteria is met That is the precipitation time series will be resampled with progressively smaller time steps until the precipitation rate criteria is satisfied Multiple sampling is important in the case where the precipitation time series is more detailed than the time step length However the criteria can lead to very short time steps MIKE SHE Getting Started 71 Running Your MIKE SHE Model during short term high intensity events For example if your model is running with maximum time steps of say 6 hours but your precipita tion time series is one hour a high intensity one hour event could lead to time steps of a few minutes during that one hour event If your model does not include the unsaturated zone or if you are using the 2 Layer water balance method then you can set these conditions up
145. balance types to suit your needs The water balance calculations use a water balance Con fig uration file to define Water balance types using the available water balance items and a macro language to control program execution To modify existing or custom Water balance types you must understand the available items and what data they contain Note The water balance utility and MIKE SHE uses a positive upward coordinate system In other words water flowing upward is a positive flow in the water balance The following tables outline the various water balance items 130 MIKE SHE Available Water Balance Items Se e Table 8 1 SM Precipitation and snowmelt items p 131 e Table 8 2 CI Canopy interception items p 131 e Table 8 3 OL Overland flow items p 132 e Table 8 4 UZ Unsaturated Zone items p 133 e Table 8 5 SZ Saturated Zone items p 134 Table 8 1 SM Precipitation and snowmelt items Item Description Sign sm gp Precipitation Positive upwards precipi tation is negative and dew is negative sm gpad Precipitation minus snow and Positive upwards always evaporation negative sm dsnowsto Change in snow storage Positive when snow stor age increases sm qesnow Evaporation from snow Positive out always nega tive sm qirrsprinkler Sprinkler Irrigation Positive out always nega tive sm smwblerr SM Water balance error Positive i
146. be preserved exactly Create the batch file To create a batch file you must create a text file with the extension BAT Then add the DOS commands in the order that you would like them exe cuted But before you can run the MIKE SHE executables you must add the MIKE SHE installation directory to your PATH variable The default installation directory is 68 MIKE SHE Running your Model LEA C Program Files DHI MIKEZero bin The DOS command to add the default path to the PATH variable is Set PATH PATH C Program Files DHI MIKEZero bin To run MIKE SHE from the batch file you must add the following two DOS command lines after the PATH statement above MSHE_PreProcessor MyModel she MSHE_watermovement MyModel she The above two lines will run both the preprocessor and the water move ment engine separately If you want to run them together then you can replace the two lines with MSHE_Simulation MyModel she The examples above will run silently That is no progress information will be displayed If you want to display progress information then you should use the MzLaunch utility Using MzLaunch exe MyModel she e MSHE_Simulation will leave the MzLaunch utility open when the simulation finishes whereas MzLaunch exe MyModel she e MSHE_Simulation exit will close the MzLaunch utility when the simulation finishes Analyse the Results The MSHE_watermovement exe program aut
147. be specified on the Scenario Runs page Figure 27 6 Scenario type Single run using initial parameter values Parameters bit x xi unne Kauna Oraintevet Orainconst LeakCoet JAipna soi Rs soin Aipna soi 0 0001 1e 005 1 18 007 18 007 0 01 0 0001 0 05 2 oo005 18 005 1 18 007 18 008 0 05 18 005 0 05 a fie 005 se 005 1 08 18 008 18 006 0 01 18 006 01 a joom 5e 005 08 18 008 18 007 0 05 18 005 01 5 te 005 1e 006 13 1e 006 1e 008 04 1e 006 0 01 Figure 27 6 Scenario Runs page 27 5 1 Scenario type AUTOCAL includes two different options for performing scenario analy SiS e Single run using initial parameter values In this case a single model run is performed using the initial parameter values given in the table on the Model Parameters page When the model parameters and the objective functions have been specified it is recommended to carry out a single run in order to check the setup e Multiple runs In this case multiple model runs are performed using the parameter values given in the Parameters table 27 5 2 Parameters In the Parameters table the set of variable parameters to be used in the scenario runs are specified 376 AutoCal Sensitivity Analysis oa 27 6 Sensitivity Analysis If the sensitivity analysis option has been chosen the properties must be specified on the Sensitivity Analysis page Figure 27 7 Sensitivity analysis is ofte
148. bg file C Program Files Common Files DHI MIKEZero MIKEZero ubg which is read every time you open a model Note If you have already added data to your model changing the Unit Base Group will not convert any of your data This process simply changes the displayed units in the user interface and the conversion factors used to make the input files internally consistent In some cases the relevant data item name is not clear as there may be several data items with similar names This is more likely to occur if sev eral modules are selected at the same time To find out which data item is correct close the dialogue and re open your model Then either move the mouse to the relevant textbox where a fly over text box should appear telling you what is the relevant data type for this field Alternatively for gridded data you can use the Create button to create a data file and then notice the data type that is displayed in the dialogue Finally occasionally you may find that the data unit that you are looking for is not available In this case contact your local Technical Support Cen 350 MIKE SHE Changing from SI to Imperial American data units LEA Unit base group editing MIKE 11 Hydrology MIKE 11 Hydraulics Close MIKE 11 Water Quality MIKE 11 Sediment Ta MIKE SHE MODFLOW Hydrology Load unit file MIKE 21 MIKE 3 Hydrodynamics MIKE 21 MIKE 3 Waves _ MIKE 21 MIKE 3 Water Qu
149. by a factor of 10 or more However if you are using the Richards equation method then you may have to reduce these factors to achieve a stable solution Actual time step for the different components As outlined above the overland time step is always less than or equal to the UZ time step and the UZ time step is always less than or equal to the SZ time step However the exchanges are only made at a common time step boundary This means that if one of the time steps is changed then all of the time steps must change accordingly To ensure that the time steps always meet the initial ratios in the maximum time steps specified in this dialogue are maintained After a reduction in time step the subsequent time step will be increased by timestep timestep x 1 IncrementRate 4 1 until the maximum allowed time step is reached Relationship to Storing Time Steps The Storing Time Step specified in the Detailed time series output V 2 p 138 dialogue must also match up with maximum time steps Thus The OL storing time step must be an integer multiple of the Max UZ time step The UZ storing time step must be an integer multiple of the Max UZ time step The SZ storing time step must be an integer multiple of the Max SZ time step The SZ Flow storing time step must be an integer multiple of the Max SZ time step and 72 MIKE SHE Running your Model Se 4 2 3 The Hot start storing time step
150. cation dialogue which is used to set up the entire data tree Thus for example if you unselect Evapotranspiration in the Simulation Specifi cation dialogue the entire Evapotranspiration branch will disappear 36 MIKE SHE Adding Background Maps on 3 BUILDING A MIKE SHE MODEL The MIKE SHE user interface is organized around the workflow that you must go through to build a model This chapter is essentially organized around these three main tasks with detail added for the individual tasks 1 Set up the model 2 Run the model and 3 Assess the results 3 1 Adding Background Maps Arguably the first step in building your model is to define where you are going to place your model This generally involves defining a basic back ground map for your model area The Display item is located at the top of the data tree to make it easy to add and edit your background maps In the Display item you can add any number of images to your model setup in a variety of formats The images are carried over to the various editors so you can keep a consistent display between the set up editor and for example the Grid Editor and the Results Viewer There are a few exceptions to the above functionality e The Mike 11 network is not carried over in the Results Viewer and e The view settings for the overlays are not carried over into the Results Viewer This means that all of your overlays including turned off over lays are visible in
151. ceed the WM timestep Max See OVL 199000000000000 aD storing time step the AD time step may not go past Max SimTimeStep Riv 100000000000000 00 an AD storing time step time Max Advec Cour SZ 0 800000 sace an source sink input the AD time step may not exceed the een time for which source data needs to be read Max Advec Cour Ovl 0 800000 Max Advec Cour Riv 0 800000 Max SimTimeStep the maximum AD time step ax Disp Cour SZ 0 600000 Max Advec Disp Cour the AD time step must be such ax Disp Cour UZ 0 600000 that the advective and dispersive courant criteria are not ax Disp Cour Ovl 0 600000 exceeded ax Disp Cour Riv 0 600000 Max Transport the AD time step must be such that the ax Transport SZ 0 900000 mass transport between cells does not exceed this speci ax Transport UZ 0 900000 fied fraction Max Transport Overl 0 900000 In practice the max time step is often set to a very high Max Transport River 0 900000 value to ensure that the time step is controlled by the other criteria 13 3 1 Species INDEPENDENT Data Compared to earlier versions the input is now given as dfs2 and dsf0 files which replace the old T2 and TO file formats In the input the user now has to specify BOTH a file name and an item number As a dfs file can pos sibly contain multiple items the program needs the item number to iden tify which dfs item it needs to read from the file The dfsO and df2 files can be prepared with the tools in
152. cel or other post processing tool If you are creating a map then the output will be to a dfs2 file with the same grid dimensions and spacing as the model grid If you are creating a chart then the output will be written to an ASCII file with a special format for creating the graphic Run the Post Processing To run the post processing you have two choices You can click on the Run Selected Post Processing icon amp amp which runs only the current post processing item Or you can click on the Run All Post Processing icon 8 which runs all of the post processing items in the list These two options are also available in the Run top menu 128 MIKE SHE Calculating Water Balances in Batch Mode LEA 8 1 4 Calculate and View the Water Balance The data tree for the results tab lists all of the calculated water balances The dialogue for each item includes the file name and an Open button that will open an editor for the file For ASCII output this will be your default ASCII editor usually Notepad For dfsO and dfs2 files the DHI Time Series Editor or Grid Editor will be opened For the chart output the graphic will be displayed by the program WblChart 8 2 Calculating Water Balances in Batch Mode Like most DHI software the water balance utility can be run in batch mode Some possible ways to run the water balance utility in batch mode are e Running the water balance utility immediately after completion of a
153. cell height above the cell bottom This applies for all layers REGZONEF ILE none This line is left over from previous releases and allows the user to define registration cells via a text file with co ordinates of the cells Other more relevant options to define registration cells are given below Specify none or a file name DFS2 INPUT F This line determines if one or more dfs2 files specifies the registration cells Specify F or T for this parameter 230 MIKE SHE User s Guide Requirements in MIKE SHE WM Se Line item Comment WELLREGISTRATION T If this parameter is set to T the registration cells are determined as those cells where ground water abstraction takes place This is a very use ful option to use for calculation of capture zones However the user has to name the well fields in the MIKE SHE well editor to distinguish capture zones from different well fields see PT Output Retrieval Utility VJ p 234 LPTBIN oe This line determines if the locations of all par ticles are stored for each calculation time step Be careful very large data files may be generated if this parameter is set to T SPECIFY MINIMUM PTBIN OUTPUT TIME STEP T This option is used to reduce the size of the PTBIN file if the line above is True MINIMUM PTBIN OUTPUT TIME STEP HRS 87600 Output frequency to the ptb
154. cells Input of particles during the calculation can occur from sources in the precipitation or SZ or from boundary or internal constant concentration cells Particles leave SZ when they arrive at a boundary or an internal constant concentration cell or when they go to a sink Possible sinks in the Particle Tracking are wells rivers drains and exchange with the unsaturated zone UZ All particles are assigned a mass which means that a number of particles within a specific volume correspond to a solute concentration The Parti cle Tracking module can therefore be used for solute transport simulations and is in some cases superior to the conventional numerical solution of the advection dispersion equation since numerical dispersion is negligible However it is expected that the module will be used mostly for delinea tion of abstraction well capture zones and upstream zones and for determi nation of groundwater age and solute transport times The PT module uses the concept of registration cells This is intended for recording particle data when particles enter certain model compartments Registration cells can be used to delineate capture zones or to observe par ticles passing through some region of interest 14 1 Requirements in MIKE SHE WM Prior to running a PT simulation the MIKE SHE WM Water Movement simulation must be run This chapter describes what needs to be specified in the WM simulation to run the PT simulation afterwards
155. cells shown in the current view All Use this tool to select all cells in the active dataset 332 MIKE Zero Selection _ I Values Use this tool to select the cells which do not have delete values Highlighted in tabular view This select the cells highlighted in the tabular view 24 4 2 Select a Sub Set of Data Many of the tools in the Grid Editor operate on a sub set of selected data from the dataset The active data are defined in the Sub Set property page To 6h SetValue Sub Set Navigation rm Selected Sub Area Items C Selected grid points Entire set of grid points P Flux m 3 s m Q Flux m 3 s m m Time Steps From 0 to fo Select All 017017199C 01 01 199C 12 00 00 12 00 00 Select Current Layers From jo To oO Select All Select Current Cancel Apply Help The active data should be defined in terms of e Sub area choose either the points which have been selected using the Selection option in the graphical view or all grid points in the plane e Items Choose one or more of the items e Time steps choose a range of one or more time steps e Layers Choose a range of one or more layers To change the position of the editor while the Subset page is invoked press the Navigation button to get access to the Navigation dialog Grid Editor 333 Im Tools 24 5 Interpolation This tool can be used to interpolate in the data a
156. ch model layer in the MODFLOW 58 MIKE SHE Setting up your results Ss model The appropriate item is selected in the file browse dialogue Once the file has been assigned MIKE SHE will automatically interpolate the data to the model grid Internal inactive zones Currently it is not possible to extract the inactive zones from the MOD FLOW model and convert these to inactive cells in MIKE SHE MOD FLOW and MIKE SHE treat internal inactive zones quite differently In MIKE SHE the internal inactive zones are simply treated as cells with a very low hydraulic conductivity whereas MODFLOW ignores them in the solution Furthermore the extraction program only writes points to the shp file for the active nodes Thus when it comes to the interpolation in MIKE SHE the interpolation does not know about the inactive zone and interpolates through the inactive zone there are simply no data points in the inactive zones 3 11 Setting up your results 3 11 1 Importing Name gt data typeCode an ASCII file for Detailed Time Series Output Importing data Detailed MIKE SHE Time Series data can be imported directly into the Detailed MIKE SHE Time Series dialogue using the Import button The data file must be a tab delimited ASCII file without a header line The file must contain the following fields and be in the format specified below gt NewPlot gt X gt Y gt Depth gt UseObsdata gt dfs0Filename gt dfs0ItemNumber where the
157. checks to see if a Bathymetry file has been specified see Figure 10 1 If a Bathymetry file is available the topography values of the cells with flood codes are re interpolated based on the bathymetry data The bathymetry option is useful when a more detailed DEM exists for the flood plain area compared to the regional terrain model e Use Cross section If the Cross section option is specified the topogra phy values of the cells with flood codes are re interpolated based on the cross section data When the cross section option is selected the pre processor maps out a flood plain polygon for the coupling reach based on the left and right bank locations of all the cross sections along the coupling reach Inter polated cross sections are created between the available actual cross sections if the cross section spacing is greater than 1 2 Ax grid size All the cross sections real and interpolated are sampled to obtain a set of point values for elevation in the flood plain The topography values of all cells with the current flood code that are within the flood plain polygon are re interpolated using the bilinear interpolation method to obtain a new topography value In principle the Cross section option ensures a good consistency between MIKE SHE grid elevations and MIKE 11 cross sections There will however often be interpolation problems related to river meandering tributary connections etc where wide cross sections of Su
158. codes In grid points where auto matic classification should be used the grid code 1 must be given In grid points where computation should be performed for all cells the grid code 2 must be given 3 9 2 Coupling Between Unsaturated and Saturated Zone The following procedure should be used to ensure that the unsaturated zone does not drop below the bottom of the first calculation layer of the saturated zone e After a simulation create a map of grid statistics of the potential head in the first calculation layer of the saturated zone 46 MIKE SHE Adding Groundwater Ss e Subtract the map of the minimum potential head from the map of the bottom level of the first calculation layer of the saturated zone e View the difference map If the difference is very small in some areas of the map e g lt 0 5 m it is strongly advised to move the bottom level of the first calculation layer of the saturated zone downwards e Repeat this procedure until there are no small differences The water balance program can be used to get an overview of errors due to a bad setup of the unsaturated zone The follow procedure can be used to make a map of UZ errors Create a sub catchment map by retrieving UZ classification codes from the input file Replace negative values of the classification code map by positive val ues in the 2D graphical editor Use the sub catchment map in the water balance setup file to make a UZ map of the water
159. cted by holding down the Ctrl key while left click ing A single extraction or the last multiple extraction is selected using a double left click See Displaying a time series at a point V 1 p 108 Profile extrac Tool to extract vertical profiles cross sec tor tions from 3D result files Vertices of a pro file line are specified with a single left click and the profile line is closed with a double left click See Saturated Zone Cross sec tion Plots V 1 p 111 Cross sec Tool to extract cross sections of MIKE 11 RE tion extractor results at H points Additional information is given below UZ Plot Tool to extract a UZ plot of the water con bal extractor tent in the unsaturated zone This tool gen erates a plot of water content versus depth with time This tool can only be used on one cell at a time A cell is selected by double left click Additional information is given below 94 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot Table 7 1 Description of Result Viewer tools Button Name Description UZ Scatter plot Limits displays of results to unsaturated zone calculation cells This button is only activated if unsaturated zone data is dis played in the result viewer Additional infor mation is given below UZ Filled Plot Displays interpolated unsaturated zone results in non calculation cells and unsatu rated zone results in calculation cells This button is only activated if un
160. ctname PTGross shp An optional point theme shape file con taining the path line information of every particle at every saved time step As part of the shape file a shx and a dbf file are also created The dbf file can be opened in Excel if it is less than 65536 lines oe projectname_AD_3DSZ dfs3 Temporal and spatially varying SZ con centrations in the mobile phase not relevant for PT simulations oe projectname_PT_3DSZ dfs3 Temporal and spatially varying PT results including Number of particles 232 MIKE SHE User s Guide PTBin Output Retrieval Utility Number of registered particles Most recent registration zone code Average age Average transport time to nearest registration cell Accumulated particle count Besides these result files the program also writes output to two log files The error log list errors encountered during execution and the print log file contains execution step information statistics on the run and a mass bal ance if requested 14 4 PTBin Output Retrieval Utility The PTBin output retrieval program is run from a command line and requires a PFS input file To execute the program open a command line and navigate down to the location of the working directory that contains the AD input file tsf The program is then executed by typing PtBinRetrieval apv projectname pfs The pfs file required for the PTBinRetrieval utility has the following for
161. cur during execution of the program these are written to this log file 14 5 1 Limitations with the PT Output Retrieval When using registration zones to identify particles that move through cer tain parts of the model it should be noted that particles can appear more than once in the output As they move from one zone to the next they are repeatedly registered and are finally also registered when they are removed from the model by a sink An example would be a particle mov ing into a registration zone with code 1 The particle is then registered as being in an active cell and the registration zone code and travel time to this zone is memorised If the particle is at a later time removed by a well it will again be registered but now it will be registered as being removed by the Well sink If there are multiple wells within one cell and output for wells is requested then the output can contain the same particle more than once As the model does not know which of the wells the particle should be assigned to the program looks at the total well sink for the cell and cannot distinguish individual wells the particle will be repeated for each of the wells within the cell 14 5 2 Structure of the PT_OR File The PT_OR file is a PFS type file which can be edited with a text editor An example of aPT_OR file can be found in the section Example PT Out put Retrieval File PT_OR V 1 p 236 The PT_OR file refers to codes names found for
162. d setupname setupname_OL2MouseManholes dfs0 the MIKE SHE Overland flow coupling to manholes is included 186 MIKE SHE Running the Coupled Models SX Table 11 2 File names and conditions for output for the MIKE SHE MOUSE coupling setupname refers to the name of the model setup file file name The file is created when setupname setupname_SZDrain2MouseManholes dfs0 the MIKE SHE SZ drain cou pling to manholes is included setupname setupname_PavedDrain2MouseManholes dfs0 the MIKE SHE SZ paved areas to manholes is included 11 2 Running the Coupled Models The execution is controlled by MIKE SHE The MShe_PreProcessor and MShe_WaterMovement call functions in the MOUSE_HD dll The present version requires that the mouse_hd dll and other mouse files are located together with the MIKE SHE exe files in the MIKEZero bin directory Thus before running the coupling for the first time you should run the following small bat file that copies all of these files from the MOUSE install directory to the MIKE SHE install directory MZero bin copyMOUSEFilesToMZ bat Before running this file you should open the bat file and check that your install directories are not different than those listed in the bat file 11 2 1 Warning messages Exchange inflows reduced Warning Exchange inflows from Overland to MOUSE reduced by Overland house keeping in order to avoid instabilit
163. d The values are accumulated over the time interval as in the Step Accumu lated but the value is divided by the length of the accumulation period Thus based on the previous example the time series consists of the rate of Working with Time Series 245 a Time Series Data rainfall accumulated in each time period say in mm of rainfall per hour mm hr Mean Step Accumulated Data m lt o Mean Step Accumulated Item Value Type 06 4 0 4 Delete Values 02 00 7 f T T T 7 T Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov 2000 2000 2000 2000 200 2000 2000 200 2000 2000 2000 Reverse Mean Step Accumulated In this case the values are the same as the Mean Step Accumulated but the values represent the time interval from now to the start of the next time interval The Reverse Mean Step Accumulated time series are primarily used for forecasting purposes Reverse Mean Step Accumulated Data m 0 0 Reverse Mean Step Accumulated Item Value Type VP PIPE I rO VER AR PEP SONE EO ES PO gt Delete Values Le atn a i ia E V a E a a a 0 08 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 246 MIKE Zero TIME SERIES EDITOR 247 248 MIKE Zero Se 16 INTRODUCTION The appearance of the Time Series Editor differs if you create a new blank time series compared to opening an existing data dfs0 file
164. d sm and carn aba pa Mirun ad nun ire o rn ann ven Verdes Pacem shiny rom Sereteds ont Fenty eaten Faden tem Une drad beatin Ceca gre 5 Crm Can may Dawe as at Dawn ai was Coplay ch tre tw omis pahed um e Dot pe FERN ee Vetch wife mami Tan m ana Exis moea oe ee mas wed Farts Conoco Tabdie ier et aoan Exsis Ce voma imo ee ee aer 21 1981 Giaphical Items 30 head elevation in satuiated zone Layer M11 iteme Mitt cosas section 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 Figure 7 25 Modified profile plot displaying calculation layers as grids instead of lines An example of changing the display of the topography and bottom of the calculation layers from lines to grids is shown in Figure 7 25 As with the other tools available in the result viewer users should experiment with the available options to learn how to fully use the result viewer profile extrac tor 114 MIKE SHE Displaying a MIKE 11 cross section I 7 4 1 Changing to a different SZ layer 7 5 Displaying a MIKE 11 cross section MIKE 11 results can also be added to the result viewer and simulated canal water levels can be displayed using the cross section extractor The cross section extractor shows simulated stages and the geometry of the cross section being viewed The process of adding MIKE 11 results to the result viewer are given in the section Adding additi
165. d Area Flood Code Be i famericanc 0 7900 Aquifer Bed 1E 006 No flooding Use 2 _ Jarroyocre lO 4019 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 3 BaleSlough 0 6039 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use l4 BearCreek 0 6041 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 5 __ BellaOaks 0 3164 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 0 7090 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use BellCreekL 0 3196 River bed only 1E 006 No Flooding Use la BellCreek t lo 2035 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 9s BellResery 0 935 River bed only 1E 006 Manual 3 Use 10 Bennettcr l0 2618 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use ii BiterCreek 0 2803 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 12 Blossomcr 0 4217 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 113 Brownsvall 0 6171 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use 14 Buhmancr lO 8209 River bed only 1E 006 No flooding Use gt gt Figure 10 2 MIKE SHE River Links dialogue in the tabular view of the MIKE 11 Network Editor Include all branches button Location If the Include all branches button is pressed all the branches in the MIKE 11 setup will be copied to the MIKE SHE Links table Branches that should not be in the coupling can subsequently be deleted manually and the specifications for the remaining branches completed Thus you may have a large and complex hydraulic model but only couple certain reaches to MIKE SHE All branches will still be in the hydraulic MIKE 11 model but MIKE SHE will only exchang
166. d DataViews 44 63 4 2 Running yourModel 0 020 002 ee eee 68 4 2 1 Running MIKE SHE froma Batch File 68 4 2 2 Controllingthe Time Steps 70 428 i a8 VRRESELE S hn Speeding up your simulation 73 Working with your Results 00 75 5 IHERESULTS TAB 2 ina ccd aa Cen ed ee oe ee 77 5 1 Linking 2005 Results in a 2007 she Set Up File 77 5 2 Detailed Time Series Results naonana aaa a 78 5 3 Gridded Results naa aaa ar anne ee WE 79 5 3 1 The Result Viewer setup file already exists warning 80 5 4 MIKE 11 Detailed Time Series 2 20 81 55 Ru Statistics ince nee he ne del dee e ee RR Aw a Sas 82 5 5 1 Shape file output for run statistics 83 OUTPUT ITEMS o 4a 0 naci a eucala ew a ade wa ey a ee ee 85 THE RESULTS VIEWER zz wet ee aan a ee ae ee ae a a ee 93 PA TOOlb rs are au aa Rey an Ee Oe ERS ewe ee ee 93 7 2 Modifying the plot e s sea seed mensa e ore he eee ee ee ae he 95 7 2 1 Adding additional result files and overlays 95 7 2 2 Adding or modifying vectors a aoaaa 98 7 2 3 Changing the shading or contour settings 100 7 2 4 Changing the legend and colour scale 105 7 3 Displaying a time series atapoint 108 7 4 Saturated Zone Cross section Plots o oo 111 7 4 1 Changing toadifferentS
167. d data is by default dis played hiding the original grid data in your results view To turn off this grid date find the grid item for the data file that you just added and click off the Draw Grid checkbox 4 Then you need to find the Vector item for the flow file that you just added and check on the Draw Vectors checkbox 5 From the comboboxes for X and Y Items select the flow data for the x and y directions 6 Finally select a Vector Scale A suitable scale can only be found by trial and error Normally a large number is good to start with For example 10000 If the vectors are too large then reduce the scale If they are too small then increase the scale Note Their is no vector data for the initial time step in the MIKE SHE results files 7 If your cell size is small or your flows are high you can plot a reduced number of vectors by modifying the Draw every __ vector option 99 I The Results viewer 7 2 3 Changing the shading or contour settings The interpolation method can be modified to change the appearance of the Results Viewer display Available interpolation methods include e Box contours without dividers e Box contours with dividers e Box contours with transparency e Shaded contours with copied colours copy colours with transparency and blended colours e No contour The interpolation method used can be modified by right clicking in the graphical view and selecting Properties Figure 7 2 from the p
168. d date but the WM results will start at the Cycle Cycle restart month 1 restart date and be used until the Cycle end date is Cycle restart day 1 reached at which point the WM results will start to Cycle restart hour 0 repeat Cycle restart min 0 3 constant flow field The AD will be run from the start Cycle end year 1997 date to the end date using a stationary WM saved time Cycle end month 12 step defined by the Stat date Cycle end day 31 Cycle end hour 0 In the example to the left the AD simulation will run Cycle end minute 0 from 2 Jan 1994 00 00 until 31 Dec 2001 00 00 The WM Stat Flow year results will be used starting at 1 Jan 1994 00 00 until Stat Flow month 31 Dec 1997 00 00 at which time the WM results will be Stat Flow day repeated starting at 1 Jan 1994 00 00 Stat Flow hour Note that since the the stationary flow field option not Stat Flow minute used a Stat Flow date is not required Execution Logicals In the present version of MIKE SHE AD Execute SZ T E 3 F the groundwater transport SZ can run by itself Execute All T F T the groundwater transport can run in combination with Execute OC T E the overland OC transport or transport can be calculate for all the hydrologic com ponents overland unsaturated and saturated flow Thus single combinations with unsaturated flow are not possible Note that you cannot calculate transport unless the WM simulation has included this component Extens
169. d in Precipitation Rate V 2 p 58 and Ref erence Evapotranspiration V2 p 79 items in the Setup Tab The station names are not displayed so you will have to refer back to the Setup Tab for the station names However the fif file does not include any time information All time series information is interpolated dynamically during the run This is nec essary because the time steps in MIKE SHE can dynamically change dur ing the simulation in response to stresses on the system River Links The coupling between MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE is made via river links which are located on the edges that separate adjacent grid cells The river link network is created by the pre processor based on the MIKE 11 cou pling reaches The entire river system is always included in the hydraulic model but MIKE SHE will only exchange water with the coupling reaches The location of each of MIKE SHE river link is determined from the co ordinates of the MIKE 11 river points where the river points include both digitised points and H points on the specified coupling reaches Since the MIKE SHE river links are located on the edges between grid cells the details of the MIKE 11 river geometry can be only partly included in MIKE SHE depending on the MIKE SHE grid size The more refined the MIKE SHE grid the more accurately the river network can be reproduced This also leads to the restriction that each MIKE SHE grid cell can only 64 MIKE SHE Preprocessing
170. d the most RAM possible If you don t have enough RAM then MIKE SHE will swap to the hard disk which can slow down your simulation by a factor of 10 or more However unlike the newer 64 bit Windows operating system the 32 bit Windows operating system is restricted to 2GB of RAM Thus if you have a 64 bit system and even if you have more than 2GB of RAM MIKE SHE will only use a maximum of 2GB The 2GB limit is for each applica tion so if you are running multiple applications then extra RAM can be useful CPU Speed Since you cannot get any speed advantage from a dual processor or a 64 bit processor then the only way to speed up your simulation is to get the fastest with respect to clock speed processor possible This is typically not the newest processors since the newer processors are being designed for 64 bits and dual configurations In principle you can overclock your processor but this has some heat implications So you should talk to your computer vendor about your options Keep it simple In most cases the best way to speed up your model is to make it simpler You should look very carefully at your model and ask yourself the follow ing questions for example e Do you really need a fine discretisation during calibration A coarser grid may allow you to do many more calibration runs Then when the model is calibrated you can refine the grid for the final simu lations but remember to check you calibration firs
171. de in the column y axis for the entire simulation X axis Figure 7 33 Example UZ plot of unsaturated zone water content Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right clicking in the graphical view Modification of the UZ Plot properties is one functionality available using the right click Figure 7 34 Modifications that can be made include changing the interpolation methods adding the mesh add ing isolines changing the colour schemes etc Figure 7 35 118 MIKE SHE UZ Specific Plots mr Fab Mar Ag May Jun Ju Aug Sop Od Nor Dot Jan ef er et er ay et Bf Bt ef ef e ez Bz ez PCT EEEE Figure 7 35 Available UZ plot properties that can be modified An example of a modified UZ plot with the mesh displayed and only showing the upper five meters of the soil column is shown in Figure 7 35 Additional information on modifying the interpolation and colour scheme are given in the sections Changing the shading or contour settings and Changing the legend and colour scale UZ Piot t call 03 22 ETETE Masszusachas Figure 7 36 Figure 25Close up of upper 5 meters of soil column with the calcula tion grid displayed 119 The Results viewer 120 MIKE SHE Creating a water balance Se 8 USING THE WATER BALANCE TOOL The water balance utility is a flexible post processing tool for generating water balance data for MIKE SHE simulations Water balance output can incl
172. depth interval In both cases the source is given as time varying flux of mass mass time or mass area time A point or line source is introduced by specifying the upper and lower layer and the X and Y co ordinates of the horizontal location of the point grid in the model co ordinate system A spatially distributed source is intro duced by specifying the upper and lower depth and the spatial distribution as a dfs2 file with code 1 in the source area and 0 elsewhere Input that varies with depth can be given in UZ over depth intervals i e the user specifies the depths depth1 depth2 depthN as numbers and the parameter distributions in the entire model area for that depth interval as a dfs2 data file or a constant value The parameters will then be uniform in each grid from soil sur face to depth1 from depth1 to depth2 etc until the bottom of the unsaturated zone is reached This way of giving of values for the unsaturated zone transport component has the advantage that the user does not have to worry about the vertical discretisation But has the disadvantage that it does not take into account the discretisation which can vary from one UZ column to the next Depth should be given as meters below ground surface Source strengths are specified in the Species Dependent input part 204 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files Se Table 13 3 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line
173. dia will be transported by dif fusion in and out of the soil matrix of the media causing very fast breakthroughs and long tailings This process can be included in MIKE SHE AD by activating the dual porosity transport component in which case you should specify the matrix porosity and mass transfer coefficient of the medium Matrix porosity is given as a value between 0 and 1 and as for effective porosity you can either specify a uniform value for the entire area or distributed values using dfs2 files Matrix porosities are generally very difficult to measure and application of this component requires often calibra tion against breakthrough curves to give realistic estimates of the parameters Furthermore input should be the effec tive matrix porosity i e the matrix porosity that is actively involved in the solute diffusion This can be sig nificantly lower than the matrix porosity measured by core analysis For a limestone aquifer the matrix porosity has been calibrated to be as small as 4 per cent core samples indicated 20 to 35 whereas for a clay till sample it was calibrated to be 20 to 30 a little less than the total matrix porosity In our example the dual porosity option is not used and no input is required Location number Upper Layer Lower Layer Source type Area distribution X coordinate Y coordinate Location number Upper Layer Lower Layer Source type Area distribution tion DFS2 1 X coordinate
174. dialog shows the items organized in a tree struc ture Each item has branches for points lines and labels By selecting a branch it s settings can be changed in the right hand side of the dialog For points you can select the point mark the point mark color the point mark fill style and the point mark size and you can also enable disable the point marks For lines you can select the line style the line color the line fill style and the line thickness and you can also enable disable lines For labels you can select the text justification the text color the text background style and you can also enable disable labels It is also possible to control if items are displayed or not by using the right mouse button on top of the item name in the tree structure 17 6 Font Settings Dialog This dialog is used to change the settings of the font to use in the graphical view 268 MIKE Zero File Formats Im Font Font style Size Er ren CD Arial Black Italic T Arial Narrow Bold T Bookman Old Style Bold Italic O Comic Sans MS Courier O Courier New xl Effects Sample P Strikeout ee al 7 Underline 5 Color HB Black Script Westem z You can select the font font style font size font effect like strike out underline and color and the script language resource to use for special characters 17 7 File Formats The Time Series Editor supports two file formats the DFS Format and ASCII
175. e you specify the storing interval for hot start data Then in the Simulation Period V 2 p 28 dialogue you can specify the hot start file and then select from the available stored hot start times 3 4 Defining the model domain and grid Regardless of the components included in your model the first step in your model development is to define the model area On a catchment scale the model boundary is typically a topographic divide a groundwater divide or some combination of the two In general there are no constraints on the definition of the model boundaries However the model boundaries should be chosen carefully keeping in mind the boundary conditions that will be used for both the surface water and groundwater components All other spatial data defined in the data tree such as topography is inter polated during pre processing to the Model Domain and Grid MIKE SHE Getting Started 39 Building a MIKE SHE Model You can define your model domain and the grid using either a DHI grid file dfs2 format or a GIS shape file shp format Using a dfs2 file If you define your model domain using a dfs2 grid file then you must define the cell values as follows e Grid cells outside of the model domain must be assigned a delete value usually 1e 35 e Grid cells inside the model domain must be assigned a value of 1 e Grid cells on the model boundary must be assigned a value of 2 This distinction between interio
176. e This is done in the by computing 8 coefficients in the following way A X A Yo By x Xo B y 271790 19 1 C1 x3 Xo Cy y3 Yo Dy y2 Y1 Y0 Y3 Mapping the coordinates x Yc to the normalized square dx dy is done by solving equation 19 2 ax bx c 0 19 2 where the coefficients are Solving equation 19 2 gives us dx E b 4b 4ac a 19 4 294 MIKE SHE Interpolation Methods Se where 0 lt dx lt 1 is used to choose the correct root dy can now be com puted in two ways pa nel a 19 5 or 2 2 19 Choosing between 19 5 and 19 6 is done in such a way that division by zero is avoided X y has been mapped to dx dy The task was to com pute the elevation in the point x y and this is done in the following way using regular bilinear interpolation Ze 1 dx 1 dy z dx 1 dy z 1 dx dy z dxdy Zo 19 7 If less than four points are found if one or more quadrants are empty the double linear interpolation is replaced with reverse distance interpolation RDD This is done according to the following scheme 1 ws mm 19 8 Jai x t Oi ye N w gt w 19 9 i 1 1 N Ze Ww 2 19 10 The method works fairly efficiently but it has one drawback The quad rant search is heavily dependent on the orientation of the bathymetry If the bathymetry is rotated 45 degrees 4 completely different points might be used for the i
177. e rectangle is defined by the Area side length Number of points defines how many neighbouring grid points that is used in the interpolation If e g 20 is specified in Number of points the search algorithm finds the 20 closest points inside the specified rectangle and performs an inverse dis tance weighted interpolation raised to the specified power chosen in inter polation settings 334 MIKE Zero Filter Se 24 6 Filter This tool is used to perform digital filtering operations on the active data The active data are defined in the Select a Sub Set of Data page A number of pre defined filters are provided Select the filter by clicking on the stencil that you require Averaging Filter Averaging Filter HFF Averaging Filter Wan Sharpening Filter Sharpening Filter The filtering process may be repeated a number of times to enhance the effect Land values and delete values can be included in the calculations or ignored Typically delete values should not be included in the filtering process since they represent empty cells Instead these cells could be filled by Interpolation prior to the filtering When filtering near land the inclusion of land values may lead to a falsification of the data for example when an artificial constant land value has been specified in a bathymetry dataset 24 7 Set Value This tool is used for three operations on the active data e Set value set all the active data to th
178. e an option value of 4 see Option Distribution V 2 p 128 The references between the MIKE SHE drain codes and the MOUSE manholes are defined in the MsheMouse pfs file see Creating a MsheMouse pfs file V p 184 MIKE SHE Paved Areas to MOUSE Manholes If the paved area option see Land Use V 2 p 62 is used in MIKE SHE then the flow generated on the paved areas can be discharged to a MOUSE manhole MIKE SHE s paved area flow module uses the same reference system as the drain component This option is automatically activated when the MIKE SHE drains in the paved areas point to a MOUSE man hole Coupling MIKE SHE and MOUSE The MOUSE coupling in MIKE SHE has not yet been added to the MIKE SHE user interface Thus to couple the models together you must 1 tell MIKE SHE to look for a MOUSE model 2 tell MOUSE that it is coupled to a MIKE SHE model 3 create an MsheMouse pfs file to define where and how the two models are coupled 182 MIKE SHE Coupling MIKE SHE and MOUSE LAA 11 1 1 Telling MIKE SHE to couple to MOUSE To tell MIKE SHE that it needs to couple to a MOUSE model you must add the following two items in the Extra Parameters section of the MIKE SHE Setup Editor Parameter Name Type Value mouse coupling Boolean On mouse coupling file file name the file name of the MOUSE coupling pfs input file Note that the parameter names must be spelled exactly as shown For mo
179. e calculated Note If neither inundation nor overbank spilling is allowed then there is the overland flow exchange to the river is one way only The only mechanism for river water to flow back into MIKE SHE is through baseflow infiltration to the groundwater If overland flow does spill into the river there is first a check to make sure that the water level in the river is not higher than the ponded water e Manual If the Manual option is selected then you must supply a Flood code map in MIKE SHE This Flood code map is used to established the relationship between MIKE 11 h points and individual model grids in MIKE SHE MIKE SHE then calculates a simple flood mapping during the pre processing that is used during the simulation to assign river water stages to the MIKE SHE cells if the river level is above the topography e Automatic The automatic flood mapping option is useful if the river network geometry is not very complex or for setting up the initial flood mapping for later refinement The automatic method maps out a poly gon for each coupling reach based on the left and right bank locations of all the cross sections along the coupling reach All cells within this polygon are assigned an integer flood code unique to the coupling reach The automatic method works reasonably well along individual branches with cross sections that represent the flood plain At branch intersections the assigned flood code may not be correct However this i
180. e last Lower layer but a larger 200 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files I value is allowed The actual parameter input can be either a constant value or a dfs2 input file Table 13 3 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment Fluxes of water are automatically read from a flow SZ INPUT PART result file according to the storage frequency in the speci Effective porosity fied simulation period Together with these fluxes the No of data elements 2 effective porosity in the groundwater determines the Lower layer i advective velocity of the species The effective porosity is Porosity MAPS Porosty dfs2 2 always in the range between O and 1 i e for porous media Rower ages 99 usually 0 15 to 0 3 depending of the grain size distribution Porosity sOi the more uniform the higher effective porosity and for fractured media usually 0 01 to 0 05 The effective porosity can be given either as a uniform value or as a fully distributed number In the first case you should just specify the bottom layer in you set up as Lower layer and the value in the edit field Porosity In the latter case you can specify a dfs2 matrix data file with the distributed porosity for each of the layers in your set up Sera Type of dispersion description For the dispersion parameters two different options have Aniso opt 1 2 3 1 been included in MIKE SHE AD i e isotropy and ani
181. e lowest hydraulic conductivity in the geologic layers present in the model cell In this case a harmonic weighted mean is used instead For a 3 layer geologic MIKE SHE Getting Started 49 Building a MIKE SHE Model model in one model cell the vertical conductivity would be calculated by Zi lot 23 K a2 ns 3 2 where z is the thickness of the geologic layer within the numerical cell 3 10 2 Working with Lenses In building a geologic model it is typical to find discontinuous layers and lenses within the geologic units The MIKE SHE setup editor allows you to specify such units again independent of the numerical model grid Lenses are specified by defining either a dfs grid file or a polygon shp file for the extents of the lenses The shp file can contain any number of polygons but the user interface does not use the polygon names to distin guish the polygons If you need to specify several lenses you can use a single file with many polygons and specify distributed property values or you can specify multiple individual polygon files each with unique prop erty values In the case of lenses an extra step is added to the beginning of the 2 step process outlined in the previous section The location of the lenses is first interpolated to the horizontal numerical grid Then the lenses become essentially extra geologic layers in the columns that contain lenses How ever there are a number of special consid
182. e specified value e Add value add the specified value to all the active data Grid Editor 335 Im Tools e Multiply value multiply all the active data by the specified value The active data are defined in the Select a Sub Set of Data page 24 8 Calculator This tool can be used to assign values to a dataset It can be done in terms of a simple value or as an expression If an expression that includes the current value s is used no changes will be made to data points which current value equals the delete value Active Dataset The active data are defined in the Select a Sub Set of Data page Expression Then construct the expression for the calculation As you input the expres sion it will be shown in the field below There are three types that you can insert in the expression Operators the four operators add subtract multiply and divide Operands j k are the indices for the grid cell in the x y and z direc tions respectively and s is the cell value itself Function choose a mathematical function from the List of Functions below 24 8 1 List of Functions The Calculator allows you to compose your own expressions that can be used to modify values in data sets Below you will find a table with a list of the mathematical functions you can choose between which arguments they take and which result they return Table 24 1 List of functions Function Arguments Evaluation Name Evaluat
183. e water with branch reaches that are listed in the MIKE SHE links table Note The Include all branches button will erase all existing links that have been specified The branch name upstream chainage and downstream chainage define the stretch of river that can exchange water with MIKE SHE A MIKE 11 branch can be sub divided into several coupling reaches to Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 169 oa Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE allow for example different riverbed leakage coefficients for different parts of the river River Aquifer Exchange Conductance The river bed conductance can be calculated in three ways Aquifer only When the river is in full contact with the aquifer material it is assumed that there is no low permeable lining of the river bed The only head loss between the river and the grid node is that created by the flow from the grid node to the river itself This is typical of gaining streams or streams that are fast moving More detailed information on this option can be found in Aquifer Only Conductance V 2 p 234 River bed only If there is a low conductivity river bed lining then there will be a head loss across the lining In this case the conductance is a function of both the aquifer conductivity and the conductivity of the river bed However when the head loss across the river bed is much greater than the head loss in the aquifer material then the head loss in the aquifer can be ign
184. ea index UZ ET 2LUZ ET 182 crop coefficient UZ ET 2LUZ ET 15 actual evapotranspiration UZ ET 2LUZ ET 16 actual transpiration UZ ET 2LUZ ET 13 actual soil evaporation UZ ET 17 actual evaporation from interception UZ ET 2LUZ ET 18 actual evaporation from ponded water UZ ET 2LUZ ET 19 canopy interception storage UZ ET 2LUZ ET 14 evapotranspiration from SZ SZ UZ ET SZ 2LUZ ET 100 snow storage UZ ET 2LUZ ET snowmelt SM 99 sublimation from snow ET snowmelt 61 depth of overland water OL ISZ SubOL 58 overland flow in x direction OL this is the flow across the boundary from cell to cell in volume time e g m s 59 overland flow in y direction OL this is the flow across the boundary from cell to cell in volume time e g m s 62 paved area drainage to river or MOUSE OL M11 MOUSE Drainage Drainage Paved Paved 86 MIKE SHE Run Statistics Se Table 6 1 Available output items for gridded data and time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion Water Quality PT Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when this Type proc
185. ear isotherm Ka Linear sorption coefficient m3 g Freundlich isotherm Kf Freundlich sorption coefficient m g N Exponent which may vary between 0 and 1 Langmuir isotherm a Constant related to the binding energy B Maximum amount of sorbed solute 212 MIKE SHE Working with the XTSF File LEA Kinetic sorption The kinetic approach may be used together with each of the isotherms For example if the linear sorption isotherm is used half of the Kd value is assumed to in equilibrium the other half is assumed to be kinetic Kl Rate constant s If hysteresis is included two rate constant must be given Table 13 11 Input parameters for the different isotherms Xtsf file Linear Freundlich Langmuir K1 Ky Kf a EUM Data type First Order EUM Data type First Order Grazing Rate Dependence Grazing Rate Dependence Base Unit m3 g Base Unit m3 g K2 0 N EUM Data type Dimensionless exponent Base Unit K3 if kinetic Sorption rate Sorption rate Sorption rate EUM Data type EUM Data type EUM Data type 1st order rate WQ model Ist order rate WQ model Ist order rate WQ model Base Unit 1 day Base Unit 1 day Base Unit 1 day K4 Desorption rate Desorption rate Desorption rate EUM Data type EUM Data type EUM Data type Ist order rate WQ model Ist order rate WQ model 1st order rate WQ model Base Unit 1 day Base Unit 1 day Base Unit 1 day Sorption in dual porosity systems
186. ect Sub Set 4 094 64 Ge a ad re een dee 277 18 4 Statistics 08 2 2 00a kb eke ek ke une 278 Working with Spatial Data 281 19 SPATIAL DATA IN MIKE SHE 42 204 24200 cee ee ew be 283 19 1 Using MIKE SHE with ArcGIS 2 aaa 283 19 2 Integer Grid Codes 2 46 2 zu Er GaSb Sb ek eh 284 193 Gridded dfs2 Data 2 Hr HA ran ana eee oe 286 19 3 1 Stationary Real Data 287 19 3 2 Time varying RealData 288 19 3 3 Integer Grid Codes 2 2 22 on nme 290 19 4 Interpolation Methods 2 2 22 2 2 2m m nn nn 291 19 4 1 Bilinear Interpolation 2 22m onen 292 19 4 2 Triangular Interpolation 2 2 2 2 2 n nn 296 19 5 Node numbering inthe Grid Editor 297 19 6 Performing simple math on multiple grids 297 19 7 Performing complex operations on multiple grids 300 Grid Editor 2 244 8244 3 0 au Sh ek de a a aa 301 20 INTRODUCTION 2 3 ee ee bo a4 ke head ea kee Gag 303 20 1 Create a New Dataset 2 2 oo nn 303 20 2 Open an Existing Dataset 0000000 304 20 3 Editing the Dataset 2 1 ax 20568 bw en ee he re 304 204 Further help se dds bares ooo ee ware y ae 304 DI RICE ewe ete ah Se ee ce ae pe ee oe ee eee ee eS 307 21 1 File Formats 20 2 ou u 20 do aa ced nd bee reine 307 211 1 DES format ai s a to a une ae a ee ehe a 307 21 1 2 ASCII format 24 ara irre
187. ed species Sorbed species Species definitions Solute Sorbed Solute EQ EQ KIN 1 2 Lin Freu Lang 1 2 3 No Hyst Hyst 1 2 DP Frac sorp bias fac Type of sorption description Type of Equilibrium sorption Type of Kinetic sorption Fracture sorption Bias factor only for 0 EQ sorp frac 0 1 EQ sorption fraction 0 5 SZ RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS o of data elements Lower layer K1 EQ K2 EQ K3 KIN K4 KIN hyst Sorption coefficients 1 999 MAPS Kd dfs2 1 0 0 0 0 0 o of data elements Depth K1 EQ K2 EQ K3 KIN K4 KIN hyst UZ RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS Sorption coefficients 1 99 0 le 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 HARHFH FH HH EAHA AHEHE AHEHE AHE HH RR Process name Proc type 1 2 3 4 Process identification Decay 4 GENERAL PROCESS PARAMETERS Current species Species definitions degradable Temp dep decay T F Ref temp deg C Temp decay exponent Temperature dependent decay 10 0 0 079 WC dep decay T F WC decay exponent Water content dependent decay 0 7 SZ RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS No of data elements Half lif 1 tim Working with Water Quality 225 Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Lower layer 999
188. ed zone items are organized by item with separate maps per layer Layer thickness Layer thickness is a derived value calculated by subtracting the top and bottom elevations of the layer The EUM type is thickness with a MIKE Zero default unit of millime ters This is not very suitable for geologic layers that can be more than 100m thick To change the default units see EUM Data Units V p 349 find the thickness item and change the default unit to meter or feet as appropriate Transmissivity Transmissivity is also a derived value calculate by multiplying the thick ness by the horizontal hydraulic conductivity Saturated Zone Drainage The rate of saturated zone drainage is controlled by the drain elevation and the drain time constant However the destination of the drainage water is controlled by drain codes which determine if the water flows to a bound ary a local depression or a river SZ Drainage Codes The SZ Drainage Codes map is the drainage codes specified in the Drain Codes V2 p 127 set up item interpolated to the model grid After the interpolation to the model grid each active drain cell is mapped to a destination cell The destination cell is determined from the drain code values and the proximity of rivers and boundaries Then whenever drain age is generated in a cell the drain water will always be routed to the same destination cell MIKE SHE Getting Started 67 Running Your
189. ee eee 148 9 3 Precipitation Multiplier 22 2 000200 08 149 9 4 SZ Drainage to Specified MIKE 11 H points 149 9 5 Time varying drainage parameters 2000 152 9 6 Irrigation River Source Factors 2 2 nn nn 153 9 7 Distributed Snow Melt Constants 20 155 9 8 Canyon exchange option for deep narrow channels 155 9 9 Simplified Overland Flow Options 2 2 2 2 2 2 nenn 156 9 10 2 Layer UZ Options zu 2 2 au ed wee ow Br en ara gi 157 9 10 1 Threshold depth for infiltration 157 9 10 2 Increase infiltration to dry soils 158 9 11 GeoViewer Output 4 ceed eben eee ee eee ern 158 Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 161 10 COUPLING MIKE 11 AND MIKE SHE 2 65 6 6554 05 64 ss 5 822 ees 163 121 MIKE SHE pe 424 4444 6 oe le Ee le ha ae Oe oe A 163 10 2 MIKE TT zu oh eee dee datea Maes Seok Ke BK ok eR i 164 10 2 1 MIKE 11 Gross sesti ns 2 654 Hee bawed bigeeus 164 10 2 2 MIKE SHE Coupling Reaches 167 8 MIKE Zero 10 3 Converting from Flood Codes to Overbank Spilling 174 10 4 Common MIKE 11 ErrorMessages 4 175 10 4 1 Error No 25 At the h point___ the water depth greater than 4 times max depth 175 10 4 2 Warning No 47 At the h point_ the water level as fallen below the bottom of the slot x times 175 Drainage modelling with MOUSE
190. el parameters that are defined in the model parameter files are specified The parameter table is automatically created by AUTOAL based on the speci fications given in the template files on the Simulation Specifications page 1 vatue tame Parameter pe intial value Lower bound Upper bound Transformation Equation Keyword Comment j 1 01e 035 Kh_Unt2 Variable 0 0001 18 005 0 001 Logarithmic Karup_Au 2 __ 1 02e 035 Kv_Unit2 Dependent 0 0 0 Logarithmic 0 4 Kh_Unit2 Karup_Au 3 __ 1 03e 035 Kh_Unit4 Variable 1e 005 18 006 0 0001 Logarithmic Karup_Au a 1 04e 035 Kv_Unit4 Dependent 0 0 0 Logarithmic 0 1 Kh_Unit4 Karup_Au 5 ___ 1 05e 035 DrainLevel Variable 1 13 0 8 Real Karup_Au is 1 06e 035 DrainConst Variable 1e 007 18 008 1e 006 Logarithmic Karup_Au z 1 07e 035 LeakCoet Variable 1e 007 1e 008 18 006 Logarithmic karup_Aut 1 09e 035 Alpha_Solit Variable 0 05 0 01 0 1 Logarithmic UzSoilPro fa __ 1 08e 035 Ks_Soit Variable 1e 005 18 006 0 0001 Logarithmic UzSoilPro 10 _ 111e 035 Alpha_Soil2 Variable 0 05 0 01 0 1 Logarithmic UzSoilPro 1 1 1e 035 Ks_Soil2 Constant 1e 005 0 0 Logarithmic UzSoilPro Figure 27 4 Model Parameters page The following properties are specified in the table AUTOCAL 367 Auto Calibration Tool ID value The ID value is the identification tag value given for the
191. el grid are all interpolated to the grid defined in the Model Domain and Grid The Bilinear Interpolation V p 292 method is useful for interpolating previously gridded DEM data Whereas the Triangular Interpolation V 1 p 296 method is useful for contour data digitized from a DEM 3 6 Adding Precipitation The precipitation rate is the measured rainfall If Snowmelt V2 p 57 is included and the Air Temperature V 2 p 60 is below the Threshold melt ing temperature V 2 p 62 then the precipitation will accumulate as snow You can specify the precipitation as a rate for example in mm hr or as an amount for example in mm If you use the amount method MIKE SHE will automatically convert this to a rate during the simulation If you use a rate then the EUM Data Units V p 349 must be Precipitation and the time series must be Mean Step Accumulated VJ p 245 If you use an amount then the EUM Data Units must be Rainfall and the time series must be Step Accumulated VI p 245 The Precipitation Rate item comprises both a distribution and a value The distribution can be either uniform station based or fully distributed If the data is station based then for each station a sub item will appear where you can enter the time series of values for the station MIKE SHE Getting Started 43 LEA Building a MIKE SHE Model 3 7 Adding Surface Water The Rivers and Lakes dialogue allows you to specify the MIKE 11
192. elected the covariance matrix of the parameters evalu ated around the initial parameter set is calculated This matrix is derived based on the sensitivities of the simulated values corresponding to each of the measurements with respect to each of the parameters The matrix can only be calculated in the case a weighted least squares aggregated objec tive function is specified i e each Output measure on the Objective Func tions page is defined as a RMSE statistic each Objective function is defined as a Weighted sum of squares and the Aggregation of objective functions is set to No transformation 27 7 Parameter Optimisation If the parameter optimisation option has been chosen the properties must be specified on the Parameter Optimisation page Figure 27 8 AUTOCAL 379 Im Auto Calibration Tool Optimisation method Shuffled Complex Evolution z r Algorithmic parameters No of complexes 5 Population size faa Apply default parameters I No of nts in simplex fs No of points in complex fr Reflection step probability fo 8 No of points in sub complex fg Contraction step probability fo 15 No of evaluation steps by each complex fir Random seed fi 969 Initial sample generation Monte Carlo sampling x Filename ER r Stopping criteria Maximum No of model evaluations 1000 No of loops of convergence 3 Minimum relative change in objective function value 0 01 Figure 27 8 Parameter Optimisation page with Shuffled Co
193. elete value values in the source file will be copied into the target file only if both the source value and the target values are not delete values Copy if source AND target differs from delete value values in the source file will be copied into the target file only if the source value is not a delete value the source values will be added to the target values the source values will be subtracted from the target values the source values will be multiplied by the target values Working with Spatial Data 299 Se Spatial Data in MIKE SHE the source values will be divided by the target values 19 7 Performing complex operations on multiple grids In the MIKE SHE Toolbox V 2 p 203 under Util there is a Grid calcula tor V 2 p 205 tool which allows you to perform complex operations on dfs2 grid files However the grid files must have the same grid dimen sions and they may not included multiple time steps or multiple items Thus this tool is much more restrictive than the grid operations available in the Grid Editor However you can make complex chains of operations and save the setup which can save you a lot of time if you are doing the same operation many times or after each simulation The Grid Calculator works like a wizard with Next and Back buttons to move between dialogues 300 MIKE SHE GRID EDITOR 301 MIKE Zero Create a New Dataset Im 20 INTRO
194. em properties Delete Delete the selected item You cannot delete an Item if it is the last one in the list but trying to delete it causes that all properties in the Item will be cleared 17 3 Tabular View This view shows the data in a tabular form You can select entire rows or columns by clicking on one of the grey cells Data can be cut and pasted freely The time column is greyed out for equidistant axis as editing the time has no meaning in that case The time is shown in the default windows format selected on your compu ter You can change this by editing the regional settings in the windows control panel You can move around in the table by using the arrow buttons or the TAB or ENTER keys If the TAB and ENTER key is pressed at the right most column the active cell is moved to the first column in the next line This can be used to quickly enter data in a typewriter fashion SHIFT TAB or SHIFT ENTER works the other way If you are at the bottom right cell of the table and press TAB or ENTER a new row is added The time is extrapolated from the previous values and the item values are empty The currently selected cell can also be seen in the Graphical View as a square around the value that corresponds to it 17 4 Graphical View This view presents the data graphically 260 MIKE Zero Graphical View Se 17 4 1 Zoom By pressing the right mouse button a pop up menu is displayed This menu can be used to
195. ents and if clusters of measurement points exist these points should be given a lower weight than single point measurements in other parts of the modelling domain in order not to put undue emphasis on model per formance in certain areas Function name The function name of the objective function in which the output measure should be included In the drop down menu the function names from the Objective functions table are given 27 4 2 Objective functions Name Name of the objective function Function type AUTOCAL uses three different functions for aggregation of the defined output measures Weighted sum Foli gt wF 27 7 jel Weighted sum of absolute values n ne gt w F 27 8 j l Weighted sum of squares Font D w Fy 27 9 j l AUTOCAL 373 Auto Calibration Tool where F is the output measure Wj j 1 2 n are the weights given to each measure and n is the number of measures that are pooled Typically output measures within a certain area that measure the same sta tistic for the same physical variable are pooled to evaluate the average model performance for that variable in the specified area with respect to bias Avg Error dynamical behaviour St Dev or an overall goodness of fit RMSE The event based statistics are typically pooled into an aggregate error of maximum and minimum values respectively Weight The weight assigned to the objective function in the ag
196. ep in coupling MIKE 11 to MIKE SHE is to create a normal MIKE 11 HD model without coupling it with MIKE SHE In this regard a few things should be emphasised e Inanormal MIKE 11 river model only the river chainage dx is important for the results Geographic positioning of river branches and cross sections are only important for the graphical presentation When interfacing MIKE 11 to MIKE SHE geographic positioning is critical as MIKE SHE needs information on the river location e A reasonably high number of river cross sections should be included to ensure that the river elevations are reasonably consistent with the sur face topographic features 10 2 1 MIKE 11 Cross sections Whenever there is a significant change in the bed slope there should in principle be a cross section defined in MIKE 11 If only a few cross sec tions are available it may be sufficient to estimate the cross section shape based on neighbouring cross sections and estimate the bank bed elevation based on the surface topographic information in MIKE SHE or other topo graphic maps 164 MIKE SHE MIKE 11 Sse However every cross section in MIKE 11 is a calculation node The time step in MIKE 11 is sensitive to the Courant number which is proportional to the distance between calculation nodes So if the cross sections are close together then you may experience very short time steps in MIKE 11 Thus if you are have very short MIKE 11 time steps the
197. epend on the drain level The preprocessor checks this and gives an error if you have speci fied option 1 routing based on levels or option 3 distributed options AND any of the distributed option codes are 1 routing based on levels in these cells To activate time varying drainage parameter options you must specify the following extra parameters Parameter Name Type Value time varying drainage levels Boolean On time varying drainage constants Boolean On time varying drainage level dfs2 file name dfs2 file file name time varying drainage level item integer item number in dfs file number greater than zero 152 MIKE SHE Irrigation River Source Factors LAA Parameter Name Type Value time varying drainage time con file name dfs2 file stant dfs2 file name time varying drainage time con integer item number in dfs2 file stant item number greater than zero Optional if mean step accumulated values instead of instantaneous values mean step accumulated drainage Boolean On levels mean step accumulated drainage Boolean On time constants The dfs2 Drain Level is an elevation that can be specified using the fol lowing three EUM Data Units VJ p 349 e Elevation e Depth Below Ground i e positive values e Height Above Ground i e negative values By default the Time Series Types V p 244 is Instantaneous but
198. equals 4 then the drainage can be routed to a particular MOUSE manhole Drain flow to boundaries The fourth option simply exports drainage water out of the model Drain Codes If the drainage routing is specified by Drain Codes a grid code map is required that is used to link the drain flow producing cells to recipient grid cells The drain levels are still used to calculate the amount of drain flow produced in each node but the routing is based only on the code values in the drain code file The Drain Code can be any integer value but the different values have the following special meanings Code 0 Grid cells with an Drain Code value of zero will not produce any drain flow and will not receive any drain flow Code gt 0 Grid cells with positive Drain Code values will drain to the nearest river boundary or local depression in the drain level in that priority located next to a cell with the same Drain Code value Thus if a grid cell produces drainage 1 If there are one or more cells with the same drain code next to a river link then the drain flow will be routed to the nearest of these cells 2 If there are no cells with the same Drain Code located next to a river link then the drain flow will be routed to the nearest boundary cell with the same Drain Code value MIKE SHE Getting Started 53 Building a MIKE SHE Model 3 If there are no boundary cells with the same Drain Code value the drain flow w
199. erations when working with lenses in the geologic model e Lenses override layers That is if a lense has been specified then the lense properties take precedence over the layer properties and a new geologic layer is added in the vertical column e Vertically overlapping lenses share the overlap If the bottom of lense is below the top of the lense beneath then the lenses are assumed to meet in the middle of the overlapping area e Small lenses override larger lenses If a small lense is completely contained within a larger lense the smaller lense dominates in the loca tion where the small lense is present e Negative or zero thicknesses are ignored If the bottom of the lense intersects the top of the lense the thickness is zero or negative and the lense is assumed not to exist in this area 50 MIKE SHE Adding Groundwater 3 10 3 Numerical Layers Boundary Conditions The upper boundary of the top layer is always either the infiltration exfil tration boundary which in MIKE SHE is calculated by the unsaturated zone component or a specified fraction of the precipitation if the unsatu rated zone component is excluded from the simulation The lower boundary of the bottom layer is always considered as imperme able In MIKE SHE the rest of the boundary conditions can be divided into two types Internal and Outer If the boundary is an outer boundary then it is defined on the boundary of the model domain Internal b
200. erences between your conceptual model and nature e uncertainty in other model parameters and data source description etc In general it is impossible to specify an exact level of divergence between measured data and computed results before the model is satisfactorily cal ibrated In each application you have to consider all factors influencing your result After the calibration you should verify your model by running one or more simulations for which measurements are available without changing your model parameters If the model is able to reproduce the validation measurements you can consider your calibration to be successful This ensures that simulations can be made for any period similar to the calibra tion and the verification period with satisfactory results 194 MIKE SHE Data Units Se 13 USING THE FULLY INTEGRATED AD MODULE If you only want to calculate water quality in the saturated zone or in the overland flow zone then you do not need to use the command line and file interface described in this chapter This chapter is meant for those users who want to calculate water quality in the unsaturated zone or to calculate sorption and degradation When the fully integrated AD user interface is available this chapter will no longer be necessary Working with the advection dispersion module involves handling of a number of text files with normal text editors The input data files for a simulation with the AD module
201. eries of all the data availa ble in the current view Time series data can be selected from multiple locations in the active model area using this tool A single time series can be selected by double clicking in the desired location Time series can be extracted from multi ple locations by holding down the Ctrl key and left clicking on each desired location When selecting multiple locations the Ctrl key should be held down while double clicking on the last location 108 MIKE SHE Displaying a time series at a point LAA After selecting the locations of the time series files to extract you have the option to deselect some of the selected points and to accumulate the data over the simulation period Figure 7 18 After making the appropriate selections deselections press the OK button to generate the time series plot The entire extraction process can be stopped by pressing the Cancel button An example of a time series plot generated in the Results Viewer is shown in Figure 7 19 E MKI Fore heed ctewation in astutatod zasa HEV Modified 20008 25000 oa Ma y NE b ET Figure 7 19 Time series plot generated using the time series extraction tool 109 The Results viewer Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right clicking in the graphical view including zooming exporting images exporting time series data as dfsO file
202. erties In this case the integer value defines the zone to which the cell belongs Thus it defines which set of model properties is to be assigned to the par ticular cell For example a model may be divided into a five zones each with a differ ent soil profile for the unsaturated zone In this case the data tree will expand under the model property to include five separate sub branches where the soil profile can be defined Time Series Integer Grid Codes are used to define zones for which Real data varies in time Thus a time series for a parameter such as precipitation rate can be assigned to a model zone Similarly to the Model Properties above the model tree will expand under the parameter to include a separate sub branch for each zone where the time series file can be defined Time Varying Integers Grid Codes and Integer values do not normally vary with time If such parameters do vary in time then you must divide the simulation into time periods and run each time period as a separate simulation starting each simulation from the end of the previous simulation using the Hot Start options see Simulation Period Working with Spatial Data 285 Se Spatial Data in MIKE SHE 19 3 Gridded dfs2 Data If the parameter is defined using gridded data then the data must be in DHI s dfs2 file format The easiest way to create the dfs2 file is to use the Create button which creates a new grid with the
203. es that this option is not in use 12 3 1 Calibrating and Verifying the Model The advection dispersion of solutes depends largely on the simulated flows and fluxes calculated by the MIKE SHE flow model After your first AD simulations you will usually have to go back and improve the calibra tion of your flow model Rarely can the simulated concentrations and mass fluxes be calibrated to the measured concentrations by tuning only the solute transport model Working with Water Quality 193 Simulating Water Quality It is important to recognise that a transport model must be calibrated This is true for all applications larger than the laboratory scale since model out put cannot necessarily be compared directly to measured values Measure ments are mostly point measurements at a certain time whereas results often are mean values over larger volumes and longer times The purpose of the calibration is to tune the model so that it is able to reproduce measured conditions for a particular period in a satisfactory way This period known as the calibration period should be chosen long enough to include events of similar kind as the ones you are going to investigate A satisfactory calibration is reached when the model is able to reproduce the measured values taking the following conditions into account e uncertainty in the measurements time space equipment e representativeness of measurements point average grid values e diff
204. ess is selected Code 141 Water content in root zone 2 layer UZ 2LUZ 142 Water content below root zone 2 layer UZ 2LUZ 143 Maximum water content 2 layer UZ 2LUZ 144 Minimum water content 2 layer UZ 2LUZ 121 Jinfiltration to UZ negative UZ 2LU SZ LR Z 122 exchange from UZ to SZ negative UZ 2LUZ SZ LR 57 UZ deficit UZ 2LUZ 31 average soil moisture content in top 5 com LR UZ partments 119 rate of change in UZ storage UZ 123 epsilon calculated in UZ UZ 2LUZ 120 accumulated error in UZ UZ water balance in the UZ cells only 45 groundwater feedback to the unsaturated LR UZ LR 2LUZ zone 117 unsaturated zone flow UZ 118 water content in unsaturated zone UZ 159 pressure head in unsaturated zone UZ 129 root water uptake UZ ET 20 irrigation actual water content in root zone UZ ET Irrigation 135 irrigation soil moisture deficit in root zone UZ ET Irrigation Working with your Results 87 Se Output Items Table 6 1 Available output items for gridded data and time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion Water Quality PT Particle Tracking Data Output I
205. est that you first do a rough calibration with a model within the original limits This way you can verify that your computer is at least capable of running the current maximum size model Further the model independent structure of MIKE SHE makes it reasonable to refine your model later with a minimum of effort This is probably a good idea in any case since the full model may require significantly more resources and it will always be easier to roughly calibrate a smaller model and use the rough calibration as an initial condition for the full model MIKE SHE Getting Started 41 Se Building a MIKE SHE Model e Finally when you want to run the larger model tell us which array you need changed and by how much Also send us the number of rows and columns in your model as well as a list of the numerical engines being used We will send you a new compiled version to meet your specifica tions 3 4 2 MIKE SHE Demo model limits If no dongle is installed or if a current license file is not available then MIKE SHE will run in demo model In this case the model size limits are more restrictive If you need a full size MIKE SHE to perform your evalu ation then you are welcome to contact your local DHI office to request a 30 day evaluation licenses The current demo restrictions are as follows number of cells in x and y direction 40 number of computational cells per layer incl boundary cells 550 number of c
206. eter identification tags in the template file are substituted by the numerical values and saved in the model input file to be used when running the model It is possible to manipulate model parameters in different model input files For each model input file a corresponding template file is defined AUTOCAL allows parameters to be defined as functions of other parame ters that are manipulated in the AUTOCAL run In this case general equa tions can be specified that defines the relations between the dependent model parameter and the other parameters AUTOCAL provides the set of independent parameter values and the dependent parameters are then cal culated automatically from these values using the defined equations Both dependent and independent parameter values are then substituting their corresponding parameter identification tags in the template files Besides the standard arithmetic operators the equation tool includes a large number of mathematical functions A parameter may also be defined as a constant In this case the constant value defined in AUTOCAL is substituting the corresponding parameter identification tag in the template file This feature is especially useful when a sensitivity analysis is performed prior to the parameter optimisa AUTOCAL 359 Im Auto Calibration Tool tion In this case the sensitivity analysis typically includes a long list of parameters From the results of the sensitivity analysis the most sensi
207. eters page When the template file is created and parameter identification tags are entered a table with the model parameters is automatically created on the the Model Parameters page Afterwards when the template file is edited and identification tags are added or deleted the Model Parameters page needs to be reset To reset the Model Parameters page choose Run Reset Model Parameters Table See also Figure 27 3 below 2 MIKE Zero AutoCalTryg auc File Edit view Window Run Help Den 6 Simulation Reset Model Parameters Table Figure 27 3 Reset Model Parameters Table When running AUTOCAL a second template file is created tpl is added to the file name that is used internally by AUTOCAL It should be noted that the use of identifcation tags for parameter values in the MIKE Zero editors requires that the units of the chosen parameters are the default SI units Thus if other units have been selected these units should be changed to the default units before setting up AUTOCAL 366 AutoCal Model Parameters LAA 27 2 3 Simulation option AUTOCAL supports three different simulation options e Scenario runs e Sensitivity analysis e Parameter optimisation Depending on the choice a corresponding property page is shown in the tree view 27 2 4 Simulation title Optionally a simulation title can be specified 27 3 Model Parameters On the Model Parameters page Figure 27 4 the properties of the mod
208. ether This can lead to problems when you have a detailed drainage or river network with branches less than one half a cell width apart If you have coupling reaches that are too close together you will receive an error message If this happens you can e decide not to include one of the branches as a coupling reach it is still included in the MIKE 11 HD model or e remove some of the branches this error often occurs when you have a detailed looped drainage network or Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 167 Se Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE e refine your MIKE SHE grid until all coupling reaches are assigned to unique river links The coupling reach river link system is a conceptual representation of the river location in the model space that is grid dependent The river course will be more accurately represented in a finer model grid If you have a regional model with large cells say 1 2km wide then you cannot expect the river aquifer interaction to be accurate at the individual cell level e g all your cell properties topography conductivity Man ningsM etc are all average values over 1 4 km Rather most often you will be interested in having a correct overall water balance along the stream Typically this is achieved by calibrating a uniform average river bed leakage coefficient against a measured outflow hydrograph In such a model you may also be tolerant of groundwater residuals on the order of a
209. existing file 24 4 319 224 Spatial Axis ach aa una kann ded ds cen en eee me RS 319 22 5 Edit Custom Blocks 40 4 4 0 0 6 eee anna hand a ee ad 319 22 5 1 MIKE 21 MIKE 3 specific 2a ur sau aaa anne 320 230 NIEW 2 gss Bo dd Riek amp p eGo eee he a Gee eee Be ee Ra 321 23 1 Tabular View u Ge oe Oe ee ow oe Bee CR Ew eee 321 23 2 Graphical View an ea hk ac a le Wed ee eke 322 238 Palette cana aaa a ee ho ee De eee Be Oe a a RES ee 322 23 3 1 Palette Wizard step1of3 323 23 3 2 Palette Wizard step2o0f3 04 324 23 3 3 Palette Wizard step3o0f3 2 44 325 23 3 4 Open deut wen ken Be ate re ep ee ey a ee a 325 233 Dn SAVE 34 2 a Siw 2A Sean DE Ds Dae So ee SS 326 23 4 Overlay eB ta ne eo ee eg SM Hitec Gee eS nach 326 23 5 Grid Settings ee 22 gud Pea Ha ee Hea BERS REG See 327 29 51 Gontour TYPE rar fad ws Ae ates wre Oy eS Boe Sued 327 23 92 ISOURGS anv ua ES Aura en Kd ee he A Boe ee a 327 23 6 Axis Annotation x 2 20 44 222 26 is a OE Sa Bade vee 328 12 MIKE Zero 23 7 Mouse Pointer Coordinates 02205 4 328 23 8 Fixed aspectratio 2 000000 22 eee eee 328 23 9 Expoon Graphics deces odo 0 he aa wre Sek Ge er 328 23 10 Toolbars 2 2 2 ee 328 23 101 Grid Editor Tools 2 2 434 224 eee DELS S bod ee 329 23 10 2 Grid Editor Navigation 0 329 2041 Status Bar lt as oe ee Cae ee ke
210. f the sum of SM inflows exceeds SM out flows Table 8 2 CI Canopy interception items Item Description Sign ci qpad Precipitation reaching Canopy Positive upwards always Precipitation minus snow negative ci qpnet Canopy through fall Positive upwards always negative ci geint Evaporation from intercepted Positive out always posi water tive ci dintsto Change in interception storage Positive when storage increases ci ciwblerr CI Water balance error Positive ifthe sum of CI inflows exceeds CI out flows 131 Using the Water Balance Tool Table 8 3 OL Overland flow items Item Description Sign ol qpnet Canopy through fall Positive up always nega tive ol qh Infiltration from OL to UZ Positive to OL always negative ol qhmp Infiltration from OL to UZ Positive to OL always macropores negative ol geol Evaporation from ponded Positive out always posi water tive ol golin Inflow to Overland from Positive to boundary boundary of sub catchment always negative ol golout Outflow from Overland to Positive to boundary boundary of sub catchment always positive ol golrivpos Overland outflow to MIKE 11 river Positive to MIKE 11 always positive ol gocdr Overland flow from paved areas directly to MIKE 11 Positive to MIKE 11 always positive ol golszpos Upward flow from SZ to OL Positive to OL always positive o
211. ffice Grid facility in AUTOCAL The method evolves a population of points using the reflection and contraction operators included in the simplex method In addition a mutation component is added to minimise the risk of premature convergence The PSE algorithm can be summarised as follows 1 Initialisation An initial sample of size s of parameter sets 0 are ran domly generated from the feasible parameter space defined by the lower and upper limits of each parameter on the Model Parameters page For each parameter set the objective function value F F 0 is calculated 2 Evolution From the population s simplexes of size q are formed A tri angular probability distribution is used for assigning the probability of a point to be included in the simplex i e larger probability for points with smaller objective function value The simplex is evolved accord ing to the simplex operators and a mutation operator Thus a simplex can be evolved by reflection with probability p contraction with probability p or mutation with probability 1 p p For each simplex a random value between 0 and 1 is generated and this value then 384 AutoCal Parameter Optimisation Se determines which operator should be applied for the evolution i e reflection if lt p contraction if eis in the interval p p pe and mutation if gt pe p 3 Selection of new population The algorithm applies the principle of elitism to se
212. files is built up from the project name and prefix specified here The default value is normally fine Run the extraction To run the extraction you simply have to click on the Run Extraction icon or the Run Extraction top menu item 8 1 3 Specify your water balance After you have extracted the water balance data from the MIKE SHE results files then you can switch to the post processing tab Here you can create any number of individual water balances by simply clicking on the Add item icon and specifying the water balance parameters in the parame ter dialogue 125 Using the Water Balance Tool Altemative config file IV Use default Config file C Program Files DHI MIKEZero bin MShe_Wbl_Contig pfs BS Se Teen Total Accumulated 2 Fisher Creek Incremental A single Postprocessing item is created by default when the water balance file is created The default Postprocessing name can be change to a more appropriate name Postprocessing items that are no longer needed can be deleted using the Delete button Use default Config file Unchecking the Use default Config file checkbox allows you to specify the location of a custom water balance Config file Development of cus tom water balance configuration files is described in detail in Making Custom Water Balances V p 139 For each item in the Postprocessing list above a new item will be added to the data tree If you expand the data tree each will
213. fs2 Data Ss The parameter grid and the model grid are aligned with one another if the parameter grid or the model grid contain an even multiple of the other grid s cells For example if the parameter grid was two times finer then every model grid cell must contain exactly four parameter grid cells If the grids are aligned then the parameter grid will be averaged to the model grid during the pre processing stage However in some cases it does not make sense to average parameter values For example Van Genuchten soil parameters cannot really be averaged since they are a characteristic of the soil In such cases you should ensure that the model grid and the parameter grid file are identical 19 3 1 Stationary Real Data Spatially distributed Real parameters such as conductivity or topography can be defined in three ways namely they can be defined as a uniform global value or they may be distributed and defined using either gridded data dfs2 file GIS points and polygons ArcView shp file or irregu larly distributed point data x y value coordinate file Uniform A uniform global value means that all the grid cells in the model will have the same value GIS point and line data If the parameter is defined using an ArcView shape shp file then the point and line data will be interpolated to the model grid during the pre processing stage using the interpolation method selected The following interpolation met
214. fs2 item distributed melting Boolean On temperature melting tempera file name dfs2 file Type Temperature ture dfs2 file melting tempera integer item number in dfs2 file greater than zero ture dfs2 item The dfs2 file containing the degree day factors must have the Type Melt ing Coefficient The dfs2 file containing melting temperatures must have the Type Temperature Both the degree day factor and the melting temperature are used in the so called UZ Classification when you use multi layer UZ Gravity or Full Richards and specify Automatic or Partial Automatic classification type 9 8 Canyon exchange option for deep narrow channels In the case of a deep narrow channel crossing multiple model layers the head difference used in Equations 14 1 and 14 2 can optionally be lim ited by the bottom elevation of the layer Thus Ah h iqg maxh z 9 2 where z is the bottom of the current layer Additional Options e 155 Extra Parameters 9 9 The above formulation reduces the infiltration from upper layers by reduc ing the available gradient Without the Canyon option MIKE SHE effectively assumes that the river is hydraulically connected to the upper most model layer since MIKE SHE calculates the exchange flow with all layers that intersect the river based on the difference between the river level and the water table Currently this option is only available for s
215. g files can be found in the Examples sub directory in your installation directory Transport Setup File tsf FILETYPE DATA TYPE VE RNO 2001 1 524 SET UP DATA for Transport Simulation Working with Wate r Quality 219 Using the Fully Integrated AD Module H HIS FILE OK T F ES ESULTS OF WATERMOV EMENT CALCULATION file name Aarhus_n02_scel Aarhus_n02_scel frf SPECIES IN CALCULATIO No of species 1 SIMULATION CONTROL Simulation title Simulation descr Cycle Option 1 2 3 Start year Start month Start day Start hour Start minute Cycle restart year Cycle restart month Cycle restart day Cycle restart hour Cycle restart min Cycle end year Cycle end month Cycle end day Cycle end hour Cycle end minute Stat Flow year Stat Flow month Stat Flow day Stat Flow hour Stat Flow minute PARAMETERS Simulation Identification Aarhus Nord02 PT Aktuel Simulation period 2 1981 12 26 0 0 2997 12 31 0 0 1981 12 26 0 0 2001 12 11 0 0 Execute SZ T F Execute All T F xecution Logicals SZ Double Por SZ T F UZ T F Overland T F River T F Prec Inf T F Storing SZ T F xtensions nclusions of sources pa Sea ea ea AA Ae AH Storing of Results T 220 MIKE SHE Example
216. gic model independ ent of the numerical model The parameters for the numerical grid are interpolated from the grid independent values during the preprocessing The geologic model can include both geologic layers and geologic lenses The former cover the entire model domain and the later may exist in only parts of your model area Both geologic layers and lenses are assigned geologic parameters as either distributed values or as constant values The alternative is to define the hydrogeology based on geologic units In this case you define the distribution of the geologic units and the geologic properties are assigned to the unit Each geologic layer can be specified using a dfs2 file a shp file or a dis tribution of point values However you should be aware of the way these different types of files are interpolated to the numerical grid The simplest case is that of distributed point values In this case the point values are simply interpolated to the numerical grid cells based on the available interpolation methods In the case of shp files at present only point and line theme shp files are supported Since lines are simply a set of connected points the shp file is essentially identical to the case of distributed point values Thus it is interpolated in exactly the same manner The case of dfs2 files is in fact two separate cases If the dfs2 file is aligned with the model grid then the cell value that is assigned is calcu la
217. gle dispersivity value Each of the input elements con sists of a depth input indicating the depth in meters below ground surface to which the dispersion input is valid and the actual value to use which can be either a constant value or a dfs2 file The same comments as given for dispersion in ground water apply for solute transport in unsaturated media The few studies reported in the literature on solute transport in unsaturated porous media suggest dispersivities around 0 1 metre for travel distances less than 2 metres The longitudinal dispersivity can be distributed over depth by specifying depth intervals as described above Depth and dispersivity are specified in metres Location number Upper depth Lower depth Source type Area distribution 18600 Y coordinate Location number Upper depth Lower depth Source type Area distribution tion dfs2 1 X coordinate Y coordinate o of data elements Source locations 2 X coordinate 11700 2 O25 2 MAPS UZSourceLoca Normally solutes are introduced in the unsaturated zone by the precipitation and MIKE SHE determines the infil tration rate and thereby the mass flux in the upper node However mass of solutes can externally be introduced into the unsaturated zone transport component in two other ways namely as a point or line source over a certain depth in a specific soil column grid or as spatially distributed source in a certain
218. gregation of the dif ferent objective functions into one aggregate measure to be optimised in the calibration The assigned weights should reflect the relative priorities given to the different objectives depending on the specific model applica tion being considered For investigating the entire Pareto front between the objective functions in a multi objective calibration the aggregated measure can be adopted by performing several optimisation runs using different weights 27 4 3 Evaluation period Start date The start date of the time series for which the output measures are calcu lated It is generally recommended to set the start date after the start date of the model simulation in order to include a certain warm up period in the simulation to minimise the influence from the initial conditions in the cal culation of the output measures End date The end date of the time series for which the output measures are calcu lated This is usually set to the end date of the model simulation 27 4 4 Aggregation of objective functions The defined objective functions are aggregated into one measure M F gt Wi8 iF pool B 27 10 i l where M is the number of objective functions that are aggregated w i 1 2 M are the weights and g i 1 2 M are transformation functions assigned to each objective function 374 AutoCal Objective Functions LAA Three different transformation options are available
219. grid in space Both types of grids can have one or more time steps see step 3 21 2 2 Step 2 Specify the projection the geographical position of the origin of the dataset and the orientation Choose the projection system you will use for the grid If UTM is selected choose the zone number The UTM zone number is defined by otken 6 UTM Zone integer part of where A is the longitude There are three options for specifying the geographical position of the ori gin of the new grid e specify in latitude and longitude and input in degrees minutes and sec onds e specify in latitude and longitude and input in decimal degrees Grid Editor 309 LAA File e specify in Universal Transverse Mercator UTM coordinates by giv ing the UTM system and the Fasting and Northing of the origin in meters When you select a general UTM zone the zone number is required When using local zones as for example Hong Kong Grid HKG then the zone number is not required The geographical position of the origin of the grid is defined as the centre point in the first grid cell j k 0 0 k 0 j 0 j 1 Figure 21 2 Definition of Origo Furthermore the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified This is defined as the angle between true north and the y axis of the grid measured clockwise A mnemonic way of remembering this definition is by thinking of NYC which normally means New York City but which for our purp
220. has to have the correct eum data type The input consists of a number of data elements one for each source location The data element contains a Loca tion Number for identification purposes and then two lines with the value or time series file name and in case a time series file is used the item number Solute transport in dual porosity media e g chalk aqui fers takes place both in the fractures and in the aquifer matrix The exchange of mass between the fractures and the matrix is described by a diffusion process and the mass transfer coefficient controls rate of solute exchange between the two phases As this coefficient is increased solute diffusion takes place at a faster rate which causes lower peaks but a slower attenuation of the peak in a con centration break through curve It is an empirical constant and cannot be compared directly with the diffusion coeffi cient for the species Since the mass transfer coefficient is an empirical con stant and varies both with the characteristics of the species and of the media it is difficult to recommend its range The Eum data type for this input is set to eumIFstOrder RateWQ for which the base unit is day In applications it has been calibrated to about 1 x 10 2 sec The input is like for the initial concentrations and can be fully distrib uted The input is only needed if the double porosity option is included which is set in the general section of the input Table 13 7
221. he required data associated with your current location in the data tree The 34 MIKE SHE The MIKE SHE User Interface I dialogues vary with the type of data which can be any combination of staticand dynamic data as well as spatial and non spatial data In the case of spatial and time varying data the actual data is not input to the GUI Rather a file name must be specified and the link to the file is stored in the GUI Furthermore the distribution of the data in time and space need not correspond between the various entries For example rainfall data may be entered as hourly values and pumping rates as weekly values while the model may be run with daily timesteps The validation area at the bottom of the dialogue provides you with imme diate feedback on the validity of the data that you have input After you have set up your model you must switch to the Processed Data tab and run the pre processing engine on the model This step reconciles all of the various spatial and time series data and creates the actual data set that will be run by MIKE SHE Once the data has been pre processed the simulation can be started Using the Pre processing tab at the bottom you can load and view the pre processed data After the simulation is finished you can switch to the Results tab where you can view the detailed time series output as in a report ready HTML view Alternatively you can use the Results Viewer which is one of the generic MI
222. he correct data type 5 If you are adding shape files you must remember to specify the coordi nate axes or the file will not be displayed properly To do this you must scroll the dialogue to the right and change the units in the Units com bobox 96 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot Se 6 After adding the additional file or files you can modify the drawing order from the Overlay Manager tab Add Files to Project P i Add Files to Project Overlay Manager Overlay drawing order Cancel Apply Help The up arrow and down arrow buttons are used to move an item up or down in the drawing order The Overlay Manager uses the convention that items are drawn from the lowest to highest item number i e items on the bottom of the overlay list are drawn last and are on top of all other items The Overlay Manger can also be used to turn overlays on and off by selecting or unselecting overlay items using the check box The Overlay Manager can also be accessed from the menu bar by selecting Project Active View Setting Overlay Manager 97 I The Results viewer 7 After adding the file open the Property dialogue by right clicking in the results map and selecting Properties from the pop up menu or by using the top menu Projects Active View Settings Horizontal Result Data Properties xj E x Result Data ME nage rie ews C 45 x Shape file C 7 BD X Grid file
223. he flow results Well fields found in the flow results e Layer from which the particles originated e Release birth time e Transport time Available sink codes are 0 unknown 1 active cell 2 river sink 3 drain sink 4 well sink 5 exchange flow to UZ particle sink 6 constant concentration boundary source 7 constant concentration boundary sink 9 zero flux boundary 10 precipitation source 13 constant concentration cell internal SZ source Note To extract particle locations based on well fields requires that differ ent well fields have been defined see section Specification of Well Fields VI p 228 The results can be written to either 234 MIKE SHE User s Guide PT Output Retrieval Utility oa e asingle shape file where the point attributes allow further selection of the particles in ArcView or e separate files for each destination type and optionally for each layer e g one file for each sink type layer combination The output retrieval program is run from a command line and requires a PFS input file To execute the program open a command line and navigate down to the location of the working directory that contains the AD input file tsf The program is then executed by typing Ptoutputretrieval apv projectname pt_or For information on the format of the pt_or file see Structure of the PT_OR File V1 p 235 projectname_ptoutputretrieval err If errors oc
224. he processes simulated in MIKE SHE are used in a similar way when simulating groundwater flow with MODFLOW they are not actually simulated by MODFLOW Let s take groundwater recharge as an example MODFLOW allows you to include recharge as an upper boundary condition to the groundwater model where recharge is defined as the amount of water reaching the groundwater table after accounting for evapotranspiration surface runoff and changing storage in the unsaturated zone In MODFLOW the model ler has to account for these processes herself usually by applying a con stant rule of thumb fraction to the measured precipitation data In most cases the model results are very sensitive to this fraction and since the modeller has little data on this fraction she will assume an initial value and use this parameter as a calibration parameter Thus she will adjust the MIKE SHE Getting Started 55 Building a MIKE SHE Model amount of recharge during the calibration process until the measured groundwater levels match the calculated values However the fraction of precipitation reaching the groundwater table is constant in neither space nor time The actual amount of precipitation reaching the groundwater table depends strongly on the maximum rate of infiltration which is a characteristic of the soil and will vary spatially over the model domain Further since the maximum rate occurs when the soil is saturated different amounts of
225. he search terminates when one of these criteria is met Maximum No of model evaluations The maximum number of model evaluations allowed in the optimisation No of loops of convergence The number of iteration loops in which the objective function value of the best parameter set has not changed more than the Minimum relative change in objective function value Minimum relative change in objective function value Minimum relative change allowed in the best objective function value in the last No of loops of convergence AUTOCAL 383 Auto Calibration Tool Optimisation method Population Simplex Evolution r Algorithmic parameters Population size g 50 j No of points in simplex 9 No of points in complex fi 7 Reflection step probability 0 8 17 No of complexes ault parameters 7 Contraction step probability 0 15 No of points in sub complex No of evaluation steps by each complex Random seed fi 969 Initial sample generation Monte Carlo sampling v Filename l m Stopping criteria Maximum No of model evaluations fi 000 No of loops of convergence 3 Minimum relative change in objective function value 0 01 Figure 27 9 Parameter Optimisation page with Population Simplex Evolution option chosen 27 7 3 Population Simplex Evolution method The Population Simplex Evolution PSE method is a global optimisation algorithm that is especially suited for parallel execution using the O
226. he specified drain code does not exist in the drainage code file used in MIKE SHE 2 Navigate to the Extra Parameters entry on the menu tree and add the following items to the extra parameters list Parameter Name Type Value use specified Boolean On reaches for drain age specified reaches file name the correct file name including the path of for drainage the file created by the program MakeSM11RFDpfs exe 3 Navigate to the Drainage item under the Saturated Zone on the menu 6 tree and select distributed drainage options See Drainage V 2 p 123 Specify drain codes is the same manner as usual Remember that all drain codes in the RFD option pfs file must exist in the active domain of the model or you will get an error With the RFD option a drainage distribution must be defined If the RED is going to be used throughout the active model domain a uniform value of three can be specified for the drainage distribution If a combi nation of the original drainage method and the RFD option is going to be used a value of two and three should be used for areas using the original drainage option and the RFD option respectively Pre process and run your MIKE SHE model If the MIKE SHE setup does not successfully preprocess you should review the above steps to see if you have any error in the setup The projectname_PreProcessor_Messages log file where projectname is the name of your she file in your sim
227. hill based on adjacent drain levels Drainage routing based on grid codes Distributed drainage options Drainage routed downhill based on adjacent drain levels This option was originally the only option in MIKE SHE The reference system is created automatically using the slope of the drains calculated from the drainage levels in each cell Thus as long as a downward slope is found the drain flow will continue until crossing a river or the model boundary If local depressions in the drainage levels exist the SZ nodes in these depressions may become the recipients for a number of drain flow produc ing nodes This often results in the creation of a lake at such local depres sions This drain slope based reference system has been used in MIKE SHE for many years and works well in most situations However when MIKE SHE is applied where there is very little surface topographic relief it is often difficult to establish a suitable reference system based on the surface topography drain slopes For example often it is assumed that the drains are located 0 5 or 1 meter below the terrain In flat areas this may generate many undesired local depressions which may receive drainage water from a large area thus generating lakes in places where there should not be a lake MIKE SHE considers a grid point to be a local depression even if the drainage level in the four surrounding model grids is only 1 mm higher The only way to avoid such problems is to
228. hods are included e Bilinear Interpolation V p 292 or e Triangular Interpolation V p 296 It does not make sense to interpolate some parameters to the model grid In such cases the use of line and point data should be avoided Distributed Point data If the parameter is defined using irregularly distributed point data then the values at each point will be interpolated to the model grid during the pre processing stage using the interpolation method selected The following interpolation methods are included e Bilinear Interpolation or e Triangular Interpolation Working with Spatial Data 287 Spatial Data in MIKE SHE It does not make sense to interpolate some parameters to the model grid In such cases the use of line and point data should be avoided Elevation Data Elevation data such as Layer elevations is handled exactly the same as all other Stationary Real Parameters except that the value may be optionally specified as a depth below the ground surface rather than absolute eleva tion above the datum patial Distribution Grid file dfs2 Values relative to ground m oaa Edit Create IV Show grid data Note The value must be negative if it is below the ground level Tip The current tools do not allow you to specify a polygon shape file with real values However this would be desirable in some cases such as when implementing Mannings M values based on vegetation distributio
229. ial Data in MIKE SHE constant value over time is used This makes it easy to use detailed time series for some zones and constant values for zones where little informa tion exists The time series dialogue itself includes two graphical views The upper graphic displays the time series that is being applied and the lower graphic shows where the time series will be applied 19 3 3 Integer Grid Codes The dialogues for Integer Codes function essentially same as those for Stationary Real Data except that interpolation does not make sense for integer grid codes If Integer Grid Codes are being used to assign Model Properties such as soil profiles or time series then new sub branches will appear in the data tree corresponding to the number of unique Integer Grid Codes in the dfs2 file Uniform Value A Uniform global value means that all the grid cells in the model will have the same value Thus all cells would belong to the same zone Grid File dfs2 If the Integer Code is defined using a grid file then the Integer Code is defined on a grid This grid may be different than the numerical model grid However the grids must be subsets of one another That is the Inte ger Code grid and the model grid must be aligned with one another and the Integer Code grid or the model grid must contain an even multiple of the other grid s cells For example if the Integer Code grid was two times finer then every model grid cell must conta
230. icular view with the extension rev The name of the current setup file is displayed in the title bar of the dialogue Initially the rev file includes only the default view settings and the overlay informa tion from MIKE SHE However if you make changes to the view such as changes the way contours are displayed then when you close the view you will be asked if you want to save your changes Thus the next time you open the item in the table you will be asked if you want to overwrite the existing rev file If you click on Yes then a new rev file will be created If you click on No then your previous settings will be re loaded This is a convenient way to set up the contouring leg end etc the way you want and then re use the settings 80 MIKE SHE MIKE 11 Detailed Time Series _ 5 4 MIKE 11 Detailed Time Series Refresh Obs C 8 Training Courses 2006 Beijing Demo projects Napa Napa Valley FD Mike1 1 Time Calibration Flow Huichica dfs0 item no Huichica Creek Observed VWater level m Huichica Creek H m Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May 02 02 02 O02 O02 O2 O2 O2 O2 O2 O3 03 O03 O38 0 ME 0 0433203 MAE 0 0898819 RMSE 0 17411 STDres 0 168634 R Correlation 0 651106 R2 Nash_Sutcliffe 0 977305 Dat number 7 ha The MIKE 11 Detailed time series tab includes an HTML plot of each point selected in the Setup Editor The HTML plots are updated d
231. id Editor 317 Edit 22 3 Items 4 Specify whether the new items should be filled with blanks delete val ues or a copy of the values from the selected items they are placed before after 5 Press the Insert button Removing time steps To remove one or more time steps simply select them as described above and press the Remove button The Items dialog is used to manage the items in the file Edit Properties oe xi Items m Item Information H Water Dept Water Level meter P Flux m 3 s Flow Flux m 3 siim 3 Q Flux m 3 s Flow Flux m 3isin Insert Append Delete Item Fitering Delete value fo 001 Cancel Help The grid can contain several items Give the item s a name and select the item type from the list A unit has been defined for each item type and this unit will automatically be set when choosing the item type If you cannot find the item type that you need then use undefined Using the Insert Append and Delete options you can manage the list of items For new items all values in the grid will initially be set to the delete value specified on this page This means that values that are not somehow filled later in the editing process will have the delete value 318 MIKE Zero Spatial Axis LA 22 3 1 Editing an existing file Copy 1 Insert or append a new item 2 Select the item row to copy by clicking on the left
232. ied then the units of concentration are part of the EUM system and stored in the dfs2 file However there is a minimum concentration in MIKE SHE because the internal calculations are done in g m If the initial concentration is below this minimum then it is set to zero Particle tracking The initial concentration is also used to specify the ini tial concentration of particles for the PT module In this case the meaning of the concentration value depends on the value of INITSPEC However the initial concentration is read before INITSPEC so the initial interpretation is as an initial concentration value At run time if INITSPEC is 1 then the initial concen tration is converted to a number of particles for the PT module Thus when using INITSPEC 1 the initial con centration must be greater than the minimum or else the initial number of particles will be zero Working with Water Quality 207 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Comment In the species dependent section input is given for the strength of the SZ sources for which the location was spec ified in the species independent section The unit for the source strength depends on the source type The input can either be a constant time invariant input in which case the unit depends on the Base unit for the data type or a time series in a dfsO time series file in which case the item
233. ies No of time steps 27000 of 27000 Total a priori inflows 1332286 m3 Total reduced inflows 920643 0 m3 69 10 MIKE SHE calculates tine in out flows after an overland time step and feeds them to MOUSE for one or more MOUSE time steps The calcula tions of these flows are not included in the implicit overland flow solver Thus the Total a priori flows are the rough inflows calculated using Equation 11 1 However to prevent water balance errors MIKE SHE checks the volume of water available in the grid cell If the volume is insufficient then the inflow is reduced to the available amount The final value of inflows is the Total reduced inflows Note though that the total Drainage modelling with MOUSE 187 oa Using MIKE SHE with MOUSE NET inflow to MOUSE will be less than this value if the flow goes from MOUSE to MIKE SHE in other grid cells or other time steps Ideally the Total reduced inflow should be 100 but in practice this is rarely achieved 11 2 2 Water Balance Limitation The interaction with MIKE SHE is not included in the MOUSE Summary HTM file Thus the water added from MIKE SHE appears as an error i e 6 Continuity balance 188 MIKE SHE WORKING WITH WATER QUALITY 189 190 MIKE SHE Ss 12 SIMULATING WATER QUALITY The complete MIKE SHE advection dispersion AD module is com prised of four components each describing the trans
234. il it reaches a stream where it will join the other surface water Groundwater will also add to the base flow in the streams or the flow in the stream can infiltrate back into the groundwater The Technical Reference contains detailed information on the numerical methods that can be selected from this dialogue e Overland Flow Reference V 2 p 211 e Channel Flow Reference V 2 p 227 e Evapotranspiration Reference V 2 p 243 e Unsaturated Flow Reference V 2 p 261 e Saturated Flow Reference V 2 p 289 Setting up the Simulation parameters Once you have selected your processes then there are several simulation parameters that need to be defined Although none of these are initially very important You can come back to all of these at any time However we recommend that you do set up you simulation period when you first create your model The simulation period is used to verify all of you time series data to make sure that your time series cover your simula tion period You can still add your time series files but if your simulation period is not correct then you will get a warning message in the message field at the bottom of the page and the time series graphs will not display the proper portion of the time series In MIKE SHE all of the simulation input and output is in terms of real dates which makes it easy to coordinate the input data e g pumping rates the simulation results e g calculated heads a
235. ill be routed to the cell with the lowest drain level that has the same Drain Code value which may create a lake Code lt 0 Grid cells with negative Drain Code values will drain to either a boundary or a local depression in that order Thus if a grid cell pro duces drainage 1 If there are no cells with the same Drain Code located next to a river link then the drain flow will be routed to the nearest boundary cell with the same Drain Code value 2 If there are no boundary cells with the same Drain Code value the drain flow will be routed to the cell with the lowest drain level that has the same Drain Code value which may create a lake One method that is often used is to specify only one Drain Code for the entire model area e g Drain Code 1 Thus all grids can drain and any drain flow is routed to the nearest river link If there are no rivers the drain flow will be routed to the nearest boundary If you want to route all drain flow to the boundaries instead of the rivers a negative drain code can be specified for the entire area e g Drain Code 1 Example olo g o o j ololx 4 wlolo e The grid cells with Drain Code 3 drain to a local depression since no boundary or river link is found adjacent to a grid with the same drain code e The grid cells with Drain Code 1 or 2 drain to nearest river link located adjacent to a grid with the same drain code 54
236. imulation options In the case of Scenario runs or Sensitivity analysis all the parameter sets to be evaluated by the model are submitted to the OfficeGRID network for exe cution at the beginning of the simulations When all parameter sets are evaluated on the OfficeGRID clients the AUTOCAL simulation is fin ished In the case of Parameter optimisation only the Population Simplex Evolution algorithm can be applied for parallel execution For each itera tion step in the algorithm the population of parameter sets to be evaluated are submitted to the OfficeGRID network for execution When all the AUTOCAL Auto Calibration Tool parameter sets of the population are evaluated on the OfficeGRID clients the master processes the results and determines a new population of parameter sets to be evaluated which are then submitted to the OfficeGRID network for execution The AUTOCAL simulation is fin ished when one of the stopping criteria of the algorithm has been reached The AUTOCAL result files from the simulation are saved on the PC act ing as the AUTOCAL master However the model output files specified on the Save Output Files page that are saved from the individual model simulation runs are saved on the client PCs OfficeGrid IV Office Grid application Master C Client Maximum model simulation time 3600 Figure 27 11 Office Grid page Office Grid application If the Office Grid application option is selected
237. in exactly four Integer Codes Normally the Integer Code will be assigned to the model grid based on the most prevalent Integer Code in the cell However this can lead to prob lems when the a particular code is both infrequent and widely dispersed For example if a model area contained many small wetland areas that were much smaller than a grid cell For this reason a bookkeeping count is kept of the assignments to reduce any bias in the assignment of Integer Codes and ensure that less frequently occurring Integer Codes will be represented in the resulting model grid For example if their were two different Integer Codes A and B used in the model and A always occurred more frequently in each model cell the bookkeeping count would ensure that B would actually be assigned to some of the model cells The final frequency of occurrence of the Integer 290 MIKE SHE Interpolation Methods LA Codes in the model cells would reflect the underlying frequency of occur rence of the Integer Codes That is if A occurred twice as often as B the model grid would also contain twice as many A s as B s Thus in our widely dispersed wetland example if every model grid cell contained 9 Integer Codes for Land Use and 1 9 of the Land Use grid codes were for wetlands then every ninth Model Cell would be assigned a Land Use grid code for wetlands Polygons In the current version only some of the parameters are set up to accept shp fi
238. in file if the above option is True PT GROSS SHAPE FILE T Output option to specify the particle history file as a shp file Sas Registration codes No of data elements 2 Lower layer 33 registration zone upper dfs2 1 Lower layer 11 registration zone lower dfs2 1 If DFS2 INPUT is set to T the following lines specifies the registration cells in one or more dfs2 files The separation line is followed by the speci fication of the number of data elements and the lower layer and name of the dfs2 files and the item number REGZONELENSES T Lense based registration codes This line deter mines if the registration codes are defined as one or more lenses each described by horizontal extend and upper and lower levels Note You can specify as True either DFS2 INPUT or REGZONELENSES not both No of lenses 2 Grid Codes Lensel dfs2 1 Upper Level Lensel_up dfs2 1 Lower Level Lensel_low dfs2 1 Grid Codes Lense2 dfs2 1 Upper Level Lense2_up dfs2 1 Lower Level Lense2_low dfs2 1 If REGZONELENSES is set to True these lines define the lenses The Grid codes file defines the extent and registration code of the lense The lense is present where ever there is a positive grid code The upper and lower levels define the top and bottom of the lenses A global value can also be used Upper Lower Level EUM Data type Elevation Base Unit metres
239. in the file These two options are accessed from the File New menu where MIKE Zero File view Window Help Fle cun en gt a Project from Template Ctrl Shift N io Project From Folder Close Project Project From Setup File Save Ghrl 5 Caua All bel Chifkhi where e Project from Folder will recurs through the sub folder structure and add all of the files to the new project and e Project from Setup File will add all of the referenced files 2 4 1 Linking 2005 Results in a 2007 she Set Up File The MIKE Zero project template places all Results from your project in a common Results folder This is different from the 2005 Release where all of you MIKE SHE results were placed in a folder under your project with the same name as the project This means that when you open your 2005 project in MIKE SHE you will not be able to access your results in the Results Tab To link the Results Tab to your existing results without rerunning your model you need to uncheck the Default Output folder option in the Stor ing of results dialogue Then use the browse button to specify the directory where your results are stored as shown below I Default output folder Folder name ex Projects Odensee Odense2003 a r Movement Output I Storing of Water balance Storing of input data for WO simulation MIKE SHE Getting Started 31 Se MIKE SHE 2 5 MIKE Zero Editors The MIKE Zero interface
240. in this mask are sorted according to the distance For the quadrant Q1 the cells are sorted in the following way the grid point it self being excluded 19233141 7 8113202837 111172635 Figure 19 2 Illustration of the neighbouring grid cells being sorted Note that the grid cells with a crosshatch pattern contain raw data points When the closest raw data point in each quadrant is found we have four points that form a quadrangle This quadrangle contains the centre point where we want to calculate the z value This is illustrated on Figure 19 3 292 MIKE SHE Interpolation Methods a oa x1 y1 21 x0 yO 20 x3 y3 23 Figure 19 3 Illustration of the closest raw data points in each quadrant Note that each grid cell might contain more raw data points If this is the case the closest of these is chosen We now have an irregular quadrangle where the elevation is defined in each vertex We need to compute the ele vation in X Yc If we transform our quadrangle into a square we can perform bilinear interpolation This is illustrated on Figure 19 4 x0 yO 20 x3 y3 23 Figure 19 4 Illustration of bilinear interpolation Working with Spatial Data 293 oa Spatial Data in MIKE SHE First the interpolation requires the transformation from quadrangle to a normalized squar
241. indows toolbars associated with the Grid Edi tor Grid Editor 305 I Introduction 306 MIKE Zero File Formats 21 FILE 21 1 File Formats 21 1 1 DFS format This format is developed by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic data saved in grids Both one two and three dimensional data can be stored although only two and three dimensional data are relevant for the grid editor 21 1 2 ASCII format This is a general format which can be generated by most spread sheets or text editors The first part of an ASCII File must contains the Header Information An example of a Header Information is given below The Grid Editor supports two file formats the DFS format and ASCII Note that files can be converted from one format to the other i e saved in a different format than they opened in but with restrictions Files saved in this format must have the extension dfs2 dfs3 dt2 and dt3 Title Example of Import from ASCII File Dim 3 Geo UTM 1 20 37 32 35 40 Time EquidistantTimeAxis 2000 05 03 00 00 00 2 30 00 NoGridPoints 6 4 5 Spacing 200 00 200 00 1 NoStaticItems 1 Item Bathymetry Undefined Undefined NoDynamicltems 2 Item H m waterdepth Water level meter Item Q m 3 s m flux Flow Flux m 3 s m Delete 1E 030 lt Empty line gt The lines in the Header Information must appear in this order and fields must be separated with tabs The first item in the lines of the Header Infor mation is a string i e
242. ined Wind Speed of type Wind Velocity unit m s and no TS Type defined Wind Direction of type Wind Direction unit degree and no TS Type defined 252 MIKE Zero New File Dialog LEA Wind Friction coeff of type Wind friction factor unit and no TS Type defined The Title is Wave Climate and Start time is 01 01 2000 00 00 00 You can only edit the title the time step and the number of time steps It is always possible to customize the data set When the data set has been created you can right click in the graphical view and select Properties The File Properties Dialog is displayed and all the properties can be edited 17 1 2 LITProf template LITProf template creates a timeseries with the following pre defined properties e Equidistant Calendar Axis e 1 hour timestep e 10 Timesteps e 6 Items Time of type Undefined unit hour and no TS Type defined Wave Height of type Wave height unit meter and no TS Type defined Wave Direction of type Wave direction unit degree and no TS Type defined Wave Period of type Wave period unit second and no TS Type defined Spreading Factor of type Spreading factor unit and no TS Type defined Water Level of type Spreading factor unit and no TS Type defined The Title is LITProf and Start time is 01 01 2000 00 00 00 You can only edit the title and the number of time steps It is always possible to customize the data set When the dat
243. input files Storing UZ T F F Storing OverlandT F F Storing River T F F Storing MBL r T F F St Frq SZ 175200 000000 St Frq UZ 720 000000 St Frq Overland 240 000000 St Frq River 24 000000 St Frq MassBal 720 000000 Print frq MBL 43800 000000 Time Step Control ax SimTimeStep SZ 1000000000 000000 ax SimTimeStep UZ 1000000000 000000 ax SimTimeStep Ovl 1000000000 000000 ax SimTimeStep Riv 1000000000 000000 ax Advec Cour SZ 0 800000 Max Advec Cour UZ 0 800000 Max Advec Cour Ovl 0 800000 Max Advec Cour Riv 0 800000 Max Disp Cour SZ 0 500000 Max Disp Cour UZ 0 500000 Max Disp Cour Ovl 0 500000 ax Disp Cour Riv 0 500000 ax Transport SZ 0 950000 ax Transport UZ 0 950000 ax Transport Overl 0 950000 ax Transport River 0 950000 SZ INPUT PART Effective porosity No of data elements 1 Lower layer 99 Porosity 15 Type of dispersion description Aniso opt 1 2 3 Al Dispersivities No of data elements 1 Lower Layer 99 Disp alfa LHH 2 Disp alfa THH 2 Disp alfa TVH Disp alfa LVV Disp alfa THV Matrix porosity o of data elements 0 Source locations o of data elements 0 UZ INPUT PART o of data elements o of data elements Dispersivities 0 Source locations 0 Working with Water Quality 221 Using the Fully Integrated AD Module OVI ERLAND INPUT PART X disp coeff Y disp coeff No of da
244. ion abs x The absolute value of x 336 MIKE Zero Calculator Se Table 24 1 List of functions acos x The acos function returns the arccosine of x in the range 0 to 180 degrees If x is less than 1 or greater than 1 acos returns a delete value asin x The asin function returns the arcsine of x in the range 90 to 90 degrees If x is less than 1 or greater than 1 asin returns a delete value atan x atan returns the arctangent of x If x is 0 atan returns 0 atan returns a value in the range 90 to 90 degrees atan2 xy atan2 returns the arctangent of y x If both parameters of atan2 are 0 the function returns 0 atan2 returns a value in the range 180 to 180 degrees using the signs of both parameters to determine the quadrant of the return value atan2 is well defined for every point other than the origin even if x equals 0 and y does not equal 0 ceil x The ceil function returns a double value repre senting the smallest integer that is greater than or equal to x cos x The cos function returns the cosine of x x in degrees cosh x The cosh function returns the hyperbolic cosine of x cube x Returns the cube of x i e x3 exp x The exp function returns the exponential value of the floating point parameter x floor x The floor function returns a floating point value representi
245. ion of grid codes for the current layer Type Normally 1 because a dfs2 file is required 0 means global value FILE_NAME Name of the dfs2 file with grid codes The file name is enclosed in which tells the system that the name is relative to the location of this module input file ITEM_NUMBERS One number because ITEM_COUNT must be 1 defining the item of the dfs2 file to be used X_Leakage Type 0 Fixed Value 1 0E 7 DFS_2D_DATA_FILE FILE_NAME maps SPLeakX_1 dfs2 ITEM_COUNT 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 1 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect X_Leakage X_Leakage section Required if there are any cells with N S sheet piling affecting the flow in the x direction codes containing 100 Type Set to 0 if a global value is specified and 1 if using a dfs2 file FixedValue The global value 1 s which is read if Type 0 FILE_NAME and ITEM_NUMBERS Dfs2 file name and item number if Type 1 relative file name as explained under Grid Codes Y_Leakage Type 0 0 Fixed value 1 DFS2 file FixedValue 2 0E 7 DFS_2D_DATA_FILE FILE_NAME maps SPLeakY_1 dfs2 ITEM_COUNT 1 must be 1 ITEM_NUMBERS 1 1 EndSect DFS_2D_DATA_FILE EndSect Y_Leakage Y_Leakage section Required if there are any cells with E W sheet piling affecting the flow in the y direction codes containing 10 146 MIKE SHE Sheet Pile Module Ss Line item Comment Z_Leakage
246. ions SZ Double Por F T Diffusion processes into immobile fractures in the saturated zone will be included F These processes will not be included Inclusions of sources Here you specify which types of sources will be SZ E included UZ E In the Species Independent section you specify the Overland E location of the sources and in the Species Dependent sec River E tion you specify the source strengths Prec Inf E 198 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files I Table 13 1 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description Line item Comment Storing of Results The storing of results is defined per component not by Storing SZ JE species MBL mass balance Storing UZ F Thus all results will be stored for all species for each Storing OverlandT F component set to T rue at the specified storing fre Storing River T F F quency in hours ee a F Note The River component must be included but is no St Frq SZ 2160 000000 longer active as it is calculated by MIKE 11 St Frq UZ 2160 000000 St Frq Overland 2160 000000 St Frq River 2160 000000 St Frq MassBal 2160 000000 Print frq MBL 8640 000000 Time Step Control The time step control in AD consists of 6 elements ax SimTimeStep SZ 100000000000000 00 WM result storing time step the AD time step may not ax SimTimeStep UZ 100000000000000 00 ex
247. item Comment OVERLAND INPUT PART coeff coeff X disp Y disp Dispersion 0 0 0 0 For the 2D overland transport component two disper sion coefficients are specified Notice that the dispersion coefficient m s is specified directly and not a dispersiv ity m as was the case for the SZ and UZ Location number Source type Area distribution X coordinate Y coordinate Location number Source type Area distribution X coordinate Y coordinate No of data elements Source locations 2 1 1 19500 17500 2 2 MAPS OLSrc dfs2 1 A point source is introduced by specifying the X and Y coordinates of the location of the point grid in the model co ordinate system A spatially distributed source is introduced by specifying the spatial distribution as a dfs2 file with code 1 in the source area and 0 elsewhere Source strengths are specified in the Species Dependent input part RIVER INPUT PART River dispersion These lines are ignored Solute transport in the river is now simulated in MIKE 11 and all input data is specified disp coeff 020 in the MIKE 11 AD GUL Source locations For the River sources only type 1 is allowed which No of data elements 2 implies a mass flux with unit mass time base unit kg s river source location 1 The source location is given an identification code The river source type 1 location is the Q station number The river so
248. ized in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Description of Result Viewer tools Button Name Description Rewind Rewinds result files to first time step m Previous Step Rewinds result files to the previous time K step Video Generates an avi file from the current time i Reverse step to the first time step Play Reverse Plays result files from the current time step s to the first time step Identical to Video Reverse except an avi file is not generated Stop Anima Stops forward and reverse playing of result m tion files and creation of avi files Play Forward Plays result files from the current time step Le to the last time step Identical to Video For ward except an avi file is not generated Video For Generates an avi file from the current time BB ward step to the last time step Next Step Advances result files from the current time step to the next time step Wind Advances results files to the last time step Go to time Rewinds or advances result files to the ne step specified time step 93 Se The Results viewer Table 7 1 Description of Result Viewer tools Button Name Description Time step Change the time step used by the result t viewer The time step can be less than or greater than the result file time step Default Default extraction tool X Time Series Tool to extract time series data from result ie extractor files Multiple time series can be extra
249. l color table in the palette The panest vay to choose the color i to check the actual color in the second column and the pess the buhon and then choose ham the color dialog For a fined palette the conespanding value can be entered loo Note that the value defines the upper boundary of the herval Land Color ae 749583074051 100 16 030 Land Vake 16 030 M f 12 090 755 14 4596900939 Figure 7 14 Step 2 of 3 modification of the colours used in the colour scheme and the values colours are applied to Palette Wizard Step 3 of 3 Please Verity the Palette Cok Tatie From this page you verity that the palette conect betcee Ai apphed to the data Note thal the change of palette has no physical eltect on the data Figure 7 15 Step 3 of 3 acceptance of the colour scheme modification After Accepting the colour scheme contour interval modifications the Apply button should be pressed on the Result Data Properties window to modify the look of the Result Viewer plot Figure 7 16 The resulting modified Result Viewer plot is shown in Figure 7 17 107 The Results viewer 7 3 Figure 7 17 Result Viewer file after modification of the default colour scheme Users should experiment with the Palette Wizard to develop a better understanding of available functionality than presented in this simple dis cussion Displaying a time series at a point The Time Series tool allows you to plot a time s
250. l golszneg Downward flow from OL to SZ Positive to OL always negative ol qsztofloodpos Outflow from SZ to flooded areas Positive to OL always positive ol qsztofloodneg Inflow to SZ from flooded areas Positive to OL always negative ol qfloodtorivin Exchange from overland flooded areas to MIKE 11 inside the sub catchment Positive to MIKE 11 ol qfloodtorivex Exchange from overland flooded areas to MIKE 11 out side the sub catchment Positive to MIKE 11 132 MIKE SHE Available Water Balance Items Table 8 3 OL Overland flow items Item Description Sign ol dolsto Change in overland storage Positive when storage increases ol girrdrip Drip Irrigation Negative to OL always negative ol qolMousepos Inflow to Overland from Positive to OL always Mouse positive ol qolMouseneg Outflow from Overland to Mouse Positive to OL always positive ol olwblerr OL water balance error Positive if the sum of OL inflows exceeds OL out flows Table 8 4 UZ Unsaturated Zone items Item Description Sign uz qh Infiltration from Overland to Positive in always posi Unsaturated Zone tive uz qhmp Infiltration from Overland to Positive in always posi Unsaturated Zone Macro tive pores uz qrech Infiltration from Unsaturated Positive to UZ Zone to Saturated Zone euz qrechmp Infiltration from Unsaturated
251. l involves defining the e the geological model e the vertical numerical discretisation e the initial conditions and e the boundary conditions 56 MIKE SHE Adding Groundwater Se In the MIKE SHE GUI the geological model and the vertical discretisa tion are essentially independent while the initial conditions are defined as a property of the numerical layer Similarly subsurface boundary condi tions are defined based on the numerical layers while surface boundary conditions such as wells drains and rivers using MIKE 11 are defined independently of the subsurface numerical layers The use of grid independent geology and boundary conditions provides a great deal of flexibility in the development of the saturated zone model Thus the same geological model and many of the boundary conditions can be re used for different model discretisation and different model areas 3 10 6 Importing a MODFLOW 96 or MODFLOW 2000 Model A FORTRAN executable is automatically installed with MIKE SHE and located in the MIKE SHE bin directory The program can be used to read a MODFLOW file set and extract the stationary distributed data to a set of point theme shape files The shp files can then be used directly in MIKE SHE To extract data from a MODFLOW model open a command prompt in the directory containing the input files On the command prompt line type MShe_ModflowExtraction apv lt pfs_file_name gt where the apv tells
252. l unit checking The units written in the MODFLOW file are only for display purposes Also the units that you define in your MODFLOW user interface may not be the same as those written to the MODFLOW files So you need to be careful of units and know what units the MODFLOW files are written in The MODFLOW name file has the usual MODFLOW format However you should e Specify a new name for the LIST file in order not to overwrite the LIST file of an existing simulation and e Make copies of or rename all output files lines starting with DATA Existing result files might otherwise be overwritten during the execu tion For a MODFLOW model the extraction routine reads and outputs the fol lowing MODFLOW static parameters Top Bot Shead Tran Hy Vcont Sf1 and Sf2 Plus it outputs the Specific storage which is calculated as Sf1 divided by the layer thickness The extraction routine outputs point theme shape files one file per data type with one item for each extracted layer The shape file names reflect the MODFLOW manual naming convention Top shp Vcont shp etc The points represent the centre of each grid square The model orientation is calculated from the user specified coordinates of lower left origin and upper right corner of the model To use the MODFLOW data in MIKE SHE select the Point Line shp option for the static variable Then browse to the appropriate shp file The Shp file will contain one item for ea
253. lance MOUSE coupling terms MIKE SHE MOUSE exchange depth inte grated MOUSE coupling terms Sat urated zone layer s MIKE SHE sat zone MOUSE exchange each or specified layer Map output Total error Distributed output Total water balance error Map output Overland flow error Distributed output Overland water balance error Map output Unsat Zone error Distributed output Unsat zone water balance error Map output Sat Zone error Distributed output Saturated zone water balance error depth integrated 137 Using the Water Balance Tool Table 8 6 Water balance types available in the default configuration files Water balance type Description Map output Sat Zone error layer s Distributed output Saturated zone water balance error each or specified layer Map output Total irrigation Distributed output Total irrigation Chart output Total water bal ance Chart output General water balance of the entire model depth integrated Chart output Total each SZ layer Chart output General water balance of the entire model each SZ layer Chart output Total water bal ance TEXT IN DANISH Chart output Generel vandbalance for hele modellen dybde integreret Chart output Total each SZ layer TEXT IN DANISH Chart output Generel vandbalance for hele modellen hvert SZ lag Saturated Zone StorageSa
254. le or you may have to re run your simulation Type of Extraction You can choose to calculate the water balance on the entire model domain or in just a part of the domain By default the calculation is for the entire domain or catchment If you choose the subcatchment area type they you will be able to use a dfs2 integer grid code file to define the areas that you want individual water balances for 124 MIKE SHE Creating a water balance LAA If you use an area resolution then the water balance will be a summary water balance for either the entire catchment or the sub areas that you define If you use a single cell resolution you will be able to generate dfs2 maps of the water balance Sub catchment grid codes The subcatchment integer grid code file is only used if you have selected the sub catchment water balance type You can specify a delete value to exclude areas from the water balance The grid spacing and dimensions in this dfs2 file must match exactly the model grid You can also specify a polygon shape file to define the sub catchment areas The shape file may contain multiple polygon with the same or dif ferent codes Further the shape file length units do not have to be the same as the model length units e g feet vs meters Gross files The pre processor extracts the water balance data from the standard MIKE SHE output files and saves the data in a set of gross files The file names of the gross
255. le polygons Currently shp file polygons are only allowed in e Model Domain and Grid V2 p 52 e Precipitation Rate V 2 p 58 e Vegetation V 2 p 64 e Reference Evapotranspiration V2 p 79 e UZ Soil Profile Definitions V2 p 93 e SZ Internal boundary conditions V2 p 121 and e Horizontal Extent V 2 p 111 of SZ Lenses Note The Horizontal Extent V 2 p 111 of SZ Lenses accepts polygons but the dialogue is still set up for point line shp files and an error is given in the Data Verification window Model grid codes are assigned based in which polygon the centre of the cell is located in 19 4 Interpolation Methods The gap filling is based on the concept that we have to calculate the depth in the point x Ye We define this as the function Z f x Ye If we place our self in this point we can divide the world up into four quadrants Q1 Q4 From here it s a matter of finding some points from the raw data set relatively close to this point The search radius for all possible tech niques can be entered in grid cell distance Points outside this distance will never be taken into account Working with Spatial Data 291 Spatial Data in MIKE SHE Q2 Q Figure 19 1 Definition of quadrants 19 4 1 Bilinear Interpolation This technique finds four points from the raw data set one in each quad rant The search is done in the following way A mask of relative indices is created The cells
256. lect the new population The old population and the evolved population of points are sorted with respect to their objecvtive function value The best i e smallest objective function value s points defines the new population 4 Steps 2 3 are repeated until a stopping criterion is met Algorithmic parameters The algorithmic parameters of the PSE algorithm their feasible range and recommended values are shown in Table 27 5 Table 27 5 Algorithmic parameters for the PSE algorithm n No of calibration parameters their range and recommended values Parameter Description Range Recommended value s Population size s gt n q No of points in a simplex 2 lt q lt s n 1 P Reflection step probability 0 lt p lt 1 0 70 0 90 Pe Contraction step probability 0 lt p lt 1 0 05 0 20 Pm Mutation probability deter O lt p lt 1 0 01 0 10 mined as pm 1 p D Population size Population size s applied in the PSE algorithm This parameter is impor tant for the convergence properties of the algorithm In general the larger value of s is chosen the higher the probability of converging into the glo bal optimum but at the expense of a larger number of required model eval uations One should choose s to balance the robustness of the algorithm and the computing time The proper choice of s depends on the dimension ality of the problem No of points in simplex Number of points in a simplex A reco
257. lements 0 ARAKALAPALAARKARKE RARE RY TION INPUT PART Source strength kK HAHAHAHAHA PARTICLE RACKING ip PARTICLE MASS 100 0 INITSPEC el VERTICAL CORRECTION 1 0 CONSTANT CELL PARTICLES F ONLY SATURATED DISTRIBUTION TYPE 1 RELATIVE INITIAL LEVE 0 999 REGZONEFILE none DFS2 INPUT F WELLREGISTRATION T LPTBI a a DISABLE TIMER OUTPUT T 13 5 2 Extra transport setup file xtsf FILETYPE DATA TYPE VERNO 2002 1 600 EXTRA SETUP DATA for Transport Simulation PROCESSES IN CALCULATION o of processes 2 Di Extensions Sorption Decay T Soil temperature T Plant uptake T FR INPUT PART Air temperature Air temp grid codes 1 Air temp tim ser TIME temperature dfs0 SZ INPUT PART Bulk density No of data elements 1 Lower layer 999 Bulk density 1600 0 T No of data elements 1 nitial soil temperature Working with Water Quality 223 oa Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Lower layer 999 Init soil temp 620 UZ INPUT PART Bulk density No of data elements 1 depth 999 Bulk density MAPS bulkdensity dfs2 1 Initial soil temperature No of data elements 1 Depth 2 99930 Init soil temp MAPS initialTemp dfs2 1 LHAHFHFLHHFHHRFHRHRFH HF HF HR
258. lways posi per layer boundaries GHB cells tive 135 Using the Water Balance Tool 8 4 Table 8 5 SZ Saturated Zone items Item Description Sign sz qgihbneg Flow from internal head Positive out always nega per layer boundaries GHB cells to SZ tive sz qszMousepos SZ flow to Mouse Positive out of SZ always per layer positive sz qszMouseneg Mouse flow to SZ Positive out of SZ always per layer negative sz qirrwell Pumping from SZ for irriga Positive out of SZ always per layer tion positive sz szwblerr SZ water balance error for Positive if the sum of SZ per layer layer i inflows for layer i exceeds only available for LAYER SZ outflows for layer i DETAIL type Standard Water Balance Types The first combobox in the Post processing dialogue contains a list of all the available water balance types This list is read from the water balance configuration file MSH E_Wbl_Config pfs which is found in the MIKE SHE installation bin directory By default this directory is C Program files DHI MIKEZero bin Table 8 6 summarizes the 31 standard water balance types defined in the water balance configuration file Some of the water balances cannot be used in certain conditions and these restrictions are listed in the table Table 8 6 Water balance types available in the default configuration files Water balance type Description
259. ly one of these items can be selected After selecting your item click OK and the profile will be displayed There are two different types of profiles The first is a properties profile The profiles exactor tool can be used to extract a cross section through simulated MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 results The type of cross section cre ated is dependent on the simulated data displayed in the result viewer For example if the result viewer contains simulated 3D heads and MIKE 11 results then the cross section will have simulated water levels and simu late MIKE 11 canal stages After defining the profile the items to be displayed on the profile should be selected Figure 7 22 The resulting profile is shown in Figure 7 23 As with the other tools extracted profiles can be animated on the screen and or exported as avi and image files 112 MIKE SHE Saturated Zone Cross section Plots Im Figure 7 22 Selection of items to display in a defined profile Zi CrossSection REV 2 Modified meter 60 77 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 Figure 7 23 Resultant profile generated with the profile extractor tool Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right clicking in the graphical view e g the modification of the profile properties including changing line and marker properties adding tabular items etc The avail able property tabs are shown in Figure 7 24 113 The Results viewer Fonda wudnt agree Ta
260. m Tools Synchronize map to tab moves the Graphical View to the area displayed in the Tabular View 24 4 Selection 24 4 1 Select and deselect These menu entries under Tools are used to activate the tools for making a selection of grid cells that can then be processed in different ways You can also use the Select a Sub Set of Data property page that are included in many of the tools in the Grid Editor The Select tool is accumulative in the sense that the selections are com bined into one selection To start from scratch you should un select the cells You can also use the below tools in a deselect mode such that you subtract the cells from the selection There are a number of selection tools available Points Use this tool to point to individual cells that you want to select Click once at each cell Lines Use this tool to select the cells along a line that you define The cells near est this line will be selected The line needs not be straight but it can con sist of a number of straight segments Click at points on the line and double click on the last point Polygon Use this tool to select the cells inside a polygon Click at each corner and finish by double clicking Rectangle Use this tool to select the cells inside a rectangle Place the pointer at one corner of the rectangle and pull it towards the opposite corner When the desired rectangle is shown then click the mouse View Use this tool to select the
261. math on multiple grids I 2D to 3D Layer Mapping If you are mapping a 2D dfs2 file into a 3D dfs3 file then you can choose to map all of the layers or only a single layer Sub area position You select to map the source file onto the target file starting at a different location than the origin In this case you must specify the coordinates in the target grid where the origin of the source grid should be positioned For example if you have a 20x20 grid and we wish to copy data into the 4x4 rectangle given by the four nodes 10 14 13 14 13 17 and 10 17 then you should select a 4x4 grid file and specify j origin 10 and k origin 17 Note the Grid editor starts its nodal numbering at 0 0 Time Position The source grid and target grid do not have to have equal time steps or the same time origin In this section of the dialogue you can specify the time at which the source grid should be added to the target grid In this way you can add additional time steps to the end of a time varying dfs2 file or insert hourly information into a monthly time series for example Operation Finally you can specify how the source grid file should interact with the target file Copy all values are copied such that they replace the existing data in the data set Copy if target differs from delete value values in the source file will be copied into the target file only if the target value is a delete value Copy if source differs from d
262. matic classification The automatic classification requires a dis tribution of groundwater elevations see Groundwater Depths used for UZ Classification This can be either the initial depth to the ground water based on the initial heads or you can supply a dfs2 map of the groundwater elevations In both cases you must supply a table of inter vals upon which the classification will be based The number of com putational columns depends on how narrow the intervals are specified If for example two depths are specified say 1 m and 2 m then the classification with respect to the depth to groundwater will be based on three intervals Groundwater between 0 m and 1 m between 1 m and 2 m and deeper than 2 m One tip is to extract a map of the calculated potential head in the very upper saturated zone layer from a previous simulation The map should represent the time of the year when the largest variations of the ground water table are expected deep groundwater in the hills and shallow MIKE SHE Getting Started 45 LEA Building a MIKE SHE Model groundwater close to the rivers Repeat the procedure as calibration improves If the Linear Reservoir method is used for the groundwater then the Interflow reservoirs are also used in the classification However since feedback to the UZ only occurs in the lowest Interflow reservoir of each subcatchment the Interflow reservoirs are added to the Automatic Classification in two zones
263. me Steps Time Step Properties Axis Type Equidistant Time Axis bi Start Time for 01 1990 12 00 00 x Time Step Interval fi 800 s NewH Date andTime Old 00 01 01 1990 12 00 00 00 Select every 3 time step 0140171990 12 30 00 Seat 01 01 1990 13 00 00 see 03 01 01 1990 13 03 Invert selection 010171990 14 00 00 04 01 01 1990 14 30 00 05 21 time steps are currently seleceted 06 01 01 1990 15 00 00 06 0170171990 15 30 00 07 1 time steps after r alter 01 01 1990 16 00 00 08 eet 09 01 01 1990 16 30 00 09 each selected time step 10 01 01 1990 17 00 00 10 Insert blank copy 017011990 17 30 00 11 2 01 01 1990 18 00 00 12 Remove selected time steps Cancel Help It is possible to specify the start date and time for the file as well as the time step interval between the time steps 22 2 1 Modifying Time Steps Selecting time steps It is possible to select time steps in the dialog by simply clicking on them in the list or by using the Select and or Invert button The number of selected time steps are displayed next to the list Inserting time steps 1 Select the items in the list where the new items should be placed before after 2 Specify the number of items to insert before after the selected time steps 3 Specify whether the new items should be inserted before or after the selected items Gr
264. me automatically and should be not be included in the file name For example the following input line Time Calibration GroundwaterObs refers to the file GroundwaterObs dfs0 located in the subdirec tory Time Calibration which is found in the same directory as the she model document dfs0ItemNumber This is the Item number of the observation data in the specified DFSO file Example The following is a simple example of a tab delimited ASCII file with two MIKE SHE observation points where the file containing the observations is called obsdata dfs0 Obs_1 20 234500 456740 0 0 time obsdata 1 Obs_2 15 239700 458900 10 1 time obsdata 2 Obs_3 16 O 241500 459310 20 1 time obsdata 3 MIKE SHE Preprocessing your model LAA 4 4 1 RUNNING YOUR MIKE SHE MODEL In the top icon bar there is a three button set of icons for running your model pe um we PP The PP button starts the preprocessing You must first PreProcess your model data to create the numerical model from your grid independent data See Preprocessing your model V p 61 WM The WM button starts the Water Movement simulation You can only run your water movement simulation after you have preprocessed your data See Running your Model V p 68 WQ The WQ button starts the Water Quality simulation After you have successfully run a water movement simulation to completion you can run a water quality simulation
265. me is an instantaneous value Instantaneous Data m O o Instantaneous Item Value Type E TETELE E EPPES PEETI EEPE ETT PEER POTTE AEA S TEET Delete Values T T T T r i Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 Accumulated The values are summed over successive intervals of time and always rela tive to the same starting time For example rainfall accumulated over a year with monthly rainfall values 244 MIKE Zero Time Series Types Accumulated Data m lt o Accumulated Item Value Type 08 06 0 4 Delete Values 3 023 4 a a ze a a a na un Sn Ga ook i a i H Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 Step Accumulated The values are accumulated over a time interval relative to the beginning of the interval For example a tipping bucket rain gauge measures step accumulated rainfall In this case the rain gauge accumulates rainfall until the gauge is full then it empties and starts accumulating again Thus the time series consists of the total amount of rainfall accumulated in each time period say in mm of rainfall Step Accumulated Data m O o Step Accumulated Item Value Type 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 08 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 200 2000 2000 Mean Step Accumulate
266. me series for several polygons In Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 the Data Type Code is used only when import ing time series items into the Detailed time series output V 2 p 138 dia logue Table 6 1 Available output items for gridded data and time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion Water Quality PT Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when this Type process is selected Code 10 precipitation rate Always 128 average water content in the root zone UZ ET 2LUZ ET 11 rooting depth UZ ET 2LUZ ET Working with your Results e 85 Se Output Items Table 6 1 Available output items for gridded data and time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion Water Quality PT Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when this Type process is selected Code 12 leaf ar
267. ment positive SZ QSZZPOS Upward SZ flow from the cur Positive up per layer rent layer layer i to the layer above layer i 1 only available for LAYER DETAIL type MIKE SHE Available Water Balance Items Table 8 5 SZ Saturated Zone items Item Description Sign SZ qSzZzneg Downward SZ flow from the Positive up per layer layer above layer i 1 to the always negative current layer layer i only available for LAYER DETAIL type sz dszsto Change in SZ storage Positive when storage per layer increases sz qszabsex Groundwater SZ pumping Positive up per layer sz qszdrin SZ drainage into subcatchment Positive out of SZ always per layer negative sz qszdrout per layer SZ drainage out of subcatch ment Positive out of SZ always positive sz qszdrtorivin per layer SZ drainage flow to MIKE 11 reaches inside the subcatch ment Positive out always posi tive sz qszdrtorivex per layer SZ drainage flow to MIKE 11 reaches outside the subcatch ment Positive out always posi tive sz qszdrtoMouse per layer SZ drainage to MOUSE man holes Positive out of SZ sZ gszrivpos per layer SZ baseflow to MIKE 11 Positive out always posi tive sz gszrivneg MIKE 11 baseflow to SZ Positive out always nega tive per layer sz qgihbpos SZ flow to internal head Positive out a
268. mented yet the current scheme contour interval to default values When making a new scheme contour interval it is possible to modify the Max and or Min value s used to generate the ranges used in the contour intervals Figure 7 11 Figure 7 11 Colour modification property tab An example of making a new scheme contour interval using the maximum range is summarized in Figure 7 12 to Figure 7 15 Modification of the number of contour intervals from the default value of 16 to 6 is shown in Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 shows the available colour schemes that are available and shows use of the Seismic colour scheme The legend title Palette title and palette type Linear auto Scaled Fixed Land Water Auto Scaled Land Water Fixed and Angle Fixed Circular can also be modified on the first Palette Wizard window Figure 7 12 Press Next after making the desired changes to move to the next Palette Wizard win dow The colours used for each contour interval Colour and the ranges used for each contour interval Value can be modified on the second Palette Wizard window Figure 7 14 Press Next after making the desired changes to move to the next Palette Wizard window 105 I The Results viewer The third and final Palette Wizard window allows you to review the modi fied colour scheme and contour intervals before accepting the changes Figure 7 15 Press the Finish button if all of the modifications are accept able Otherwise
269. mmended value for this parameter isn 1 where n is the number of calibration parameters AUTOCAL 385 Auto Calibration Tool Reflection step probability The probability of perfoming a reflection step of the simplex In this case the new point is found by reflecting the worst point of the simplex in the centroid of the remaning points A recommended value for this parameter is in the range 0 70 0 90 Contraction step probability The probability of perfoming a contraction step of the simplex In this case the new point is found as the mean between the worst point of the simplex and the centroid of the remaning points A recommended value for this parameter is in the range 0 05 0 20 The sum of the reflection and contrac tion probabilities should be less than one The remaining portion 1 p p is assigned a mutation probability with a recommended value in the range 0 01 0 10 Random seed Random seed used in the optimisation Can be set to any positive integer value Different optimisation results will be obtained by using different random seeds Initial sample generation The same three options are available for generation of the initial sample as in the SCE algorithm i e Monte Carlo sampling Latin hypercube sam pling and using a user specified initial sample from a previous optimisa tion run File name File name of the file containing the optimisation results from a previous optimisation run to be used as initi
270. most grey cell and press Ctrl C 3 Select the newly created item row by clicking on the left most grey cell and press Ctrl V The properties and values of the new item will be identical to the original item Delete value It is not recommended to change the delete value in an existing file since all un specified values are set to the delete value After a change these values will be interpreted as non delete value 22 4 Spatial Axis The Spatial Axis dialog is used to manage the spatial axis of the file Spatial Axis 4 x Dimension Origin Sets Spacing 0 326 5 Fr 2 f 601 5 ne Each axis is defined by origin grid number number of grid points and grid spacing It is not possible to edit the number of grid points for an existing grid series file 22 5 Edit Custom Blocks This tool can be used to edit the custom blocks of a file Custom blocks are data in dfs files where miscellaneous information about the file is kept Grid Editor 319 Se Edit 22 5 1 MIKE 21 MIKE 3 specific Most MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 data files have a custom block called M21_misc It is a block of 7 floats Item 1 orientation at origin relative to true north Item 2 drying depth Item 3 code for identifying whether or not the data contains geograph ical information it is 900 if it contains geographical information Item 4 the zland value the value above which bathymetric data the data itself i
271. mplex Evolution option chosen 27 7 1 Optimisation method AUTOCAL includes two parameter optimisation methods e Shuffled Complex Evolution e Population Simplex Evolution 27 7 2 Shuffled Complex Evolution method The Shuffled Complex Evolution SCE method is a global optimisation algorithm that combines various search strategies including i competi tive evolution ii controlled random search iii the simplex method and iv complex shuffling The SCE algorithm includes the following steps 1 Jnitialisation An initial sample of parameter sets 0 are randomly gen erated from the feasible parameter space defined by the lower and upper limits of each parameter on the Model Parameters page For each parameter set the objective function value F F 0 is calculated The initial sample has the size s pm where p is the number of com plexes and m is the number of points in each complex 2 Partitioning into complexes The s points are ranked in order of increasing objective function value F 1 lt F 2 lt lt F s The s 380 AutoCal Parameter Optimisation Se points are partitioned into p complexes such that points corresponding to function values F 1 F p 1 F s 1 p 1 form the 1 complex points corresponding to function values F 2 F p 2 F s D p 2 form the 2nd complex etc Evolution A sub complex of size q is formed from the complex by randomly choosing q points from the p p
272. n the water movement with the MIKE 11 The input for the AD coupling consists of three lines The MIKE 11 time step has the unit seconds in the tsf file During initialisa tion MIKE SHE AD checks if the MIKE 11 result for the water movement is consistent with the MIKE SHE water movement result by checking a timestamp that is stored with water movement results This check can be switched off by setting the validation to false F The last line should always be true and the only input given should be the name of the sim11 file DISABLE TIMER OUTPUT T In the print file the MIKE SHE AD stores information on run time statistics This output can be disabled Table 13 8 Combinations of source types EUM data types and units in the groundwater transport component SZ Source EUM data type user Base unit Source description Type description 1 eum SoluteFlux Solute kg s mass flux in a specific flux grid 3 eumlIConcentration Con ug m fixed concentration in a centration specific grid 2 eumlSpecificSoluteFlux g m s time varying mass flux PerArea Specific Solute over a certain area Flux Per Area 4 eumlIConcentration Con ng m fixed concentration centration over a certain area Table 13 9 Combinations of source types EUM data types and units in the unsaturated zone transport component UZ Source Type EUM data type user Base unit Source description description
273. n Working with the TSF Files V p 196 An example of the tsf file that also includes the PT section is found in Transport Setup File tsf VJ p 219 The rest of the tsf file includes information regarding e file name of water movement calculation e Species name note that the PT engine can only handle one species e Simulation title and description e Simulation period e Components note that only SZ may be executed e Storing frequency e Time step controls e Porosity for groundwater note that the dual porosity option cannot be used in PT e Dispersion parameters for groundwater note that the PT engine assumes isotropic dispersion conditions 228 MIKE SHE User s Guide Requirements in MIKE SHE WM Se e Location of sources note that only SZ sources apply e Initial concentrations may in some cases be used to determine the ini tial number of particles see below The tsf uses the old MIKE SHE format and a new MIKEZero GUI for AD PT simulations has not yet been made so at the moment the tsf input file must be edited in a text editor Line item Comment AAA RKEAAE AERA KE KEKE KE KEKE KEK PARTICLE RACKING T The particle tracking simulation engine is acti vated at the bottom of the tsf file i e below the defined bottom line by specifying this line PARTICLE MASS 100 The particle mass is used to convert particle counts number of particles to
274. n case of bathymetry data file the prefix record containing the bathymetry in other cases is considered as land Item 5 6 are more free and may have different meaning in different sit uations 320 MIKE Zero Tabular View _ I 23 VIEW The graphical view appears to the left hand side of the Grid Editor editor On the right hand side you have the Tabular View You may adjust the relative size of the graphical view and the tabular view by adjusting the splitter bar between the views neapres dt2 H m waterdepth Time step 0 Layer 0 35000 4 3000 4 9000 5 5000 5 9000 6 6000 7 3000 2 S 8 a 5 8 amp 5 amp Pe 13 7000 13 5000 14 7000 142000 143 156000 14 9000 16 5000 15 5000 16 4000 15 5000 16 4000 15 4000 20 30 J17 16 3000 15 4000 Grid spacing 150 meter 16 2000 15 4000 Jiikprojection 23 1 Tabular View The area that is viewed in the tabular view can be indicated in the Graphi cal View by switching on the selection overlay The tabular view works like a simple spreadsheet e Click ona cell and you can enter or modify a value e Use the mouse or the arrows to highlight a block of cells The use cut ctrl X copy ctrl C and paste ctrl V as usual These actions may be reversed by using undo ctrl Z e You can move around in the table by using the arrow buttons or the TAB or ENTER keys If the TAB and ENTER ke
275. n done as a first step in a model calibration to identify the most important model parameters to be fine tuned in the suc ceeding parameter optimisation Sensitivity Analysis 0040 Sensitivity analysis method Local sensitivity analysis z Difference approximation f Forward z Perturbation option Fraction of parameter interval x Perturbation fraction 0 05 Calculate covariance matrix IV Figure 27 7 Sensitivity Analysis page 27 6 1 Sensitivity analysis method The present version of AUTOCAL includes one sensitivity analysis method e Local sensitivity analysis 27 6 2 Local sensitivity analysis Local sensitivity analysis provides the sensitivity of the model parameters around a specified parameter set and hence gives information about the importance of the parameters only at that location in parameter space If the simulation model is highly non linear in its parameter output interac tion sensitivity measures may vary considerably in the parameter space AUTOCAL 377 Auto Calibration Tool Thus parameters that are insensitive for certain parameter sets may be highly sensitive for other parameter sets and vice versa The local sensitivity measures are calculated around the initial parameter set specified on the Model Parameters page Difference approximation The sensitivity of a parameter with respect to a model response output measure is defined as amp F 6 l 5 I 27 15 Q
276. n you might want to check your river network to make sure you do not have cross sections that are too close together This frequently occurs when the cross sections have been imported If you do have cross sections that are too close together then you can easily eliminate one or more of them as long as the conveyance of the different cross sections is roughly the same In other words you can eliminate duplicate cross sections if their Q H relation ships are roughly the same even though the physical shape of the two cross sections may appear quite different This is often the case in braided stream networks where the location of the main channels may move left or right but the overall conveyance of the river bed is relatively constant Cross sections versus MIKE SHE topography In the absence of flooding ponded water discharges to the MIKE 11 river as overland flow As a general rule the topography must be higher than or equal to the bank elevation If the bank elevation is higher than the topog raphy water will not be able to flow into the river in that cell but will run laterally along the river until it reaches a place for it to flow into the river An easy trick to see where this is happening is to run a simulation with no infiltration ET or detention storage and set the initial water depth at 1m Then look at the results to find places were the water is piling up against the river links In the pre processor log file a table is cre
277. nd field observations e g measured water levels 38 MIKE SHE Defining the model domain and grid on Solver parameters The default solver parameters for each of the processes are normally rea sonable and there is usually no reason to change these unless you have a problem with convergence or if the simulation is taking too long to run For more information on the solver parameters you should see the indi vidual help sections for the different solvers e OL Computational Control Parameters V 2 p 34 e UZ Computational Control Parameters V 2 p 39 e SZ Computational Control Parameters V 2 p 40 Time step control Likewise the time step control is important but the default values are usu ally reasonable to get your model up and running Then you should go back to the Time Step Control V 2 p 30 dialogue to optimize your simu lation time stepping For more information on time step control you can go to the help section for the Time Step Control V 2 p 30 dialogue or see the Controlling the Time Steps VJ p 70 section 3 3 1 Hot Starting from a previous simulation Your MIKE SHE simulation can be started from a hot start file A hot start file is useful for simulations requiring a long warm up period or for gener ating initial conditions for scenario analysis To start a model from a previous model run you must first save the hot start data in the Storing of Results V 2 p 135 dialogue In this dialogu
278. nd fill cells with missing values 24 5 1 Active Dataset The active data are defined in the Select a Sub Set of Data page 24 5 2 Interpolation Settings This parameter will determine how the interpolation will weigh the values used in the interpolation according to the distance from the interpolation point to these points The weights can be based on the inverse of the dis tance the distance squared or the distance cubed in order to vary the rela tive weight given to the nearest points relative to points further away Land points can be ignored This is very important when using artificial values to indicate land because if such values are included in the interpo lation this may lead to falsified results 24 5 3 Search Type Linear search Depending on the type of data which are interpolated there may be an interest to restrict the search for values to base the interpolation on to either vertical or horizontal lines i e along one or the other grid axis One example hereof could be bathymetric data in the surf zone where such data could be obtained from a ship sailing along lines Here the outcome of the interpolation could vary significantly depending on the choice of search type Area integrated Area integrated type for interpolation performs a convolution when calcu lating the interpolated value The algorithm starts it s search in the current point and searched in a rectangular area around the point The size of th
279. ng multi species transport In the next lines you specify the number of sol ute species that will be used For each of these species input will be required in the species dependent input sec tion Simulation title SHE AD input file Simulation descr SIMULATION CONTROL PARAMETERS Simulation Identification example of MIKE integrated model for solute transport A title and some text describing the simulation These titles will appear in the log files that are written during the calculation Working with Water Quality 197 Ss Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 1 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description Line item Comment Simulation period The solute transport simulation period should be a part Cycle Option 1 2 3 2 of the flow simulation period However either a saved Start year 1994 WM time step or a time period from the WM simulation Start month al can be recycled over the AD simulation period Start day 2 The choice for how the WM time period relates to the Start hour 0 AD time period is defined by the Cycle Option Valid val Start minute 0 ues are 1 2 and 3 End year 2001 A 7 End month 12 1 no recycling The AD will be run from the start date to the end date which both must be in the WM simula ae pay tion period End hour 0 End minute 0 2 recycling The AD will be run from the start date to Cycle restart year 1994 the en
280. ng the largest integer that is less than or equal to x int x Returns the integer value of the argument x In x The In function returns the natural logarithm of x if successful If x is negative the function returns a delete value If x is 0 it returns a delete value Grid Editor 337 Tools Table 24 1 List of functions log10 x The log10 function returns the base 10 loga rithm of x if successful If x is negative the function returns a delete value If x is 0 it returns a delete value max xy max returns the larger of its arguments min xy min returns the smaller of its arguments mod xy mod returns the floating point remainder of x y If the value of y is 0 0 mod returns a delete value pow xy pow returns the value of xY racos x The racos function returns the arccosine of x in the range 0 to n radians If x is less than 1 or greater than 1 racos returns a delete value rasin x The rasin function returns the arcsine of x in the range r 2 to t 2 radians If x is less than 1 or greater than 1 rasin returns a delete value ratan x ratan returns the arctangent of x If x is 0 atan returns 0 atan returns a value in the range 1 2 to n 2 radians ratan2 xy ratan2 returns the arctangent of y x If both parameters of ratan2 are 0 the function returns 0 ratan2 returns a value in the range r to n radians usi
281. ng the signs of both parameters to determine the quadrant of the return value ratan2 is well defined for every point other than the origin even if x equals 0 and y does not equal 0 rcos x rcos returns the cosine of x x in radians rsin x rsin returns the sine of x x in radians rtan x rtan returns the tangent of x x in radians sin x sin returns the sine of x x in degrees sinh x sinh returns the hyperbolic sine of x sqr x Returns the square of x i e x 338 MIKE Zero Calculate Statistics Se Table 24 1 List of functions sqrt x The sqrt function returns the square root of x If x is negative sqrt returns a delete value tan x tan returns the tangent of x x in degrees tanh x tanh returns the hyperbolic tangent of x 24 9 Calculate Statistics This tool calculates the statistics of the Active Dataset and display the val ues in a window Statistics i x Statistics Sub Set r Selection Statistics Min Value 0 111243 Standard Deviation 0 009361 Max Value 0 104656 Mean Value 0 000013 r Distribution 10000 5000 Number of Points 23035 Number of Intervals 16 Cancel Help Active Dataset The active data are defined in the Select a Sub Set of Data page Statistics The calculated values includes the minimum maximum and mean value and the standard deviation Furthermore a block diag
282. nnotation on the graphical view to be The options are grid points kilometers and meters Mouse Pointer Coordinates When the mouse pointer is in the graphical view the coordinates of the point and the value at the point that you are pointing at are displayed in the Status Bar Choose here how you would like the mouse pointer coordinates to be dis played The options are x y coordinates lon lat coordinates or UTM coordinates the UTM zone is defined by the information in the dfs2 file Fixed aspect ratio This option can be switched on and off Use this option to choose between views with fixed aspect ratio or with aspect ratio adjusted to the size of the graphical view Export Graphics The entire plot area with all plot objects within can be exported to either Clipboard Metafile or Bitmap 23 10 Toolbars Two toolbars are particular to the Grid Editor e Grid Editor Tools toolbar 328 MIKE Zero Toolbars Se 23 10 1 Grid Editor Tools 23 10 2 Grid Editor Navigation e Grid Editor Navigation toolbar These toolbars provide easy and convenient access to a number of tools that are also available from the Grid Editor menu bar EBEN EF SB Ses m ys e Pointer Select Points p 332 Select Lines p 332 pull down from Select points Select Polygon p 332 pull down from Select points Select Rectangle p 332 pull down from Select points Select All p 332 Select View p 332
283. ns A trick to get around this limitation is the following 1 Temporarily assign an integer grid code to each of the polygons 2 Specify this file as an input file for one of the data items that needs integer grid codes such as drain codes 3 Right click on the map that will be displayed and save the map view to a dfs2 file 4 Open this dfs2 file in the grid editor and use the grid editor tools to replace the integer values with real values 5 In the Grid Editor change the EUM unit to the appropriate value 6 Save the file and then load it into the Data item for which you wanted it 19 3 2 Time varying Real Data If the time varying Real parameter does not vary spatially then the param eter must be defined as Global with either a Fixed or Time varying value see Uniform Constant and Uniform Time Varying Often time varying data such as precipitation rate are spatially distrib uted using measurement stations which in the model are translated into model zones using for example Thiessen polygons In this case each sta tion is associated with a dfsO time series file that contains the time series 288 MIKE SHE Gridded dfs2 Data Se of precipitation rate Station based zones are defined using Integer Grid Codes in either a dfs2 file as Grid Codes or in a Shape shp file as poly gons with an Integer Code see Station based Grid Codes or Polygons Uniform Constant Spatial Distribution Temporal
284. nterpolated between two MIKE 11 H points MIKE SHE prints the following message in the xxx_WM_Print log file when the parameters are specified Extra parameter specified river source volume factor value 1 500000 Extra parameter specified river source discharge factor value 1 000000 MIKE SHE also prints the following warnings in the xxx_WM_Init_Messages log file if one or both of the factors may result in water balance errors or numerical instabilities WARNING Specified value for river source volume factor is greater than 1 1 500000 There is a risk of water balance errors and or insta bilities in the coupling between MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 WARNING Specified value for river source discharge factor is greater than 0 1 000000 There is a risk of water balance errors and or insta bilities in the coupling between MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 154 MIKE SHE Distributed Snow Melt Constants I 9 7 Distributed Snow Melt Constants Distributed snow melt constants allows you spatially adjust the degree day factor and melting temperature To activate the distributed option you must add the following items to the list of extra parameters Parameter Name Type Value distributed degree Boolean On day factor degree day factor file name dfs2 file Type Melting Coefficient dfs2 file degree day factor integer item number in dfs2 file greater than zero d
285. nterpolation For this reason there is also a Triangular Working with Spatial Data 295 oa Spatial Data in MIKE SHE interpolation method which can be used and this method should be direc tion independent 19 4 2 Triangular Interpolation As mentioned previously the Bilinear Interpolation is dependent on the orientation of the bathymetry The Triangular Interpolation is made as an answer to this problem First the closest point to X Yc is found The fol lowing figure shows this Figure 19 5 Illustration of triangular interpolation In this example the point Xo yo Zo is the closest point When this point is identified two quadrants are identified indicated by the light grey and the dark grey areas The closest point in these two quadrants are then found They can be seen on the figure as x Y1 Z1 and X2 yo Z2 The interpolation is then done in two steps First the coefficients describing the plane defined by the 3 found points are computed Az V1 Yo Zo Zo Y2 Yo Z1 Zo x Xo O2 z Yo z x5 xo 1 Yo _ 1 X G2 Zo 2 Xo Z1 Z0 en J x X0 Wa Yo X X 01 yo C zo Axo BYo And secondly the actual interpolation is done Ze Ax By C 19 12 296 MIKE SHE Node numbering in the Grid Editor on If less than 3 points are found reverse distance interpolation RDI is used The triangular interpolation is mo
286. o Cancel Help where you can change the EUM Type and the associated data EUM Unit of the item MIKE ZERO Options 355 Im EUM Data Units 356 MIKE SHE AUTOCAL 357 358 AutoCal Se 27 AUTO CALIBRATION TOOL AUTOCAL is a generic tool for performing automatic calibration param eter optimisation sensitivity analysis and scenario management of the numerical modelling engines under MIKE Zero It interfaces the model ling engines using the MIKE Zero PFS parameter files system format for model input and the DFS data file system format for model output AUTOCAL can also be linked to other modelling engines by interfacing ASCII model input files and creating a bridge between the model output and the DFS file format The core of the AUTOCAL tool consists of the following steps 1 Provision of a set of model parameter values to the numerical model to be used in a specific model run 2 Execution of the simulation model using the specified set of model parameter values 3 Calculation of statistical performance measures of the model output The model parameter interface is made via a so called template file This file is simply a replica of the model input file in which parameter identifi cation tags are placed at the locations where the numerical values of the model parameters are given Thus when AUTOCAL has to provide a new set of model parameters to the model the param
287. o change the displayed unit you must know the EUM Data Type In most cases the EUM Data Type is displayed in the fly over text when you put your mouse cursor in the text field Alternatively all items in the on line help F1 list the EUM Data Type in the table at the beginning of the sec tion To change the display units of any EUM Data Type you must close all open documents and then select Options Edit Unit Base Groups from the File pull down menu 2 MIKE Zero Start Page File View Window Help New gt Open Close Glose Project Save Ghl S Save All Ctrl Shift 5 Save As Save Project 4s Template CS Control Print Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Recent Files Recent Projects o Recent Log Files Options Edit Unit B Edit Map Proj Datum Convert Data Utility Exit User Settings When you select this menu item the Unit Base Group Editing dialogue appears By default all of the data units for each active module are dis played For a clearer overview of the data types close all of the model engines that are not relevant Next select the data item that you want to change the units of Then select the new units from the combobox list of available units MIKE ZERO Options gt 349 EUM Data Units After you have changed the data units click Save and Close This saves your changes to the default Unit Base Groups u
288. o dry soils max infiltration Float Greater than 1 0 rate factor 9 11 GeoViewer Output The GeoViewer is a MIKE Zero tool that is used in the MIKE GeoModel product for viewing geologic cross sections in your conceptual model The GeoViewer Output extra parameters will create a set of dfs2 output files during the pre processing that will allow you to look at your pre processed model in the GeoViewer 158 MIKE SHE GeoViewer Output The GeoViewer Output is activated by Parameter Name Type Value make SZ level dfs2 files Boolean On Optional adjust dfs2 levels Boolean On If this option is active then the following files will be created e setupname setupname_GeoLayers dfs2 containing the top and bottom of each geologic layer If there are lenses e setupname setupname_GeoLenses dfs2 containing the top and bot tom of each geologic lense and delete values where there are no lenses If the computational layers are not defined by geologic layers e setupname setupname_CompLayers dfs2 containing the top and bot tom of each computational layer If the optional second parameter is used then the top and bottom eleva tions that are written to the files will be adjusted to be confined between the topography and the lowest computational layer Additional Options 159 Extra Parameters 160 MIKE SHE SURFACE WATER MODELLING WITH MIKE 11 161
289. od 343 25 2 Overlay Manager 2 45 401 Ae a tlw ede oe OS ow ee 345 MIKE ZERO Options 0 20 00 0000 000 347 26 EUM DATA UNITS o 224232443 2m an oho ae 349 26 1 Changing from SI to Imperial American data units 351 26 2 Restoring the default units 2 2 2 Emm nn 352 13 Se 26 3 Changing the EUM data type ofa Parameter 352 26 3 1 Changing the EUM Type of a dfs0 Parameter 354 26 3 2 Changing the EUM Type of a dfs2 Parameter 355 APUTOGAL 223 22484242228 bb DEOL Rate ORES 357 27 AUTO CALIBRATION TOOL 22 22422 404540 zes 58 29244844 359 27 1 New AUTOGAL Dialog 2 4 4 424 u in nah wey ehe 360 27 2 Simulation Specifications 2 2200000 0 361 27 2 1 Model simulation sequence 4 362 27 2 2 Modelparameterfiles 364 27 2 3 Simulation option 2 2 2 2 u Dia Eh Ba we ee amp Be 367 27 2 4 Simulationtitle 0 2202 200000 367 27 3 Model Parameters 2 2x ncn Ge Sirs 2m diver ae de ee wade 367 27 4 Objective Functions 645 26 400 dow od dee Otway 64 Hee ead 370 27 4 1 Output measures 2 0 000002 eee 371 27 4 2 Objective functions 204 8Gs Lewd bh ehe 373 27 4 3 Evaluation period 2 00 374 27 4 4 Aggregation of objective functions 374 27 9 Scena RUNS 2 4 2002 Gow So daw Od ww Hoe Gi oy He wed 376 27 3 1 Scenario type zu na
290. oid unrealistic high values The species precipitates if the concentration exceeds the solu bility and the solid dissolves again if the concentration decreases below the solubility The solubility is a uniform value for the entire catchment and has the unit g m Source strength No of data elements 2 Location number 1 Time series TIME OLSourceStrength dfs0 Record number 3 Location number 2 Time series TIME OLSourceStrength dfsO Record number 4 The units for the source strengths depend on the source type Each of the sources identified by their location number in the species independent section must be given a strength The source strength can either be constant during the entire simulation period in which case the unit is the Base unit or can be a dfsO time series in which case the item has to have the correct EUM data type and the user is free to set the unit to one of the available units for the eum data type The input consists of anumber of data elements one for each overland source location The data element has a Location Number for identification purposes and then two lines with the value or time series file name and in case a time series file is used the item record number Working with Water Quality 209 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 7 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment Note If MIK
291. oints in the complex A trian gular probability distribution is used for assigning the probability of a point to be included in the sub complex i e larger probability for points with smaller objective function value The sub complex is evolved offspring generation according to the simplex algorithm Each complex is evolved times Complex shuffling The new sample of s points is shuffled cf step 2 Steps 2 4 are repeated until a stopping criterion is met Algorithmic parameters The algorithmic parameters of the SCE algorithm their feasible range and recommended values are shown in Table 27 4 Table 27 4 Algorithmic parameters for the SCE algorithm n No of calibration parameters their range and recommended values Parameter Description Range Recommended value p No of complexes p21 m No of points in a complex m22 2n 1 q No of points in a sub com 2 lt q lt m n 1 plex B No of evolution steps taken B21 2n 1 by each complex before shuffling If one complex is chosen in SCE and the number of points in the complex as well as the sub complex are set equal to n 1 the local search simplex method is obtained as a special case No of complexes Number of complexes p applied in the SCE algorithm This is the most important parameter of the SCE algorithm Sensitivity tests show that the dimensionality of the calibration problem No of calibration parameters AUTOCAL A
292. olor palette is used to specify the colours used for shading of the graphical view according to contour levels A palette may be created and saved for later use 322 MIKE Zero Palette I If you want to save the palette together with the specific grid file you can use the Grid State Format p 308 A new palette is created using the Palette Wizard as described below 23 3 1 Palette Wizard step 1 of 3 Palette Wizard Step 1 of 3 Palette title Give the palette a title Palette type Choose the type of palette among two general type palettes e Linear auto scaled a linear scale between the minimum and the maxi mum value in the view automatically scaled e Fixed ascale where you can choose the intervals freely and where the scale does not change according to the data shown in the view and two palettes which are suitable for plotting bathymetries Grid Editor 323 View e Land water auto scaled as the linear auto scaled with the extension that a special colour is specified for land areas e Land water fixed as the fixed type with the extension that a special colour is specified for land areas Colour model A number of different colour models are provided for convenience These colours may then be modified during the second step When using the land water palette types the colour model is fixed and cannot be changed Number of colours Choose the number of colours i e the number of intervals
293. omain and grid LEA In this dialogue you can specify the overall dfs2 grid dimensions and ori gin After you have created the file then you can open and edit the file in the Grid Editor using the Edit button 3 4 1 MIKE SHE model limits Although there are no theoretical limits to the size of your model there are practical limits MIKE SHE does not yet support dynamic allocation of memory so at the moment there are fixed limits on the size of certain arrays in the MIKE SHE code The current default array size limits of MIKE SHE are number of cells in x and y direction 700 number of computational cells per layer incl boundary cells 125 000 number of computational saturated zone layers 50 number of river links 10 000 number of computational UZ columns multi layer UZ 30 000 number of nodes per UZ column multi layer UZ 150 If you bump up against these limits we can of course provide you with a specially compiled version with higher limits However if you exceed these limits you may quickly reach the practical limits of your computer resources If you think you need a larger version may we suggest the fol lowing e First evaluate your model to see if you really need such a large model as there are significant costs in terms of run time memory usage etc that are a function of the model size e If you still feel that you must have a larger model than the limits allow then we sugg
294. omatically generates all of the output asked for in the Setup Editor Thus to look at your output you only need to open the model at look at your results in the normal way If you want to run the water balance program which is described in the Using the Water Balance Tool chapter you can add the following lines to you batch file MSHE_Wb1l_Ex exe apv My_WB_areas WBL MSHE_Wb1l_Post exe apv My_WB_areas WBL 1 MSHE_Wb1l_Post exe apv My_WB_areas WBL 2 MIKE SHE Getting Started 69 Running Your MIKE SHE Model 4 2 2 In the above the first command runs the Extraction phase of the water bal ance utility while the subsequent commands run the Post processing items in the water balance file The number after the water balance file name indicates which Post processing item to run Post processing steps cannot be executed before an Extraction step but only one Extraction step needs to be run for a each water balance utility file Controlling the Time Steps Each of the main hydrologic components in MIKE SHE run with inde pendent time steps Although the time step control is automatically con trolled whenever possible MIKE SHE will run with the maximum allowed time steps Note In the 2007 Release the MIKE 11 time step is no longer specified in MIKE SHE The component time steps are independent but they must meet to exchange flows which leads to some restrictions on the specification of
295. omputational saturated zone layers 2 number of river links 150 number of computational UZ columns multi layer UZ 155 number of nodes per UZ column multi layer UZ 100 simulation time 4444 hours or 185 days number of UZ timesteps 800 number of SZ timesteps 200 no steady state SZ no irrigation 3 5 Defining Topography In MIKE SHE the topography defines the upper boundary of the model The topography is used as the top elevation of both the UZ model and the SZ model The topography the defines the drainage surface for overland flow Many of the elevation parameters can be defined relative to the topogra phy by means of a checkbox in the dialogue including e Lower Level Geological Layer or Lense or Water Quality Layer V 2 p 111 42 MIKE SHE Adding Precipitation Upper Level V 2 p 111 e Lower Level Numerical Layer V 2 p 117 Initial Potential Head V 2 p 117 and Drain Level V 2 p 125 Depth parameters such as ET Surface Depth V 2 p 100 are also meas ured from the topography Topography is typically defined from a DEM defined from either a point theme shape file or an ASCII file If you have an ArcGIS Grid DEM this can be converted to a dfs2 file using the MIKE Zero Toolbox Surfer Grid files can be saved as an ASCII xyz files and then interpolated in MIKE SHE Non dfs2 files or dfs2 files that have a different grid definition than the mod
296. on is chosen the sensi tivity coefficients are evaluated around the initial parameter set Lower bound The Lower bound specifies the lower limit of the feasible parameter val ues in the parameter optimisation Upper bound The Upper bound specifies the upper limit of the feasible parameter val ues in the parameter optimisation 368 AutoCal Model Parameters Ss Transformation The parameter may be used in AUTOCAL as its native value by setting the transformation field to Real or as its logarithmic transformed value by setting the transformation field to Logarithmic A logarithmic transforma tion is generally recommended if the feasible range of the parameter var ies over orders of magnitude Equation If a parameter is defined as a dependent parameter an equation must be given to define the parameter as a function of the available variable parameters AUTOCAL uses an equation parser that supports the general arithmetic operators as well as a number of mathematical func tions The list of available mathematical functions is given in Table 27 3 Table 27 3 Mathematical functions used by the equation parser X and Y are variable names Syntax Function SQR X Square function SQRT X Square root function SIN X Sinus function SIN returns the sine of the angle X in radians COS X Cosinus function COS returns the cosine of the angle X in radians TAN X Tangen
297. onal result files and overlays After selecting the cross section extractor tool move the cursor over the location you want to extract the MIKE 11 results from Figure 7 26 The simulated results are displayed along with the cross section geometry Figure 7 27 As with the other tools extracted profiles can be animated on the screen and or exported as avi and image files Figure 7 27 Resultant MIKE 11 cross section plot 115 The Results viewer 7 6 7 6 1 Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right clicking in the graphical view Figure 7 28 Modification of the profile properties is one functionality available using the right click Since the cross section plots are relatively simple modifications are limited to changing line and marker properties cross section markers etc Figure 7 29 Figure 7 28 Accessing addition functionality in the extracted MIKE 11 cross sec tion plot Figure 7 29 MIKE 11 cross section properties that can be edited UZ Specific Plots UZ Scatter and Filled Plots For unsaturated zone results scatter or filled plots can be generated UZ Scatter and Filled Plots are only different for simulations that do not use the calculation in all cells UZ module option Scatter plots only show simulated results for UZ calculation cells The number of UZ calculation cells may be less than the total number of active model domain used by the overland
298. op up menu or using the Projects Active View Settings Horizontal keystrokes and navigating to the grid file entry that you want to modify The available box contour options are shown in Figure 7 2 and the resulting Result Viewer file using the box contour without and with dividers are shown in Figure 7 1 and Figure 7 3 respectively The box contour presents simu lated results in raster format and uses the exact value generated by the MIKE SHE numerical engine to generate the image shown Figure 7 1 Modifying interpolation properties 100 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot DILL Figure 7 2 Specification of box contour options Figure 7 3 Box contours with dividers option Available box contour with transparency options are shown in Figure 7 4 and is a useful interpolation option to use to allow underlying overlays to be visible under the plot The box contour with transparency options presents simulated results in raster format and uses the exact value gener ated by the MIKE SHE numerical engine to generate the image shown The amount of transparency can be varied and the resulting plot with 38 transparency is shown in Figure 7 5 101 The Results viewer Figure 7 4 Specification of box contours with transparency option 5 Figure 7 5 Box contours with transparency option Available shaded contour options are shown in Figure 7 6 and include copy colours
299. ored e g if the bed material is thick and very fine and the aqui fer material is coarse This is the assumption used in many groundwater models such aa MODFLOW More detailed information on this option can be found in River bed only conductance V2 p 235 Aquifer Bed If there is a low conductivity river bed lining then there will be a head loss across the lining In this case the conductance is a function of both the aquifer conductivity and the total conductivity of the between the river and the adjacent groundwater can be calculated as a serial connection of the individual conductances This is commonly the case when the aquifer material presents a significant head loss For exam ple when the aquifer is relatively fine and the groundwater cells are quite large More detailed information on this option can be found in Both aqui fer and river bed conductance V 2 p 237 Leakage Coefficient 1 sec This is the leakage coefficient for the riverbed lining in units of 1 sec onds The leakage coefficient is active only if the conductance calculation method includes the river bed leakage coefficient Weir Data for overland river exchange The choice of using the weir formula for overland river exchange is a glo bal choice made in the MIKE SHE OL Computational Control Parameters V 2 p 34 dialogue If the weir option is chosen in MIKE SHE then all 170 MIKE SHE MIKE 11 Se MIKE 11 coupling reaches will use the wei
300. orking with the TSF Files Se Table 13 7 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment il ies aia aa il ie i aa a ia ile ie ee SPECIES DEPENDENT DATA E ms miite ile ile oe oie oe ie i sla a mis a is i The first important item is to identify your species with their names A species name is the only identification and must be given Any name can be used for the species e g Initial Conditions No of data elements 3 Lower layer il Concentration MAPS SZConcentration dfs2 1 Lower layer 22 Concentration MAPS SZConcentration dfs2 2 Lower layer 78 Concentration 0 eee ceases Species Chloride or Bromide but also names such as Species A or Species name Partikel solute are possible All the species dependent input has to be repeated for each species nn The initial condition is the initial concentration of the SZ INPUT PART current species and can be either a constant value or fully distributed The input consists of one or more data ele ments where each data element consists of a lower layer indicating the layer down to which the input is valid and a concentration The lower layer of the last data element must be equal to or larger than the lowest layer number in the model The layer intervals in the data elements may not overlap If a constant value is specified the unit of this value is the Base Unit for Concentration ug m If a dsf2 file is specif
301. ose means from North to the Y axis Clockwise see the figure below True north Orient Model north Figure 21 3 Definition of grid orientation 310 MIKE Zero Import from ASCII File Ss 21 2 3 Step 3 Specify the temporal and spatial properties To define the temporal properties you need to specify e the type of axis only choice is equidistant meaning a constant time step between the grids e the time for the first grid e the time step between the grids given in seconds e the number of time steps in the dataset The spatial properties include e the number of grid points in each direction e the grid spacing in meters in each direction The grid spacing is con stant in each direction but can vary between directions 21 2 4 Step 4 Specify the items to be included The grid can contain several items Give the item s a name and select the item type from the list A unit has been defined for each item type and this unit will automatically be set when choosing the item type If you cannot find the item type that you need then use undefined Using the Insert Append and Delete options you can manage the list of items All values in the grid will be initially set to the delete value specified on this page This means that values that are not somehow filled later in the editing process will have the delete value 21 2 5 Step 5 Overview Press Finish to complete the initialisation process and sta
302. oundaries on the other hand must be inside the model domain 3 10 4 Groundwater Drainage Surface drainage is a special boundary condition in MIKE SHE used to defined natural and artificial drainage systems that cannot be defined in the MIKE 11 River setup It can also be used to simulate overland flow in a simple lumped conceptual approach Surface drainage is applied to the layer of the Saturated Zone model containing the drain level Water that is removed from the saturated zone by surface drainage is routed to local surface water bodies Drainage flow is simulated using an empirical formula which requires for each cell a drainage level and a time constant leakage factor that are used for routing the water our of the element Both drain levels and time constants can be spatially defined A typical drainage level is Im below the ground surface and a typical time constant is between le 6 and le 7 1 s MIKE SHE also requires a reference system for linking the drainage to a recipient cell which can be a MIKE 11 river node another SZ grid cell or a model boundary Whenever drain flow is produced during a simulation the computed drain flow is routed to the recipient point using a linear res ervoir routing technique Drainage references There are four different options for setting up the reference system for drainage MIKE SHE Getting Started 51 Building a MIKE SHE Model Drainage Option Drainage routed down
303. our Service and Main tenance Agreement entitles you free support for software problems via email or telephone and regular updates to the software We strongly recommend that you subscribe to the Service and Mainte nance Agreement after the first year to further protect your investment Improvements extensions and fixes are continually being made and we will make every effort to help you with any problems that you encounter but we cannot provide fixes for any versions older than the current release 1 1 1 Service Packs As part ofthe Service and Maintenance there is an auto update program installed with your software This program automatically checks our web site for Service Packs to the currently installed release and downloads the Service Pack if it is available You will be asked before the installation begins if you want the installation to proceed We strongly recommend that you install the latest Service Pack as soon as they are released However some clients prefer not to install the Service Pack during a project or close to the end of a project Occasionally a fix in the numeri cal engine will slightly change your simulation results This may require you to re run previously finished simulations to obtain valid comparisons between simulations The Auto Updater overwrites your existing executable files Therefore if you are concerned about potential changes in your results they you should backup all of the files in the MIKE
304. ox displaying the current fif file created by the pre processor Load After you have pre processed your model setup and a fif file is created you can click on the Load button to load the contents of the fif file and view the actual model input data If the model Setup data has been changed since the last pre processing you will get a warning message telling you that the pre processed data may not match the current setup data If you have changed anything in your model setup and then run the pre processor again you must re load the new fif file to be able to see the changes in the new fif file 4 1 2 Exporting Saving and Editing the pre processed data If you right click on the preprocessed map you will get a menu where you can save the current graphic to the clipboard a wmf metafile or a bmp bitmap file These options are useful if you want to copy and paste or import the graphic into a report You will also be able to save the pre processed data to a dfs2 file The resulting dfs2 file has the same properties as the model domain and grid It can be edited directly in the Grid Editor This option is especially useful if you want to change the preprocessed data In this case you can 1 preprocess the data 2 save the preprocessed values to a dfs file 3 open the dfs2 file in the Grid Editor and edit the values that you want to change and 62 MIKE SHE Preprocessing your model Se 4 then use the edited
305. p 23 contains some information that might be of interest MIKE SHE Getting Started 73 Running Your MIKE SHE Model 74 MIKE SHE WORKING WITH YOUR RESULTS 75 76 MIKE SHE Linking 2005 Results in a 2007 she Set Up File a oa 5 THE RESULTS TAB MIKE SHE Flow Model Description s Results of simulation s Mike SHE Detailed Time Series Gridded Data Results Viewer s Mike 11 Detailed Time Series Run Statistics GeoScene3D Setup Data Processed Data Results All the simulation results are collected in the Results tab This includes Detailed time series output for both MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 as well as Grid series output for MIKE SHE A Run Statistics tool is available for helping you assimilate the calibration statistics for each of the detailed time series plots A link to the GeoScene3D program is also included where you can visual ize your results in a dynamic 3D environment 5 1 Linking 2005 Results in a 2007 she Set Up File The 2007 MIKE Zero project template places all Results from your project in a common Results folder This is different from the 2005 Release where all of you MIKE SHE results were placed in a folder under your project with the same name as the project This means that when you open your 2005 project in MIKE SHE you may not be able to access your results in the Results Tab To link the Results Tab to your existing re
306. parameter in the template file Keyword Line no The keyword is an identification string that shows the location of the parameter in the PFS model input file The first part of the string is the name of the template file This is followed by the hierarchy of PFS sec tions separated by dots The last part of the string is the PFS keyword If the parameter file is not a MIKE Zero PFS file the line No where the parameter is located is shown For each parameter the following has to be specified Name The user must specify a unique name for each parameter This name must not include white spaces In addition if the parameter is included as an independent parameter in an equation arithmetic symbols and function names used by the equation parser must not be used as part of the parame ter name Parameter type The parameter may be defined as either a Variable parameter a Constant parameter or a Dependent parameter A variable parameter is a parameter that is changed by AUTOCAL according to the chosen simulation option For a variable parameter the Initial value Lower bound and Upper bound need to be defined A constant parameter is set to the value defined in the Initial value field A dependent parameter is defined as a function of the other parameters In this case the Equation must be specified Initial value The Initial value is the value used by AUTOCAL for performing a single scenario run If the Local sensitivity analysis opti
307. pe Ix OK Shaded contour Blend colors Cancel Transparency 50 2 Help Isolines IT Draw isolines Draw labels Transparent 23 5 1 Contour type 23 5 2 Isolines Here you can define the way contours are displayed in the Graphical View The colours can be set using the Palette p 322 and a colour legend can be placed next to the grid see Overlay p 326 Box Contour Can either be specified with or without isolines Each grid cell is given a colour according to the value in the cell Box Contour with transparency Used in connection with background overlays the value define the trans parency Shaded Contours The grid is covered with colours indicating the values in the cells a smooth surface is used This will change all land to green Shaded Contour with land his option is similar to Shaded Contours except that it covers points with land values with a colour indicative of land No Contour Used in connection with background overlays The bathymetry will not be shown Here you can define the way isolines are displayed in the Graphical View Grid Editor 327 LAA View 23 6 23 7 23 8 23 9 Draw Isolines This option can be switched on and off A system of isolines will be placed on the grid Draw labels Apply labels to the isolines either as transparent opaque or framed opaque Axis Annotation Choose here how you would like the axis a
308. pecified The basic statistics used by AUTOCAL are the Output measures that include a single comparison sta tistic between an observed and a simulated time series These basic meas ures can then be aggregated into different Objective functions for instance according to spatial location type of variable or type of statistic Finally the defined objective functions are aggregated into a single statistic that is used by the optimisation algorithm 370 AutoCal Objective Functions I Objective functions x r Evaluation period Start date for 01 1971 00 00 00 f Mi j1 RMSE_welis Weighted sum of squares 1 0197400000 Ir 12 AE_Wells Weighted sum 1 End dete 01 01 13700 00 00 3 RMSE_Runoff Weighted sum of squares 1 m Aggregation of objective functions Transformation to a common distance scale gt Output measures slx 1 RMSE_VWellS C MikeZero Karup Ka Well 5 z Obs Well5 RMSE 1 RMSE_WVells 2 RMSE_we g C MikeZero Karup Ka Vell 9 C WikeZero TIME H Obs Well 9 RMSE 1 RMSE_Vells 3 RMSE_WelN 2 C MikeZero Karup Ka Well 12 L C MikeZero TIME H Obs Well 12 RMSE 1 RMSE_Wiells a RMSE_Well21 C MikeZero Karup Ka Vell 21 C WikeZero TIME H Obs Well 21 RMSE 1 RMSE_Wells 5s RMSE_WWell22 C MikeZero
309. pecified which item will have the data set based on the calcu lation specified Item is specified by i followed by the number of the item sequence in the timeseries Time Series Editor 275 Tools You can insert a Operand which basically is an item the value of the Operand item is then used to make the calculations of each of the timesteps all timesteps in the item or all the timesteps in the current Sub Set that you can specify You can also insert an Operand which basically is for addition for sub traction for multiplication and for division as well as a mathematical function from the functions list As an example if you select the target item as item 2 then insert item 3 as Operand then insert Operator then insert item 4 as Operand then insert Operator then insert function cos and finally insert item 1 as Operand you should get the final expression of i2 i3 i4 cos il You can also specify a Sub Set where the calculation will be made using the tab Sub Series that appears when you select Current Sub Set Please refer to Select Sub Set 18 2 Interpolation Interpolation tool is used to interpolate missing values delete values You can access Interpolation tool from Interpolation in the Tools menu or by clicking the Interpolation icon in the Tools Toolbar the fourth icon in the Tools Toolbar Interpolation Gap Filling x Interpolation Gap Filling m Interpolate on En
310. pitation dependent time step control Periods of heavy rainfall can lead to numerical instabilities if the time step is too long To reduce the numerical instabilities the a time step control has been introduced on the precipitation and infiltration components You will notice the effect of these factor during the simulation by suddenly seeing very small time steps during storm events The parameters controlling the time step adjustment are in the Time Step Control V 2 p 30 dialogue In particular the following three parameters control the time step during rainfall events Max precipitation depth per time step If the total amount of precipita tion mm in the current time step exceeds this amount the time step will be reduced by the increment rate Then the precipitation time series will be resampled to see if the max precipitation depth criteria has been met If it has not been met the process will be repeated with progressively smaller time steps until the precipitation criteria is satis fied Multiple sampling is important in the case where the precipitation time series is more detailed than the time step length However the cri teria can lead to very short time steps during short term high intensity events For example if your model is running with maximum time steps of say 6 hours but your precipitation time series is one hour a high intensity one hour event could lead to time steps of a few minutes during that one hour event M
311. planning and management of a wide range of water resources and environmental and ecological problems related to surface water and groundwater such as e River basin management and planning e Water supply design management and optimization e Irrigation and drainage e Soil and water management e Surface water impact from groundwater withdrawal e Conjunctive use of groundwater and surface water e Wetland management and restoration e Ecological evaluations e Groundwater management e Environmental impact assessments e Aquifer vulnerability mapping e Contamination from waste disposal e Surface water and groundwater quality remediation e Floodplain studies e Impact of land use and climate change e Impact of agriculture irrigation drainage nutrients and pesticides etc Graham and Butts 2006 contains a list of some easily accessible refer ences for many of the application areas listed above MIKE SHE Getting Started 19 Se Introduction User interface MIKE SHE s user interface can be characterized by the need to 1 Develop a GUI that promotes a logical and intuitive workflow which is why it includes A dynamic navigation tree that depends on simple and logical choices A conceptual model approach that is translated at run time into the mathematical model Object oriented thinking geo objects with attached properties Full context sensitive on line help Customized input output units to su
312. pms MIKE 21 Non Cohesive Sediments St2 MIKE 21C Flow Model m2lc MIKE 3 Flow Model m3 MIKE 3 Flow Model FM m3fm MIKE 3 Particle Spill Analysis npa ECOLAB ecolab General ASCII input files er When a model parameter file is selected a corresponding template file is automatically created a _Autocal is added to the file name This tem plate file is simply a replica of the model parameter file which is used for placing parameter identification tags at the locations where the values of the model parameters to be manipulated in AUTOCAL are given From AUTOCAL 365 Auto Calibration Tool AUTOCAL the template file can be directly edited In the case a MIKE Zero PFS file is selected the coresponding editor is opened whereas a text editor Notepad is opened in the case of a general ASCII input file As identification tags reserved floating point values are used consisting of the values 1 01e 35 1 02e 35 9 99e 35 Thus in the model editor the identification tag is placed in the field where the numerical value of the model parameter is given Individual parameters must be given unique identification tags If several model parameters should be given the same parameter value in AUTOCAL the same identification tag can be given to these model parameters Alternatively individual identification tags can be given and the parameters may be set to be identical using the dependent parameter option on the Model Param
313. port processes in one of the parts of the hydrological cycle Used in combination they describe solute transport in the entire hydrological cycle The four components are e Overland Transport e Channel Transport MIKE 11 e Unsaturated Zone Transport e Groundwater Transport In principle these processes are independent However the current ver sion of MIKE SHE AD can only calculate the solute transport e for all components together overland unsaturated zone and ground water e for the saturated zone and the overland component together or e for the saturated zone alone A number of processes relevant for simulating reactive solute transport are included in MIKE SHE including e Water and solute transport in macro pores e Sorption of solutes described by either equilibrium sorption isotherms Linear Freundlich or Langmuir or kinetic sorption isotherms which include effects of hysteresis in the sorption process e Attenuation of solutes described by an exponential decay and e Plant uptake of solutes 2007 Release versus 2005 Release In the 2007 Release the saturated zone and overland components of the AD module are included in the user interface The user interface does not yet include the UZ component or the water quality processes for overland unsaturated and saturated flow The particle tracking PT module is also not yet supported in the user interface In the mean time the full integrated functionality of
314. pport local needs 2 Strengthen the calibration and result analysis processes which is why it includes Default HTML outputs calibration hydrographs goodness of fit water balances etc User defined HTML outputs A Result Viewer that integrates 1D 2D and 3D data for viewing and animation Water balance auto calibration and parameter estimation tools 3 Develop a flexible unstructured GUI suitable for different modelling approaches which is why it includes Flexible data format gridded data shp files etc that is easy to update for new data formats Flexible time series module for manipulating time varying data Flexible engine structure that can be easily updated with new numerical engines The result is a GUI that is flexible enough for the most complex applica tions imaginable yet remains easy to use for simple applications 1 1 Service and Maintenance As with any complex software package the software is being continually improved and extended Some of these improvements are fixes of prob lems that have slipped though our quality control Others are fixes of known minor problems with the software However the vast majority of 20 MIKE SHE Service and Maintenance oa the changes in new releases and service packs are related to improvements to the functionality of the software Your initial purchase of the software is protected by a one year subscrip tion to our Service and Maintenance Agreement Y
315. press the lt Back button to make additional modifications or Cancel button to cancel all changes Palette Wizard Step 1 of 3 Welcome to the Tool for Coasting Palettes From this page you choose the type of palette autoscalind or fiend ard land water of andud l a standard palettes is choven diferent coio models can be wed Besides ther you can hesly choose the number of colors in the palette Finaly the colors can be spectied uung hue bghiness and eetisation by chocming HLS Palette Type Setecton Palette tthe Palette Paltieype Fund z Color modet Rambo Mbac i o I Topmost value indication F Figure 7 12 Step 1 of 3 modification of the number of colours used in the colour scheme Palette Wizard Step 1 of 3 Welcome to the Tool for Csating Palettes From thes page you choose the type af palette autoscaled o hand and land water or dardard a standard palette is chosen diferent color models can be used Besides the you can heel choose the number of colors in the palette Finally the coli can be peched uang hue bgtiness and sahuaton by choosng HLS Palette Type Selecton Palette tle Palette Palette type Colt modet Number of colors E Figure 7 13 Step 1 of 3 modification of the number of colours model used in the colour scheme 106 MIKE SHE Modifying the plot Se Palette Wizard Step 2 of 3 Please Specty the Colot Table in the Palette From the page you specily actua
316. proper default values and attribute type You can then edit this grid in the MIKE Zero Grid Editor which can be accessed using the Edi button Alternatively a dfs2 file can be created using the Grid Series editor which can be accessed by clicking on FilelNew in the pull down menu or using the New File icon D in the toolbar and then selecting Grid Series x Product Types MIKE Zero MIKE 11 MIKE 21 MIKE 3 5 MIKE 21 3 Integrated Models E LITPACK 55 MIKE FLOOD MIKE SHE Documents Sales Time Series dfsO R Profile Series dfs1 MW Grid Series dfs3 dfs2 Foata Manager dfsu mesh Plot Composer plc u Result viewer rev BR Bathymetries batsF cae Animator mza BEC Lab ecolab auto Calibration auc Beva Editor eva B Mesh Generator mdF Data Extraction FM dxFm FaRMIKE Zero Toolbox mzt MIKE Zero a framework that gives access to DHI Software modelling systems If you create the file from these tools you must be careful to ensure that the EUM Data Type matches the parameter that you are creating the file for For more information on the EUM data types see EUM Data Units The grid for the dfs2 file does not have to be the same as the numerical model grid However if the grids are not subsets of one another then the grids will be interpolated using the bilinear interpolation during the pre processing stage 286 MIKE SHE Gridded d
317. r should be sufficient for an average MIKE SHE model Thus a typical machine for running an average MIKE SHE model will have at least a 1 8 to 2 GHz CPU 1 to 2GB of RAM and 30 to 50 GB of free disk space Note MIKE SHE will not run on Linux workstations 64 bit CPU DHI has been working with the Microsoft X64 team and some of the newer DHI numerical engines are compiled for a 64 bit processor How ever MIKE 11 is an older code that cannot yet be compiled for a 64 bit processor MIKE 11 and thus also MIKE SHE will run fine on a 64 bit machine but it will run as a 32 bit application Dual Core Dual Processor Hyper Threading A dual core or dual processor machine will allow you to run MIKE SHE and a second application such as a spreadsheet However the MIKE SHE code has not been optimized for parallel processing so the MIKE SHE engine cannot take advantage of the parallelization possibilities MIKE SHE Getting Started 23 MIKE SHE If you are using the AUTOCAL program you might want to consider the Office Grid package This package will allow you to spread multiple sim ulations out over an office network On the other hand a dual core or dual processor machine will allow you to work on something else while your simulation runs RAM MIKE SHE does not dynamically allocate RAM This means that a large model will allocate a lot of RAM even if the cells are not being used Thus to run a large model you will nee
318. r formula for moving water across the river bank The weir option is typically used when you want to simulate overbank spilling and detailed 2D surface flow in the flood plains The following parameters and options are available when you specify the weir option in MIKE SHE If you chose the Manning equation option in MIKE SHE then these parameters are ignored Weir coefficient and Head exponent The Weir coefficient and head exponent refer to the C and k terms respec tively in Equation 14 8 The default values are generally reasonable Both the weir coefficient and the head exponent are dimensionless Minimum upstream height above bank for full weir width In Equation 14 8 when the upstream water depth above the weir approaches zero the flow over the weir becomes undefined To prevent numerical problems the flow is reduced linearly to zero when the water depth is below the minimum upstream height threshold The EUM data type is Water Depth Allow overbank spilling This checkbox lets you define which branches are allowed to flood over their banks Thus you can allow flooding from MIKE 11 only in branches with defined flood plains or only in areas of particular interest If overbank spilling is not allowed for a particular branch then the over land river exchange is still calculated using the weir formula but the exchange is only one way that is from overland flow to the river Minimum flow area for overbank spilling The minim
319. r grid cells and boundary cells is to facili tate the definition of boundary conditions For example drainage flow can be routed to external boundaries but not to internal boundaries Since the model domain is defined as part of the dfs2 file format if you want to change the extent of your model domain you must edit the dfs2 file However if you want to change the grid spacing then it is probably easier to create a new file Note The Model Domain and Grid does not have to have the same dimen sions size and spacing as other specified dfs2 files But the dfs2 files for integer grid codes must be coincident That is the rows and columns must align with one another For more information on this see Integer Grid Codes V 1 p 290 Using a shp file It is much easier to define your Model Domain and Grid via a GIS poly gon shape shp file In this case the definition of integer code values is taken care of internally Once you have defined the polygon file to use then you specify the spatial extent and origin location of the model domain and grid An important advantage of using a polygon for the model domain is that the number of rows and columns can be easily adjusted Creating dfs2 or shp files There is a Create button next to the Browse button that opens a dialogue where you can define a dfs2 grid file This utility automatically creates the grid file with the appropriate Item Type 40 MIKE SHE Defining the model d
320. r items on the left hand side For example to create a new dfsO time series file you will need to select the Time Series dfs0 item from under the MIKE Zero list 28 MIKE SHE MIKE Zero Im The new MIKE SHE file is created and displayed but not named until you save the file So the first thing you should do is save the file When you save the file you will be presented with the following ST x Save As Name Snaker_Catchment she gt Location C MSHEProjects mshe_flo_test Model a Notes The basic case catchment for the Snake River project 7 Addto Version Control OK Cancel The default location is the current position in the Project Explorer Once the file is saved you can begin building your model For more infor mation on building your model see Building a MIKE SHE Model V 1 p 37 2 3 3 Opening an Existing Model File After MIKE Zero is open you can open an existing flow model document by e selecting FilelOpen in the pull down menu or e clicking on the Open File icon amp in the toolbar or e doubling clicking on the file in the Project Explorer In the first two cases the Open File dialogue will appear MIKE SHE Getting Started 29 MIKE SHE 2 4 Dren 21x Look in Sj LK toho east Borehole Lk Toho_precFixed I Lk_Tohot SHEPar1 Sirainfall gapfilled new data dfsO File name Files of type Time Series Data dfs
321. r net works and groundwater MIKE SHE is applicable at spatial scales ranging from a single soil profile for evaluating crop water requirements to large regions including several river catchments such as the 80 000 km Sen egal Basin e g Andersen et al 2001 MIKE SHE has proven valuable in hundreds of research and consultancy projects covering a wide range of climatological and hydrological regimes many of which are referenced in Graham and Butts 2006 The need for fully integrated surface and groundwater models like MIKE SHE has been highlighted by several recent studies e g Camp Dresser amp MIKE SHE Ss McKee Inc 2001 Kaiser Hill 2001 West Consultants Inc et al 2001 Kimbley Horn amp Assoc Inc et al 2002 Middlemis 2004 which can all be downloaded from the MIKE SHE web site These studies compare and contrast available integrated groundwater surface water codes They also show that few codes exist that have been designed and developed to fully integrate surface water and groundwater Further few of these have been applied outside of the academic community Kaiser Hill 2001 Applications around the world MIKE SHE has been used in a broad range of applications It is being used operationally in many countries around the world by organizations rang ing from universities and research centres to consulting engineers compa nies Refsgaard amp Storm 1995 MIKE SHE has been used for the analysis
322. r the coupling reach is actually copied to the flooded cell and used for all flood grid points of the coupling reach This makes sense if the flood plain is frequently flooded and covered with the same sediments as the river bed However in many cases the flood plain material is not the same as the river bed and the infiltration rate can be substantially different 10 3 Converting from Flood Codes to Overbank Spilling The explicit solver and overbank spilling from MIKE 11 to overland flow are new in the 2007 Release In principle if you were careful setting up your flood codes then the conversion to overbank spilling should result in the same flooded area with similar depths The only difference will be that the water on the flooded area is flowing However in practice the conversion is not likely to be this smooth Flood code setups are typically done manually and the topography is typically not very closely controlled as long as it was inundated when it was sup posed to be Furthermore the need for detailed surface roughness Man ningsM will require additional data Finally the complication of fully 174 MIKE SHE Common MIKE 11 Error Messages Sx 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 dynamic diffusive wave 2D flow can lead to complicated water flows across the flood plain So there is likely to be substantial adjustment and re calibration to get the flooding right Fortunately you can mix Flood codes and Overbank spilling in
323. ram shows the distribution of the values in the intervals defined by the Palette Grid Editor 339 I Tools 24 10 Copy File into Data This tool can be used to copy data from a file into the dataset being edited Copy File into Data Eu xj m File to Copy PETTE Filename MIKE_3 FlowModel HD Sound Salt North dfs2 s Cancel rm Item Mapping Help source Rem mapsto Targettem EZ 4 Salinity m Salinity psu m 2D to 3D Layer Mapping Populate layer no a From 0 to 40 Populate all layers m Sub Area Position origin fe 3 k origin fa 3 m Time Position Date origin 1933712702 00 00 00 Time step origin p 3 IV Interpolate m Operation Type 24 10 1 File to Copy Select the data file from which data should be copied If you edit a 2D data file you may copy data from a 2D data file If you edit a 3D data file you may copy data from either 2D or 3D data files 24 10 2 Item Mapping Select the items from which data should be copied and the corresponding items to which data should be copied You may copy several items in one process 340 MIKE Zero Crop LA 24 10 3 2D to 3D Layer Mapping When copying a 2D file into a 3D file you can choose to populate either one particular layer in the 3D file or all layers 24 10 4 Sub area Position Give the coordinates in the grid being edited where the origin of the data to be copied
324. re information on the use of extra parameters see Extra Parameters V 1 p 143 11 1 2 Telling MOUSE that it is coupled to a MIKE SHE model To couple a MOUSE model to MIKE SHE MOUSE must be supplied with some extra information This information is found in MOUSE s ADP file Line item Comment MOUSE_COUPLING SYNTAX_VERSION 1 UNIT_TYPE 1 CALLER MSHE LineHeader ID LinkType C OLExp Comment line for headers SzLeakageCoef COUPLINGMMSHE NODEI 1 0 001 2 One line for each coupling item COUPLINGMMSHE LINK1 2 0 001 2 0 2 1P Link name LinkType 1 for node 2 for link C conductance for Overland flow to MOUSE units depend on OLExp and whether it is a pipe or a manhole SzLeakageCoeff leakage coeffi cient needed only when the saturated zone is coupled to a link Endsect Drainage modelling with MOUSE 183 Ss Using MIKE SHE with MOUSE 11 1 3 Creating a MsheMouse pfs file The MsheMouse pfs file is an ASCII file that includes all of the specifica tions for the coupling The following table defines the structure of the file along with some information on the parameters When the MOUSE cou pling has been added to the user interface the creation of this file will be automatic Table 11 1 MsheMouse pfs file format and description Line item Comment MIKESHE_MOUSE_ Specifications FileVersion 2 Link_SZ_Exchange
325. re time consuming due to the more complex direction independent search but better end results should be achieved with this method 19 5 Node numbering in the Grid Editor The Grid Editor is a generic grid tool for all DHI Software and was origi nally developed for the Marine programs MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 How ever this often leads to confusion in the node and layer numbering because MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 use a different numbering system Node numbering in the Grid Editor In the Grid Editor and in MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 the nodes are numbered starting in the lower left from 0 0 whereas in MIKE SHE the nodes are numbered starting in the lower left from 1 1 Layer numbering in the Grid Editor In the Grid Editor and in MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 the layers are numbered starting at the bottom from 0 whereas in MIKE SHE the layers are num bered starting at the top from 1 19 6 Performing simple math on multiple grids In the upper menu of the Grid Editor under tools there is an item called Copy File into Data GoTo gt Syncronize Tab to Map Select gt Deselect ction Calculator Calculate Statistics Copy File into Data Crop Working with Spatial Data 297 Spatial Data in MIKE SHE If you select this item then a dialogue appears where you can insert an existing dfs2 or dfs3 file into the current dfs2 or dfs3 file that you are edit ing in the Grid editor Copy File into Data File to Coy
326. rent from establishing a stand alone MIKE 11 HD model and a stand alone MIKE SHE model In principle there are three basic set up steps Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 163 Se Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE 10 2 MIKE 11 1 Establish a MIKE 11 HD hydraulic model as a stand alone model and make a performance test and if possible a rough calibration using pre scribed inflow and stage boundaries You can also specify a default groundwater table e g MIKE SHE s initial groundwater level and leakage coefficients for any leakage calculations 2 Establish a MIKE SHE model that includes the overland flow compo nent and optionally the saturated zone and unsaturated zone compo nents An SZ drainage boundary can be used to prevent excessive surface flows in low lying areas and the river flood plain 3 Couple MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 by defining branches reaches where MIKE 11 HD should interact with MIKE SHE Modify your MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 models so that they work together properly For example by removing the specified groundwater table in MIKE 11 and adjusting your SZ drainage elevations if you used these in Step 2 With regard to Step 1 a normal MIKE 11 model is set up which is described in the MIKE 11 documentation and on line help facilities How ever a few extra hints are given in Section 10 2 Step 2 is described else where in this manual The rest of this chapter is largely about Step 3 Typically the first st
327. rface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 173 Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE separate coupling reaches overlap Thus you can make the initial MIKE SHE set up using the Cross section option and then subse quently retrieve and check the resulting ground surface topography from the pre processed data If needed the pre processed topography can be saved to a dfs2 file right click on the map modified and then used as input for a new set up now using the Use Grid Data option Bed Leakage If one of the flood options are selected then you must also specify if and how the leakage coefficient will be applied on the flooded cells The infil tration seepage of MIKE SHE flood grids is calculated as ordinary over land exchange with the saturated or unsaturated zone That is the leakage coefficient if it exists is applied to both saturated exchange to and from the flooded cell and unsaturated leakage from the flooded cell In the case of the unsaturated leakage the actual leakage is controlled by either the leakage coefficient or the unsaturated zone hydraulic conductivity rela tionship which yields the lowest infiltration rate e Use grid data In this case the leakage coefficient specified in Over land groundwater Leakage Coefficient is used If this item has not been specified then the leakage coefficient will be calculated based on the aquifer material only e Use river data default In this case the Leakage Coefficient 1 sec fo
328. rt editing 21 3 Import from ASCII File This tool can be used to import grid data from an ASCII File and convert it into a DFS File dfs2 dfs3 dt2 and dt3 The DFS File format is developed by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic data These files typically contain model grids wind fields model results etc To import grid data go to File New and select Grid Series under the MIKE Zero heading This will open the Grid Series dialog Choose From ASCII File and press OK Grid Editor 311 SX File 21 3 1 File to Import On the Import From ASCII dialog select the ASCII File from which you wish to import the data The ASCII File must have a certain format in order to be read correctly 21 3 2 Completion and Editing To complete the importing of data press OK Thereafter the new DFS File is shown with the Grid Editor Here you can edit data and finally save the DFS File 21 3 3 Hint Creating a frame from an existing file can make it easier to create the header for the ASCII file to be imported Simply by exporting an existing file to ASCII and change the relevant header information and include the actual data after the header file 21 4 Export to ASCII File You can Export a Grid File in DFS Format to an ASCII File For further description of Grid File Formats see File Formats p 307 Open the DFS File dfs2 dfs3 or dfs in the Grid Editor Go to File and Export to ASCII
329. rties When importing an ASCII file exported by Timeseries Editor just activate the Time Series Export ASCII format property on the Import from ASCII dia log and the import will be made with the expected result Please refer to Import from ASCII File Time Series Editor 273 LAA Properties 274 MIKE Zero Calculator Ss 18 TOOLS This is a set of tools available to work with the timeseries data e Calculator can be applied for several calculations on the data e Interpolation can interpolate missing values delete values in the data e You can select a sub set of the data to work with using the Select Sub Set tool e You can see statistical information of the data using the Statistics tool Tools are accessible through the Tools menu or by clicking on the desired tool icon on the Tools Toolbar lf amp 18 1 Calculator Calculator tool is used to set item s data based on calculations You can access Calculator tool from Calculator in the Tools menu or by clicking the Calculator icon in the Tools Toolbar the second icon in the Tools Toolbar Calculations E s x Calculator Sub Series Edit Expression Target Item jin 7 Insert Operand i5 x Insert Operator 7 Insert Function stan x Expression Current Expression fi atanli3 i5 7 Cancel Help Here you can specify the calculation to make and which Item to set the calculated data in Target Item s
330. s and modification of the time series plot properties Figure 7 20 Most of the functionality can also be accessed via the menu bar For example modification of the time series plot properties can be accessed using Projects Active View Settings Timeseries Figure 7 20 Modifying the properties of time series plots in the result viewer Because of the rich functionality available in the Result Viewer with respect to time series output users should experiment with the available options An example of the available functionality for modification of the time series plot properties is shown in Figure 7 21 For example as shown in the upper left of Figure 7 21 time series items can be added or deleted from a plot on the items tab 110 MIKE SHE Saturated Zone Cross section Plots Im Figure 7 21 Modification of A items displayed on the time series plot B x axis properties C y axis properties and D time series plot title 7 4 Saturated Zone Cross section Plots The Profile Extractor tool can be used to extract an arbitrary cross section through a 3D SZ results file After you have clicked on this icon you can define a cross section profile by left clicking at each vertex of the profile line and double clicking to close the profile 111 Se The Results viewer After closing the profile a dialogue will be displayed that lists the availa ble output types On
331. s such as Drain codes In this case it is difficult to assign integer values based on grid independent poly gons In a complex setup it would be very difficult to control which cells are being assigned to which code when the polygons do not coincide with the cell boundaries In some areas the model results could be very sensi tive to the code assigned 19 2 Integer Grid Codes Integer Grid Codes are required when Real data varies in time or when model functions such as soil profiles and paved areas are assigned to par ticular zones Integer Grid Codes are always integer values and do not vary with time For information on entering Integer Codes see the Integer Grid Codes sec tion 284 MIKE SHE Integer Grid Codes Se The following is an outline of the parameters that require Integer Grid Codes Model Domain Integer Grid Codes are used to define the inactive areas both inside and outside the model domain Inactive areas outside of the model and the edge of the model are defined in the Model Domain and Grid section while inactive subsurface areas inside of the model are defined as Internal boundary conditions Component Calculations Integer Grid Codes are used to delineate such things as paved areas In this case the integer code acts like a flag and the calculations that are done are different depending on how the flag is set Model Properties Integer Grid Codes are used to delineate areas with similar prop
332. s as base flow It also runs off directly to streams and rivers that flow back to the ocean The hydrologic cycle is a closed loop and our interventions do not remove water rather they affect the movement and transfer of water within the hydrologic cycle In 1969 Freeze and Harlan Freeze and Harlan 1969 proposed a blue print for modelling the hydrologic cycle In this original blueprint differ ent flow processes were described by their governing partial differential equations The equations used in the blueprint were known to represent the physical processes at the appropriate scales in the different parts of the hydrological cycle From 1977 onwards a consortium of three European organizations devel oped and extensively applied the Systeme Hydrologique Europ en SHE based on the blueprint of Freeze and Harlan Abbott et al 1986a amp b The integrated hydrological modelling system MIKE SHE emerged from this work see Figure 1 1 Since the mid 1980 s MIKE SHE has been further developed and extended by DHI Water amp Environment Today MIKE SHE is an advanced flexible framework for hydrologic modelling It includes a full suite of pre and post processing tools plus a flexible mix of advanced and simple solution techniques for each of the hydrologic processes MIKE SHE covers the major processes in the hydrologic cycle and includes process models for evapotranspiration overland flow unsatu rated flow groundwater flow
333. s often not serious because at river confluences the water levels in the different branches are roughly the same anyway In any case the flood code map is available in MIKE SHE s preprocessed tab where you can check its reasonableness Right clicking on the map will give you the option of saving the map to a dfs2 file which you can then correct and use with the Manual option 172 MIKE SHE MIKE 11 LAA Flood Code If the Manual option is selected then you must specify a Flood code for the coupling reach The flood code is used for mapping MIKE SHE grids to MIKE 11 h points You must click on the Flood Code checkbox in Figure 10 2 and then specify an integer flood code file in MIKE SHE The specified flood code for the coupling reach must exist in the dfs2 Flood Code file It is important to use unique flood codes to ensure correct flood mapping Bed Topography Since the flood mapping procedure will only flood a cell when the river water level is above the cell s topography accurate flood inundation map ping requires accurate elevation data If one of the flood options are selected then you have the option to refine the topography of the flood plain cells based on the actual cross section elevations or on a more detailed local scale DEM if it exists e Use Grid Data default If Grid Data option is selected the MIKE SHE topography value is used to determine whether or not the cell is flooded However the program first
334. s the flooded cells and the overland water is added to the lake cell and to MIKE 11 as lateral inflow Groundwater exchange to the lake is through the lake bed as saturated zone discharge In principle the satu rated zone could discharge to the river link but the local groundwater gra dients would probably make this exchange very small Combining Flood Codes and Overbank Spilling Flooding using Overbank spilling and Flood Codes is possible in the same model and even in the same coupling reach The only restriction is that there is no overland flow calculated in cells flooded by means of Flood Codes So in a long coupling reach you could allow overbank spilling and calculate overland flow using the explicit solver but define flood codes in the wide downstream flood plain were the surface water gradients are very low during flooding and in the wide shallow reservoir half way down the system 10 2 2 MIKE SHE Coupling Reaches Each MIKE 11 branch that exchanges water with MIKE SHE is called a coupling reach A MIKE 11 branch can be sub divided into several cou pling reaches A reason for doing so could be to allow different riverbed leakage coefficients for different parts of the river Each coupling reach is interpolated to a MIKE SHE river link which is located at the nearest boundary between grid cells Each MIKE SHE river link can only be associated with one coupling reach which restricts the coupling reaches from being too close tog
335. saturated zone data is displayed in the result viewer Addi tional information is given below 7 2 Modifying the plot When the Results viewer is opened from MIKE SHE a default plot is cre ated However in many cases you will want to edit these plot settings Typical changes fall into four broad categories Adding additional result files and overlays V p 95 e Adding or modifying vectors V p 98 Changing the shading or contour settings V p 100 e Changing the legend and colour scale VJ p 105 7 2 1 Adding additional result files and overlays A project or view or plot in the Results Viewer is a collection of results files and overlays You can add additional results files or overlays to your current plot by following these steps 95 I The Results viewer 1 Select Projects Add Files to Project from the top pull down menu This will open the dialogue below Add Files to Project i x Add Files to Project Overlay Manager alxl O meme 1 File name MIKE SHE Result File C Projectst Odensee Odense2003 Odense 2 Click on the Add item button in this dialogue to add a line to the list of files attached to the current project 3 Inthe left hand column select the type of file to add including image files additional results files and MIKE 11 files 4 Click on the browse button to find the file that you want to add All project files will be displayed that are t
336. sensitivity analysis has been performed e Scaled sensitivity coefficients for each parameter of the specified out put measures and objective functions e Parameter covariance matrix in terms of the standard deviations of the parameters and the correlation matrix It should be noted that the calcu lated parameter covariance is related to the transformed parameter val ues and not their native values In order to compare the local sensitivity coefficients between parameters of different scales of magnitude scaled sensitivity values are calculated as S S8 0 27 21 i scale i upper i lower where S is the calculated un scaled sensitivity coefficient described in Section 27 6 2 and O pper and O tower are the specified upper and lower limits of the parameter The scaled sensitivities provide a ranking of the parameters with respect to the importance of the parameters for the con 390 AutoCal Error handling Se sidered output measure or objective function Higher scaled sensitivity values absolute values indicate more sensitive parameters As a rule of thumb parameters are said to be insensitive if their scaled sensitivity value is less than about 0 01 0 02 times the maximum scaled sensitivity value absolute value However care should be taken using this as a strict threshold measure Since the sensitivity coefficients are evaluated only around the initial parameter set they reflect the local sensi tivi
337. set go to File Open and select the file format that you are looking for If you double click a file in the Windows Explorer with a file format associated with the Grid Editor then the editor will open and load the data ready for editing 20 3 Editing the Dataset When you have selected the dataset to edit the editor is ready to work Similar to other MIKE Zero DFS editors such as the Time Series Editor and the Profile Editor the Grid Editor has two views a graphical view and a tabular view A movable splitter bar allowing you to adjust the relative sizes of the two views separates these views 20 4 Further help Further help can be found for the following topics e Graphical View p 322 about the graphical view of the data e Tabular View p 321 about the tabular view of the data e New File p 309 dialog to create a new dataset Tools e Navigation p 33 to navigate in the dataset in time and how to select an item e Set Value p 335 to assign a value to a selection of grid cells e Filter p 335 to filter a selection of data e g smooth the data e Crop p 341 to discard some of the data and keep the rest 304 MIKE Zero Further help a oa e Calculator p 336 transform the data using expressions that involve the data itself the time step etc e Interpolation p 334 fill blank values e Copy File into Data p 340 import data from another dataset e Toolbars p 328 the W
338. sim11 file that you want to use in your model Detailed information on how to couple MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE and the overbank spilling options can be found in the chapter e Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE V 1 p 163 whereas detailed information on the coupling mechanism can be found in e Channel Flow Reference V 2 p 227 3 8 Adding Overland Flow Overland flow is required when you are using MIKE 11 in MIKE SHE as the overland flow module provides lateral runoff to the rivers If you don t want to simulate overland flow then you can specify a Mannings M of 0 which will disable overland flow The overland flow can be calculated using either a semi distributed method or a finite difference method using the diffusive wave approxima tion The finite difference method should be used when you are interested in calculating detailed overland flow while the semi distributed simpli fied method should be used for regional applications where detailed over land flow is not required More information on the numerical methods can be found in e Finite Difference Method V 2 p 211 e Diffusive Wave Approximation V 2 p 211 Successive Over Relaxation SOR Numerical Solution V 2 p 216 Explict Numerical Solution V 2 p 217 e Simplified Overland Flow Routing V 2 p 220 Whereas detailed information on the coupling between MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE and the overbank spilling options can be found in the chapter e Coupling MIKE
339. simulation the return code from the called program is checked In the case an error in the model simulation has occured for a given parameter set e g by creating instabilities an error return code is received by AUTOCAL a return value different from 0 In such a case the output meaures and objective functions are given a delete value of 99 which are written to the output files AUTOCAL Auto Calibration Tool Depending on the simulation option chosen in AUTOCAL error return codes from the called program are handled differently e Inthe case the Scenario runs option is chosen AUTOCAL continues with the next scenario e Inthe case the Sensitivity analysis options is chosen AUTOCAL is halted In this case the sensitivity coefficients and the parameter covar iance matrix cannot be calculated e Inthe case the Parameter optimisation option is chosen the optimisa tion continues and the parameter set that gave an error in the simulation model is penalised in the optimisation by assigning the aggregated objective function a penealty value of 103 However if a large number of model runs return error codes a general model failure is suspected and AUTOCAL is halted If the simulation model does not provide a return code AUTOCAL offers another possibility for error handling When a model run is started AUTOCAL creates an empty file called AutocalSimErr dat that is placed in the working directory When the model run finishes AUT
340. sot ropy with axial symmetry around the z axis These simpli fications are identified on the number of non zero dispersivities to be specified Under the assumption of iso tropic conditions you should only specify the longitudinal dispersivity amp z and the transversal dispersivity r the other three dispersivities are automatically set Under anisotropic conditions you should specify five dispersivi ties For the Aniso opt the user can set the following 1 no dispersion 2 isotropic 3 anisotropic Working with Water Quality 201 Se Using the Fully Integrated AD Module Table 13 3 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment No of data elements Dispersivities 0 The sizes of these parameters depend on the degree of heterogeneity in your geology and other matters that affects the velocity field and the degree to which these matters have been described in the flow description The more heterogeneous your geology is the larger dispersivi ties should be applied and the more detailed you have described the heterogeneities the smaller dispersivities should be applied Furthermore the size of the dispersivities depend on the scale of modelling and on the applied grid size The larger scale the larger dispersivities and the larger grid size the smaller dispersivities should be applied because of numer ical dispersion For these reasons it is diffic
341. st 5 Meteorologic Units Tool Setups Simulation History gt New Projeet Open Project Delete Project 21 Project File Expl Tool Expl No Tracking Mode 4 MIKE Zero is more than a set of modelling tools MIKE Zero is a project management interface with a full range of tools for helping you with your modelling project The MIKE Zero Start Page see above includes three main components the Project Overview table the Project Explorer data tree and the top Menu and Icon bar MIKE SHE Getting Started 25 MIKE SHE 2 3 1 A MIKE Zero project includes all of the modelling artifacts that is all of the raw data files model input files and model output files as well as any reports spreadsheets plots etc In any project it is a challenge to main tain an overview of all of these files not to mention keeping regular back ups and archives of all of these files As you progress through the calibration and validation phases and then on to the scenario analysis and report writing phases the number of model artifacts can become over welming The MIKE Zero project structure is designed to help you keep control of your project Creating a new MIKE SHE Project Open an Existing Project Name Created Modified Location NapaFD 28 09 2006 Today C 7 BD and Sales BD Visits 2006 Canada Se Odense2003 hrs 31 10 2006 Today C 5 Testing MSHE projects
342. sults without rerunning your model you need to uncheck the Default Output folder option in the Stor Working with your Results e 77 Im The Results Tab ing of results dialogue Then use the browse button to specify the directory where your results are stored as shown below OOF NOOS5WOIGQO02M Observed Water levels m c 007NOOSWOIGODZM m Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May 2002 2002 2002 2002 2002 2002 2002 2002 2002 2002 2003 2003 2003 2003 2003 ME 1 563 MAE 1 89026 RMSE 2 43509 STDres 1 86727 R Correlation 0 702677 R2 Nash_Sutcliffe 0 646564 The MIKE SHE Detailed time series tab includes an HTML plot of each point selected in the Setup Editor The HTML plots are updated during the 78 MIKE SHE Gridded Results Sx simulation whenever you enter the view Alternatively you can select the Refresh button to refresh the plot Note that the HTML plot is regenerated every time you enter the view So if you have a lot of plots and a long simulation then the regeneration can take a long time For information on the statistics see Statistic Calculations V 2 p 161 5 3 Gridded Results Layer no for Groundwater items 1 Add XY flow vectors Filena 1 head elevation in saturated zone E CM Projects Odensee dense2003 2 SZ exchange flow with river E Cl Projects Odensee Odense2003 CM Projects Odensee Odense2003 View FR
343. t MIKE SHE MIKE Zero Im 2 3 e Do you really need the Richards equation for unsaturated flow For regional models the two layer water balance method is usually sufficient which is very fast The gravity flow method is also typically 2 5 times faster than the Richards equation method Again during the calibration it can be a good idea to use one of the simpler methods and the more detailed method for the final simulations e Is your MIKE 11 simulation too detailed If your MIKE 11 cross sections are too close together MIKE 11 will run with a very short time step Regional models can often be run with the simple routing meth ods in MIKE 11 which are very fast MIKE Zero 2 MIKE Zero Start Page E la x Fie view Window Help la x tsalsBelstr aer gZ Project Explorer x F 3 6 NapaFD PH Software eo lt DBase Modelling the World of Water Mars N a aE Mike11 AA 4 y 7 x DR Napa Valley FD Model SHE kon N Rd A Results E Napa Valley FD Model 0l Existing Proj E pen an Existing Project E Groundwater Name created Modified Location Irrigation NapaFD 28 09 2006 Today C 7 BD and Sales BD Visits 2006 Canada Se mR Napa_VineyardIrrigation dfso Odense2003 hrs 31 10 2006 Today C 5 Testing MSHE projects Odensee mshe_flo_test 06 10 2006 24 10 2006 C 3 TechSupport Barge mshe_flo_te
344. t every integer multiple of the MIKE SHE time step If the Smooth option is not activated the flows to MOUSE can stop after a number of MOUSE time steps because the calculated flow volume exceeds the volume of the MIKE SHE SZ Overland grid cells The Smooth option tries to use a reduced flow rate which equals the available volume coupling time Dynamic_Coupling Specifications Limit_Inflow 0 Specify 1 if the inflow to MOUSE should be limited so the MOUSE vol ume inflow does not exceed a speci fied fraction of the maximum MOUSE volume This is used to avoid instabilities due to high pres sure Limit_Outflow 0 Specify 1 if the outflow from MOUSE should be limited so the MOUSE vol ume outflow doesn t come below a specified fraction of the maximum MOUSE volume This is used to avoid instabilities due to drying neg ative volume Inflow_Limitations Max VolFac_Links 0 99 Max VolFac_Manholes 0 99 EndSect Inflow_Limitations Outflow_Limitations MinVolFac_Links 0 05 MinVolFac_Manholes 0 05 EndSect Outflow_Limitations The inflow and outflow fractions are specified here EndSect Dynamic_Coupling_Specifications Drainage modelling with MOUSE 185 Using MIKE SHE with MOUSE Table 11 1 MsheMouse pfs file format and description Line item Comment No_Of_Storing_reaches 2 Storing_Reaches Storing_Reach_1 No_Of_Links 2 LinkName_1
345. t function TAN returns the tangent of the angle X in radians COTAN X Cotangent function COTAN returns the cotangent of the angle X in radians ATAN X ArcTangent function EXP X Exponential function LN X Natural logarithmic function LOG X 10 based logarithmic function SINH X Sinus Hyperbolic function COSH X Cosinus Hyperbolic function AUTOCAL 369 Auto Calibration Tool Table 27 3 Mathematical functions used by the equation parser X and Y are variable names Syntax Function INTPOW X Y The INTPOW function raises X to an integer power Y e g INTPOW 2 3 8 Note that the result of INTPOW 2 3 4 8 as well POW X Y The POW function raises X to any power Y ABS X Absolute value SIGN X SIGN X returns 1 if X lt 0 1 if X gt 0 0 if X 0 TRUNC X Discards the fractional part of a number e g TRUNC 3 2 is 3 MIN X Y Minimum of X and Y e g MIN 2 3 is 2 MAX X Y Maximum of X and Y e g Max 2 3 is 3 As an example suppose Y is to be expressed as a function of the variables X1 X2 and X3 as 5 times variable X1 minus the square of variable X2 plus 2 times the natural logarithm of X3 the Equation field for Y should be written 5 X 1 SQR X2 2 LN X3 Comment Optionally a comment can be written for the parameter 27 4 Objective Functions On the Objective Functions page Figure 27 5 the properties for calcula tion of comparison statistics are s
346. t value is specified the Base Unit for the sorption parameter applies If a dfs2 file is used you specify the unit in the file UZ RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS The next lines specify the sorption coefficients K1 K4 valid in the unsaturated zone for the relevant sorption description as shown in Table 13 11 These parameters are specified using a number of data elements where each of these consists of a lower depth and the sorption constant either given as a uniform value or as a distributed value in a dfs2 file The value specified in a data element applies from the soil surface in case it s the first input or the lower depth of the previous data element to the lower depth for the data element The depths are specified in metres below ground m AAA EAE4 44 44 4 4444444 AAAKARKE RE AE AERA AE RE RE RL KEK LK KAKA KA KK Process identification The second process begins also with the process identi fication is specified with its name and the process type 1 2 3 4 in this case degradation 4 The process in this Species definitions Current species degradable Temperature dependent decay Temp dep decay T F T Ref temp deg C 10 0 Temp decay exponent 0 079 Water content dependent decay WC dep decay T F T WC decay exponent 0 7 Process name Decay example is decay which depends on temperature and Proc t
347. ta elements Dispersion Source locations 0 RIVER INPUT PART River dispersion disp coeff Source locations No of data elements 0 PRECIPITATION INFILTRATION INPUT PART Source locations No of data elements 0 AA AAA AEAAEAAE AE KEL AE AE KER KAKA AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH KL KA HK SPECIES DEPENDENT DATA AAA AAAEA AEE AE AKE KALA EAE HALL AR H AH AH KEKE AH AH AH AH KAKA KAKA K Species Species name Partikel SZ INPUT PART No of data elements Lower layer Concentration Lower layer Concentration Lower layer Concentration Lower layer Concentration Lower layer Concentration Lower layer Concentration Initial Conditions PT partikler100 dfs2 1 PT partiklerl0 dfs2 1 PT partiklerl0 dfs2 1 PT partiklerl0 dfs2 1 Source strength No of data elements 0 Dual Porosity Mass Transfer Coeff No of data elements 0 Z INPUT PART Initial conditions No of data elements 0 Source strength No of data elements 0 OVERLAND INPUT PART Initial Conditions Solubility Initial Conc and Solubility Source strength 222 MIKE SHE Example input files No of data elements RIVER INPUT PART Initial conc o of data elements 0 Initial Conditions Source Strength PRI ION INFIL ECIPITA RA o of data e
348. tarted by the com mand Working with Water Quality 195 Using the Fully Integrated AD Module MShe_AdvectionDispersion projectname tsf apv A window similar to the Water Movement simulation showing the simula tion status will appear Note The AD executable cannot be executed from the MZLaunch utility because it still uses the 2005 apv command MIKE SHE AD can also be executed in batch mode simply by writing the above command in a bat file and executing this file by either doubling clicking on it or typing the name in a DOS prompt This allows you to run successive simulations of various models MIKE SHE AD may also be executed together with the AUTOCAL rou tine allowing you to do automatic parameter optimization See the MIKE Zero AUTOCAL user guide for details and just exchange the fsf file with the tsf file in the description 13 3 Working with the TSF Files The input data file for a simulation with the AD module is called the trans port set up file tsf This is a text file which contains all relevant informa tion for the simulation and it should be located in the project home directory The tsf file is basically the same file as the one used in previous versions of MIKE SHE with two major changes e results are now read from dfs2 and dfs3 files produced by the latest version of MIKE SHE e As the dfs2 and dfsO files can contain multiple items you must spec ify the item number along with the file name
349. teady state models Parameter Name Type Value enable canyon Boolean On exchange Simplified Overland Flow Options Avoiding the redistribution of ponded water In the standard version of the Simplified Overland Flow solver the solver calculates a mean water depth for the entire flow zone using the available overland water from all of the cells in the flow zone During the Overland flow time step ET and infiltration are calculated for each cell and lateral flows to and from the zone are calculated At the end of the time step a new average water depth is calculated which is assigned to all cells in the flow zone In practice this results in a redistribution of water from cells with ponded water e g due to high rainfall or low infiltration to the rest of the flow zone where cells potentially have a higher infiltration capacity To avoid this redistribution an option has been added where the solver only calcu lates overland flow for the cells that can potentially produce runoff that is only in the cells for which the water depth exceeds the detention storage depth Parameter Name Type Value only simple OL Boolean On from ponded Routing simple overland flow directly to the river In the standard version of the Simplified Overland Flow solver the water is routed from higher zones to lower zones within a subcatchment Thus overland flow generated in the upper zone is ro
350. ted using the bilinear method with the 4 nearest points to the centre of the cell If the dfs2 file is not aligned with the model grid then the file is treated exactly the same as if it were a shp file or a set of distributed point values The geologic model is interpolated to the model grid during preprocess ing by a 2 step process 1 The horizontal geologic distribution is interpolated to the horizon tal model grid If Geologic Units are specified then the integer grid codes are used to interpret the geologic distribution of the model grid If distributed parameters are specified then the individual parameters are interpolated to the horizontal model grid as outlined above 2 The vertical geologic distribution is interpolated to the vertical model grid In each horizontal model grid cell the vertical geologic model is scanned downwards and the soil properties are assigned to the cell based on the average of the values found in the cell weighted by 48 MIKE SHE Adding Groundwater Se the thickness of each of the zones present Thus for example if there were 3 different geologic layers in a model cell each with a different Specific Yield then the Specific Yield of the model cell would be S S 1 2 Sy2 Z2 Sy3 Z3 3 1 Zy 2 where z is the thickness of the geologic layer within the numerical cell Conductivity values Hydraulic conductivity is a special parameter because it can vary by many orders of magni
351. tem Appears when this Type process is selected Code 21 total irrigation UZ ET Irrigation 26 irrigation from river M11 UZ ET Irrigation 28 irrigation from wells SZ UZ ET Irrigation 22 irrigation from external source UZ ET Irrigation 23 irrigation index UZ ET Irrigation 24 irrigation shortage UZ ET Irrigation 25 irrigation total demand UZ ET Irrigation 153 sprinkler irrigation UZ ET Irrigation 154 drip and sheet irrigation UZ ET Irrigation 27 ground water extraction for irrigation SZ UZ ET Irrigation 106 depth to phreatic surface negative SZ 101 head elevation in saturated zone SZ 107 seepage flow SZ overland SZ the flow up from SZ onto the topography 108 seepage flow overland SZ negative SZ the flow down into the saturated zone 113 3D UZ recharge to SZ negative SZ NegPrec 102 groundwater flow in x direction SZ a flow rate e g in m s 103 groundwater flow in y direction SZ a flow rate e g in m s 88 MIKE SHE Run Statistics Im Table 6 1 Available output items for gridded data and time series Key to symbols ET Evapotranspiration OL Finite Difference Overland Flow SubOL Sub catchment based Overland Flow UZ Richards or Gravity Unsaturated flow 2LUZ 2 Layer Unsaturated Water Balance SZ Finite Difference Saturated Zone flow LR Linear Reservoir groundwater AD Advection Dispersion Water Quality PT Particle Tracking Data Output Item Appears when
352. ters Stationary Real Parameters can vary spatially but do not usually vary dur ing the simulation such as hydraulic conductivity If such parameters do vary in time then you must divide the simulation into time periods and run the each time period as a separate simulation starting each simulation from the end of the previous simulation This is most easily accomplished using the Hot Start facility which is found in the Simulation Period dia logue The spatial distribution of stationary real parameters are entered using the Stationary Real Data dialogue Time Varying Real Parameters Many spatial parameters are time dependent such as precipitation rate In this case both a spatial distribution as well as a time series for each cell in the model must be defined Spatially distributed parameters that also vary in time are entered using the Time varying Real Data dialogues 19 1 Using MIKE SHE with ArcGIS MIKE SHE has been designed to work smoothly with ArcGIS files In most cases distributed data can be linked directly to shape files created by ArcGIS or any other application The type of shape file depends on the Working with Spatial Data 283 Spatial Data in MIKE SHE type of data Distributed data such as initial water levels can be input as point and line themes whereas spatial data that is referenced to a time series such as precipitation can be added as a polygon theme In this case each polygon can be assigned a
353. ters in the model parameter files associ ated with the numerical engines given in Table 27 1 The model parameter file types are shown in Table 27 2 For some simulation models only one model parameter file is associated whereas other models e g MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE include several model parameter files AUTOCAL also supports manipulation of parameters in ASCII files that do not follow the MIKE Zero PFS format In the Model parameter files table all files that include parameters to be manipulated in the AUTOCAL run should be specified Table 27 2 Model parameter files supported by AUTOCAL Model parameter file File extension MIKE SHE Flow Model she MIKE SHE UZ Soil Properties UZS MIKE SHE ET Vegetation Parameters etv 364 AutoCal Simulation Specifications a Table 27 2 Model parameter files supported by AUTOCAL Model parameter file File extension MIKE 11 RR Parameters rll MIKE 11 HD Parameters hd11 MIKE 11 River Network Parameters nwk11 MIKE 11 AD Parameters ad11 MIKE 11 WQ Parameters wqll MIKE 11 ST Parameters still MIKE 11 ECOLAB ecolab11 MIKE 11 Cross Section Resistance Numbers xnslir MIKE 21 Flow Model m21 MIKE 21 Flow Model FM m21fm MIKE 21 Spectral Waves FM SW MIKE 21 Boussinesq Waves bw MIKE 21 Nearshore Spectral Waves nsw MIKE 21 Elliptic Mild Slope Waves ems MIKE 21 Parabolic Mild Slope Waves
354. the AD module including all the water quality processes and the PT module is available through the command line interface in the same manner as it was available in the 2005 Release This is described in Using the Fully Integrated AD Module V p 195 and Working with Particle Tracking V p 227 Working with Water Quality 191 LEA Simulating Water Quality 12 1 Flow Storing Requirements Solute transport calculations in MIKE SHE AD are based on the water fluxes from a MIKE SHE Water Movement WM simulation To ensure that all the needed WM result data types are stored you have to specify that results should be stored for an AD simulation See Storing of Results V 2 p 135 The WM data should be stored frequently enough to describe the dynam ics of the flow The selected storing frequencies of flow results will usu ally be a compromise between limitations in disk space and resolution of the flow dynamics The maximum computational time steps in a transport simulation are often restricted by advective and dispersive stability criteri ons However the transport time step cannot be greater than the flow stor ing time step in each component 12 2 Storing of Results The simulated concentration distribution in each component as well as the mass balances and fluxes will be stored in dfs2 and dfs3 files with differ ent time steps Besides these result files the program also writes output to the error log which describes errors
355. the Grid Editor In the event that you are using scanned paper maps if you maps are not rectilinear or are not correctly georeferenced then you can use the Image Rectifer see on line help under MIKE Zero to align your image to the coordinate system you are using 3 2 Selecting the Processes MIKE SHE allows you to simulate all of the processes in the land phase of the hydrologic cycle That is all of the process involving water movement after the precipitation leaves the sky Precipitation falls as rain or snow depending on air temperature snow accumulates until the temperature MIKE SHE Getting Started 37 Building a MIKE SHE Model 3 3 increases to the melting point whereas rain immediately enters the dynamic hydrologic cycle Initially rainfall is either intercepted by leaves canopy storage or falls through to the ground surface Once at the ground surface the water can now either evaporate infiltrate or runoff as overland flow If it evaporates the water leaves the system However if it infiltrates then it will enter the unsaturated zone where it will be either extracted by the plant roots and transpired added to the unsaturated storage or flow downwards to the water table If the upper layer of the unsaturated zone is saturated then additional water cannot infiltrate and overland flow will be formed This overland flow will follow the topography downhill until it reaches an area where it can infiltrate or unt
356. the MIKE ZERO user interface The items in the dfs files have to have the right data types to be used by MIKE SHE AD These are listed in Table 13 2 Working with Water Quality 199 Using the Fully Integrated AD Module The units can be set in the dfs file In case a constant value is specified this value has the base unit Table 13 2 Input data types their correct EUM data types and the base unit which is used when specifying constant values Input Data EUM autotype in dfs file Base unit for constant values effective porosity Porosity Coefficient fraction between 0 and 1 matrix porosity Porosity Coefficient fraction between 0 and 1 diffusivity SZ UZ Dispersion Velocity Fac m tor source location Grid Codes integer codes diffusion coefficient OC Dispersion coefficient m s River Input for layers is given in the format No of data elements 2 Lower layer 1 Parameter MAPS File dfs2 2 Lower Layer i 99 Parameter 0 01 This should be interpreted as if there are two sets of data input where each set is for a particular layer interval The first set applies from layer 1 to the Lower layer for the first set The next one will apply from the lower layer of the previous set 1 until the Lower layer specified The data sets must at least cover all layers i e the user must specify a value equal or larger than the number of layers in the model as th
357. the geographical posi tion and orientation of the grid as well as the projection zone Edit Properties There are three options for specifying the geographical position of the ori gin of the grid e specify in latitude and longitude and input in degrees minutes and sec onds e specify in latitude and longitude and input in decimal degrees Grid Editor 315 LAA Edit e specify in Universal Transverse Mercator UTM coordinates by giv ing the UTM system and the Fasting and Northing of the origin in meters When you select a general UTM zone the zone number is required When using local zones as for example Hong Kong Grid HKG then the zone number is not required The geographical position of the origin of the grid is defined as the center point in the first grid cell j K 0 0 Figure 22 1 Definition of Origo Furthermore the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified This is defined as the angle between true north and the y axis of the grid measured clockwise A mnemonic way of remembering this definition is by thinking of NYC which normally means New York City but which for our purpose means from North to the Y axis Clockwise see the figure below True north Orient Model north Figure 22 2 Definition of grid orientation 316 MIKE Zero Time Steps a oa 22 2 Time Steps The Time Steps dialog is used to manage the time axis of the file Edit Properties E xi Ti
358. the pipe leakage coefficient and the aqui fer hydraulic conductivity In this case the leakage coefficient is calcu lated as a series connection of the pipe leakage coefficient C and the 180 MIKE SHE Se average leakage coefficient of the aquifer grid cell C The average leakage coefficient of the grid cell is calculated assuming that the exchange of water between the pipe and the grid cell is both vertical and horizontal The leakage coefficient calculation does not calculate a detailed flow path based on a geometric calculation since a MOUSE pipe can be located anywhere in a grid cell Instead an average vertical and horizontal flow distance is used based on 1 4 of the vertical and horizontal cell dimensions Thus K K 2 z 11 Cag Caga Cagv TE 11 5 where K and are the horizontal and vertical hydraulic conductivities respectively and Ax and Az are the horizontal and vertical cell dimensions The final leakage coefficient is then calculated as the harmonic mean of both the aquifer leakage coefficient and the piper leakage coefficient 1 1 1 a 11 6 Cc Ca r C D Hydraulic Radius MIKE SHE uses the inner hydraulic radius if the flow is from MOUSE to MIKE SHE Whereas it uses the outer hydraulic radius if the flow is from MIKE SHE to MOUSE The hydraulic radii are calculated by MOUSE MIKE SHE Overland flow to MOUSE LINKS If the MOUSE links are defined as open channels then MIK
359. the program to show a progress window Otherwise the execution will be silent The pfs_file_name variable is the input file for the MODFLOW extractor The input file has the standard MIKEZero Pfs format The input fields of the file are explained below Lines starting with are not read but rather can be used as comment lines Note The l around the name file name and the path of the specified file name must be relative to the location of the pfs file Below is an example pfs file for the MODFLOW data extractor program MIKESHE_ModflowExtraction FileVersion 1 ModflowModel NameFileName XMin 300 YMin 400 XMax 3032 YMax 1132 TimeUnit DAYS LengthUnit METER EndSect MIKESHE ModflowExtraction MODFLOW 96 Airport5 nam MIKE SHE Getting Started 57 Building a MIKE SHE Model The ModflowModel variable should be changed to MODLFOW 2 000 if the MODFLOW model is a MODFLOW 2000 model The NameFileName is the name of the MODFLOW name file that con tains all of the references to the other input files The minimum and maxi mum X Y coordinates are used to determine the exact spatial coordinates of the nodal points The TimeUnit and LengthUnit variables are not currently used but must be input Valid values for TimeUnit are DAYS HOURS MINUTES and SECONDS Valid values for LengthUnit are METER and FEET Note MODFLOW does not have any interna
360. the same model and even in the same coupling reach This allows you to update only the parts of your model where the overbank spilling is important and leave the Flood code option intact elsewhere Common MIKE 11 Error Messages There are a number of common MIKE 11 error messages that you are likely to encounter when using MIKE 11 with MIKE SHE Error No 25 At the h point the water depth greater than 4 times max depth This error message essentially says that your MIKE 11 model is unstable It frequently occurs when there is an inconsistency in your bed elevations at the branch junctions For example if the bed elevation of the main branch is much greater than the side branch then the water piles up and causes this error Warning No 47 At the h point the water level as fallen below the bottom of the slot x times This warning message essentially says that your MIKE 11 model is unsta ble The slot is a numerical trick that keeps a very small amount of water in the MIKE 11 cross section when the river is dry So when the water level falls below the slot it implies that your river has dried out This warning frequently occurs when there is either an inconsistency in your bed elevations or there is an error in your boundary conditions that is keeping water from entering the system Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 175 oa Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE 176 MIKE SHE DRAINAGE MODELLING WITH MOUSE 177
361. the specific PT run In the absence of the user interface these codes can be found by checking in the 235 Working with Particle Tracking projectname PTRES file that is generated by the particle tracking simula tion The output retrieval program filters the results of a PT simulation and writes the result to shape files The different filters each have an option All which is checked first If this option is true the program will NOT check further input for the filter If the option is false the program will for the filters related to destination types read the number of inputs zero or positive and then read for each of these a section containing the appropriate filter values sink type registration code well name well field name 14 5 3 Example PT Output Retrieval File PT_OR The following file can be found in the Examples sub directory in your installation directory Created 2004 08 6 22 51 35 DLL id C WINDOWS System32 pfs2000 dl1 PFS version Mar 3 2004 21 35 12 PT_OR_input VersionNumber 2 PTRESfile name aarhus_n02_scel aarhus_n02_scel PTRES PTORfile name aarhus_n02_scel aarhus_n02_scel separatefiles True separatelayers Tru removedByWell Tru SpatialFilter WholeModel true nlaymin 1 nlaymax 10 EndSect SpatialFilter TemporalFilter AllReleaseTimes tru ReleaseDateMin 1990 12 1 0 O ReleaseDateMax 2900 1 1
362. tical information a a a Oe Done Help On the Statistics dialog you can see the all item Names all item Mini mum values all item Maximum values all item Mean values all item Standard Deviation values and the number of missing values delete val ues for the Entire Data Set 278 MIKE Zero Statistics Im You can also specify use Sub Set clicking on the Current Sub Set To specify a different Sub Set please refer to Select Sub Set Time Series Editor 279 Tools 280 MIKE Zero WORKING WITH SPATIAL DATA 281 282 MIKE SHE Using MIKE SHE with ArcGIS on 19 SPATIAL DATA IN MIKE SHE Spatial data includes all model data that can be location dependent for example precipitation rates and soil parameters There are two basic types of spatial data in MIKE SHE Real and Integer Real data is generally used to define model parameters such as hydraulic conductivity Integer data is generally used to define parameter zones Thus model cells with the same integer value can be associated with a time series or other characteristic Furthermore real spatial parameters can be distinguished by whether or not they vary in time At the moment Integer zones cannot vary with time Thus spatial parameters can be divided into the following e Stationary Real Parameters e Time Varying Real Parameters and e Integer Grid Codes Stationary Real Parame
363. ties only At other locations in the parameter space the sensitivity coef ficients may be very different especially if the simulation model is highly non linear in its parameter output interaction 27 11 3 Optimisation output If the parameter optimisation option is chosen AUTOCAL produces a result file that contains the results of the optimisation The file is named MyAutocalRun_Optimisation dat and is saved in the working directory The result file is tab delimited and can be directly imported into a spread sheet In the log file a summary of the optimisation results is written including the best parameter set and corresponding objective function value for each iteration loop When the stopping criterion of the optimisation run is met AUTOCAL performs a final model run using the optimised parameters The result of this run is written in the last line of the MyAutocalRun dat file The model parameter files contain the optimised parameter values Shuffled Complex Evolution and Population Simplex Evolution For each iteration loop performed in the SCE or PSE optimisation the result file MyAutocalRun_Optimisation dat contains the population of parameter sets and corresponding objective functions sorted with respect to the aggregated objective function value This file should be used as the initial sample file for a subsequent SCE or PSE optimisation that contin ues the optimisation 27 12 Error handling When AUTOCAL performs a model
364. time format follows the ISO standard 8601 which is YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Between the date and time there can be a Space or the letter I Following the time there must be a Tab and each of the data items must be separated by Tabs Note that the date and time format shown in the example above is not the same as in the tabular view and therefore you cannot paste the example data into that view Files saved in this format can have any extension except dfsO and dfs 17 8 Import from ASCII File This functionality can be used to import time series data from an ASCII file The data set can then be saved as a dfs file or exported to an ASCH file again Please refer to File Formats To import time series data go to File New and select Time Series under the MIKE Zero heading This will open the New Time Series dia log Choose From Ascii File and press OK 270 MIKE Zero Import from ASCII File LEA Time Series Editor Import from ascii r Description File name en Delimitor Tab Time description Non E quidistant Calendar Axis x I Treat consecutive delimiters as one Start Time 12 07 2001 14 12 54 T Ignore delimiters in begining of line Time Step 0 days IV Deliminator between time and first item 000010 hour min sec Delete value 1e 030 9 fraction of sec IV Time Series Export ASCII Format m Preview _ 3 a 5 e Cana
365. tire Data Set C Current Sub Set Time Series Type Data interpreted as Instantaneous data t Maximum Gap Length J Use Max gap length Do nat fill gaps longer than fo Secone Cancel Help You can choose where to interpolate If you select Entire Data Set the interpolation will be done in the entire data of the currently selected item the one that corresponds to the current cell selected in the Tabular View 276 MIKE Zero Select Sub Set Se If you select Current Sub Set the interpolation will be done in the Current Sub Set You can also select at this moment the Sub Set to use using the tab Sub Series that appears when you select Current Sub Set Please refer to Select Sub Set You can also specify which items to interpolate using the Item Range tab that appears when Current Sub Set is enable in the Interpolation Dialog Please refer to Select Sub Set In the Interpolation tab you can also select how the data is interpreted Since each TS Type has a different physical meaning the interpolation is handled in a different way for all the 4 types Only Instantaneous Accu mulated Step Accumulated and Mean Step Accumulated TS Types are supported You can also specify the maximum allowed gaps missing values so that interpolation is done Activating Use Max Gap length you can specify the maximum allowed gap duration If a gap bigger than the length specified is found interpolation
366. tive parameters are retained in the subsequent parameter optimisation Instead of making anew AUTOCAL setup the same setup as used in the sensitiv ity analysis can be applied simply by setting the insensitive parameters to constant values A model simulation in AUTOCAL can be defined as a sequence of indi vidual model runs AUTOCAL supports execution of all the MIKE Zero model engines In this case the model simulation setup file is given as input In addition AUTOCAL enables execution of any executable exe or batch bat file In this case the executable as well as the corresponding list of arguments are given as input Whether AUTOCAL is used for parameter optimisation sensitivity analy sis or scenario management the performance of the model simulation given the specified parameter set should be assessed This is done by cal culating statistical performance measures These measures are typically comparison statistics that compare measurements or in general target val ues with corresponding simulated values For calculating the comparison statistics AUTOCAL requires that simula tion results and corresponding observations are given as time series in DFS0 files If the output from a model engine is not explicitly given in DFSO format a processing of simulation results is required to transform the simulation results at measurement locations into DFSO format This post processing is then part of the sequence of model runs defined in
367. tothe river 156 Stationary Real Parameters 283 Statistics 4 wach wa oe 278 P Stopping criteria 383 Palette kana ee ek ex BA Ble ad 322 Storing Time Steps 72 Parameter perturbation 379 Pareto front 374 T Partickle Tracking Tabular View 260 321 Execute 232 Template file 365 Particle Tracking 227 Time Varying Real Parameters 283 Post processing of model results 363 Toolbars 328 PT Output Retrieval 234 Transformation functions 374 Limitations eae 26 84 235 Triangular Interpolation 296 PT Simulations 228 TS Types graphical representation 262 Output oe 04 eee dr ehr 232 TSF file ausm ars Gl doe GA 196 P OR File 2 su bw de She a 235 Example 2444 404 Se eS 219 Example 22 42 484 236 395 Se Index U Unsaturated and Saturated Zone Coupling 2 228 amp Ba Sey GOs 46 UZ Classification 45 V Variable parameter 368 Veritical Interpolation 49 W Water Balances BatchMode 129 Custom ua ara Ga ar ea ara ae 139 Standard Types 136 TYPSS 2 2 22 2 ede Ee er 130 Weighted sum 373 Weighted sum of absolute values 373 Weighted sum of squares 373 Well Fields 228 WM Requirements 227 X XTSF file 2 au ws sea Hr 212 Z ZOOM 2 2 2 2 22008
368. tude over a space of a only few meters or even centime ters This necessitates some special interpolation strategies Horizontal Interpolation The horizontal interpolation of hydraulic con ductivity interpolates the raw data values Thus in Step 1 above when interpolating point values that range over several orders of magnitude such as hydraulic conductivity the interpolation methods will strongly weight the larger values That is small values will be completely over shadowed by the large values In fact the interpolation in this case should be done on the logarithm of the value and then the cell values recalculated Until this option is available in the user interface you should interpolate conductivities outside of MIKE SHE using for example Surfer Alternatively the point values could be input as logarithmic values and the Grid Calcula tor Tool in the MIKE SHE Toolbox can be used to convert the logarith mic values in the dfs2 file to conductivity values Vertical Interpolation In Step 2 above the geologic model is scanned down and interpreted to the model cell Although horizontal conduc tivity can vary by several orders of magnitude in the different geologic layers that are found in a model cell the water will flow horizontally based on the highest transmissivity Thus the averaging of horizontal conductivity can be down the same as in the example for Specific Yield above Vertical flow however depends mostly on th
369. turated zone Storage depth inte grated Saturated Zone Storage layer s Saturated zone Storage each or specified layer Map output Saturated Zone Storage Distributed output Saturated zone Storage depth integrated Map output Saturated Zone Storage layer s Distributed output Saturated zone Storage each or specified layer Below is an extract from the water balance configuration file to illustrate how a water balance is assembled Unsaturated Zone Unsaturated zone component water balance Infiltration uz qh uz qhmp uz qrech uz qrechmp uz qgwfeedbackuz Deficit Change uz duzdeftuz uzszstocorr WolTypeDefinition Name UZ DisplayName Description NoGroups 6 Group Group Evaporation uz qeuz Group Transpiration uz qtuz Group Recharg Group Group Error uz uzwblerr EndSect WblTypeDefinition 138 MIKE SHE Making Custom Water Balances LAA 8 5 Making Custom Water Balances All of the water balances in the Water Balance Type combobox of the Postprocessing dialogue are defined in the water balance configuration file You can add extra items to this list by defining additional water bal ances at the end of the configuration file To illustrate how you could add an additional water balance type the table below describes the format for each line of the water balance type defini tion The example is for an extra water
370. u cad dea a De ur ae 376 27 5 2 P ramielers 42 624d we a bom wa na eee eee ERE 376 27 6 Sensitivity Analysis 2 ou 2 oe whe we sata aa aa a N Ik ah 377 27 6 1 Sensitivity analysis method 377 27 6 2 Local sensitivity analysis 22 44 bees 4404 oo ee eee 377 27 7 Parameter Optimisation 020 000020 379 27 7 1 Optimisation method 0204 380 27 7 2 Shuffled Complex Evolution method 380 27 7 3 Population Simplex Evolution method 384 27 8 Save Output Files zen ed en RS eee 386 27 9 Office Grid un 5 u a an a a 4 odie en a eee he RR KS a ah 387 27 10 Start AUTOCAL Simulation 2 22 none 389 ZEILE Auen ane 2 ee a ee Ne ee Be re OP AE ser an Bel ea Be eee 389 27 11 1 General output files x zu Bee 54 mn ann era a at 389 27 11 2 Sensitivity analysis output 2m nn 390 27 11 3 Optimisation output 2 au ee 4 ke aaa erh er 391 27 12 Error handling es ee 42 eek oe 2 0 a sed net Gee ee De eee 391 Index ase 244 ww oH ed ee en ee de 393 14 MIKE Zero MIKE SHE GETTING STARTED 16 MIKE SHE Se 1 INTRODUCTION In the hydrological cycle water evaporates from the oceans lakes and riv ers from the soil and is transpired by plants This water vapour is trans ported in the atmosphere and falls back to the earth as rain and snow It infiltrates to the groundwater and discharges to streams and river
371. ude area normalized flows storage depths storage changes and model errors for individual model components e g unsaturated zone evapotranspiration etc A water balance can be generated at a variety of spatial and temporal scales and in a number of different formats including dfsO time series files dfs2 grid series files and ASCII text output suitable for importing to Microsoft Excel You can also automatically create a picture that visual izes the interrelationships between the various water balance components The water balance utility can be run from within the MIKE Zero interface or from a MSDOS batch file The batch functionality allows you to calcu late water balances automatically after a MIKE SHE simulation that is also run in batch mode see Figure 8 1 Total Error Precipitation Vil anopy Storage ch OL gt Wer M vn anspir ation 39 s Base flow to Riv o 178 Accumulated waterbalance from 1 1 1981 12 00 00 PM to 3 31 1981 12 00 00 PM Data type Storage depth milimeter Flow Result File C MIKEZero Examples MIKE_SHE Karup Karup Karup Title Karun setup Text Figure 8 1 Graphical water balance output example 8 1 Creating a water balance Before you can create a water balance for a MIKE SHE WM simulation you must have saved the water balance data during the simulation To save or not save the water balance data is specified in the Storing of Results 121 LEA Using the Water Balance
372. ulation subdirectory should help you identify why the MIKE SHE setup failed to preprocess If the MIKE SHE setup successfully preprocesses you should also look at the preprocessed data on the Processed data tab and the YourSetup_PreProcessor_Print log file in your simulation subdirectory to make sure you are comfortable with how the preprocessor has set up the Additional Options 151 Extra Parameters 9 5 drainage reference system You can search for Making setup of Specified MIKE 11 Reaches For Drainage in the YourSetup_PreProcessor_Print log file to find the start of the section that details the drainage reference sys tem Time varying drainage parameters In projects where you want to simulate the build out of a drainage network over time or changes in the drainage time constants over time then you can use this set of extra parameters Without this set of extra parameters you would have to hot start your simulation at regular time intervals with the new drainage parameters The time varying drains are also allowed to shift between layers How ever if the drainage level goes above or below the model the level will be adjusted and a warning is issued to the log file Note The SOR solver does not allow drainage in any layer except the top layer and the drain level will be adjusted accordingly Note If you specify time varying drainage parameters you will not be able to use any of the drainage routing methods that d
373. ult to give rule of thumb val ues for the dispersivities Recent field experiments on sol ute transport though indicate that the longitudinal dispersivity should be in the range of 1 or less of the travel distance the transversal horizontal dispersivity should be at least 50 times less than this and the transver sal vertical dispersivity should be even 2 or more times less again Dispersivities are specified in the unit metres In the example below we assume there is no dispersion option 1 and no values are needed No of data elements Lower Layer Disp alfa LHH ity dfs2 1 Disp alfa THH Disp alfa TVH Disp alfa LVV Disp alfa THV Dispersivities 1 99 MAPS SZDispersiv 0 05 In case the option 2 isotropic is chosen the user has to specify the horizontal longitudinal and transversal disper sivity As shown below input for the three other compo nents is not needed as these are only used when using option 3 The values can be given as a constant value or as a map using dfs2 files 202 MIKE SHE Working with the TSF Files Se Table 13 3 MIKE SHE AD tsf file format and description continued Line item Comment If dual porosity is not used or if dual porosity is used Lower Layer SZ matrix porosity ity dfs2 1 No of data elements No of data elements Matrix porosity 0 Matrix porosity 1 99 MAPS Matrixporos Solutes in a fractured me
374. um flow area threshold prevents overbank spilling when the river is nearly dry The flow area is calculated by dividing the volume of a water in the coupling reach by the length of the reach The EUM data type is Flow Area Inundation options by Flood Code This section specifies the options available for the Area Inundation using Flood Codes areal source sink V 2 p 239 method of flooding MIKE SHE grid cells from MIKE 11 The Inundation method allows specified model grid cells to be flooded if the MIKE 11 water level goes above the topography of the cell In this case water from MIKE 11 is deposited onto the flooded cell The flood water can then infiltrate or evaporate However overland flow between flooded cells and to the river is not calculated Also the flooded water Surface Water Modelling with MIKE 11 171 Coupling MIKE 11 and MIKE SHE remains as part of the MIKE 11 water balance and is only transferred to MIKE SHE when it infiltrates Inundation areas and their associated Flood codes are specified on a cou pling reach basis Flood Area Option The following three options are available for the Flood Area Option e No Flooding default With the No flooding option the MIKE 11 river is confined between the left and right banks If the water level goes above the bank elevation then the river is assumed to have vertical banks above the defined left and right bank locations No flooding via flood codes will b
375. urce strength river source Q station 1 is given in the species dependent part of the input river source location 2 river source type 1 river source Q station 6 No of data elements Location number Source type Area distribution Location number Source type Area distribution PRECIPITATION INFILTRATION INPUT PART Source locations 2 1 1 MAPS precipita tionSourceLocation dfs2 1 2 1 MAPS precipita tionSourceLocation dfs2 2 HH RL HH HH HH HH HF HH HR HH The most natural way of specifying a source in MIKE SHE AD is to give the precipitation a concentration and let the model itself calculate how this is distributed in the sys tem This option is also valid if you have only included the groundwater part in the simulation The source will then be treated as an infiltration source instead The precipitation is specified in MIKE SHE WM as a combination of the spatial distribution and the temporal variation A precipitation source is specified in a similar way as the extend of each source is determined by its spa tial distribution a dfs2 file with the value 1 in grids included in the source and 0 elsewhere and its concentra tion is specified in a time series data file in the Species Dependent input part Enter the location number 1 2 etc the source type the only valid type is 1 corresponding to a time varying concentration and the spatial distribution as a dfs2 file
376. urface will infiltrate If you use this extra parameter then you can define a depth of overland water that must be exceeded before infiltration will occur This keeps small amounts of pre cipitation from infiltrating and allows them to evaporate instead The calculated infiltration is simply reduced if the remaining overland water depth will be smaller than the specified threshold value Parameter Name Type Value use threshold depth Boolean On for infiltration threshold depth for Float Greater than zero infiltration meter Additional Options 157 a Extra Parameters 9 10 2 Increase infiltration to dry soils In dry soils the rate of infiltration can be higher than the saturated hydrau lic conductivity because capillarity will draw water into the soil and increase the rate of infiltration The Increase Infiltration to Dry Soils extra parameter is available to account for this process when Richards equation is not being used If the actual water content in the root zone is below the field capacity Op then the infiltration capacity is calculated as K K infiltration infiltration InfiltrationFactor if actual InfiltrationFactor YP where 0 0 wp 18 the wilting point water content Otherwise the infiltration capacity is calculated as K K ee infiltration 7 infiltration 0 actual wp Parameter Name Type Value increase infiltra Boolean On tion t
377. uring the simulation whenever you enter the view Alternatively you can select the Refresh button to refresh the plot Note that the HTML plot is regenerated every time you enter the view So if you have a lot of plots and a long simulation then the regeneration can take a long time For information on the statistics see Statistic Calculations V 2 p 161 Working with your Results e 81 Se The Results Tab 5 5 Run Statistics Run statistics can be generated in HTML format for a MIKE SHE simula tion The run statistics table information can be copied and pasted directly into any word processing program such as Microsoft Word or spread sheet such as Microsoft Excel The Run Statistics HTML document includes MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 results for all items included in the MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 detailed time series sections that also include observation data To calculate Run Statistics for a simulation navigate to the Results Tab and the Run Statistics item on the menu tree Press the Generate Statistics button on the Run Statistics window to perform the statistical calculations For some simulations with long simulation periods and or a lot of calibra tion data it can take a while to generate the run statistics After successful completion of the Generate Statistics phase the Run Sta tistics HTML document will be displayed in the window on the Run Sta tistics page see below Start Date End Date D 200
378. uted negative precipitation max depth file name dfs2 file dfs2 file negative precipitation max depth integer item number in dfs2 file dfs2 item greater than zero negative precipitation max layer file name dfs2 file dfs2 file negative precipitation max layer integer item number in dfs file dfs2 item greater than zero Max depth This represents the depth of the root zone plus the thickness of the capillary fringe and is the maximum depth from which negative pre cipitation can be extracted Max layer This is the maximum layer depth from which negative pre cipitation can be extracted 9 3 Precipitation Multiplier To facilitate calibration and sensitivity analysis of recharge in models where measured precipitation is not being used a multiplication factor has been implemented Parameter Name Type Value precipitation factor float greater than zero If this extra parameter is used then all precipitation values are multiplied by the factor prior to being used in MIKE SHE 9 4 SZ Drainage to Specified MIKE 11 H points This section details how to route drainage from the saturated zone drains and paved area runoff directly to MIKE 11 H points within a specified range of chainage values for a specified reach This option is called the Reference Drainage RFD option The RFD option is different from the original drainage function that distributed drainage and paved area dis charges
379. uted to the next lowest flow zone based on the integer code values of the two zones In other 156 MIKE SHE 2 Layer UZ Options Sr words at the beginning of the time step the overland flow leaving the upper zone calculated in the previous time step is distributed evenly across all of the cells in the receiving zone In practice this results in a dis tribution of water from cells in the upstream zone with ponded water e g due to high rainfall or low infiltration to all of the cells in the downstream zone with potentially a large number of those cells having a higher infil tration capacity In this case then overland flow generated in the upper flow zone may never reach the stream network because it is distributed thinly across the entire downstream zone To avoid excess infiltration or evaporation in the downstream zone an option was added that allows you to route overland flow directly to the stream network In this case overland flow generated in any of the over land flow zones is not distributed across the downstream zone but rather it is added directly to the MIKE 11 stream network as lateral inflow Parameter Name Type Value no simple OL rout Boolean On ing 9 10 2 Layer UZ Options 9 10 1 Threshold depth for infiltration The 2 Layer water balance method for the unsaturated zone does not include evapotranspiration from the soil surface Thus even a small amount of water on the ground s
380. ution of any executable exe and batch bat file In this case the name of the executable file or batch file is given in the Model simulation sequence column If the executable file 362 AutoCal Simulation Specifications Se requires some arguments such as an input file name and some simulation options these are written in the Optional arguments column Table 27 1 MIKE Zero numerical engines supported by AUTOCAL Simulation model File extension MIKE SHE Flow Model she MIKE SHE Transport Setup File tsf MIKE 11 Simulation sim11 MIKE 21 Flow Model m21 MIKE 21 Flow Model FM m21fm MIKE 21 Spectral Waves FM SW MIKE 21 Boussinesq Waves bw MIKE 21 Nearshore Spectral Waves nsw MIKE 21 Elliptic Mild Slope Waves ems MIKE 21 Parabolic Mild Slope Waves pms MIKE 21 Non Cohesive Sediments St2 MIKE 21C Flow Model m21c MIKE 3 Flow Model m3 MIKE 3 Flow Model FM m3fm MIKE 3 Particle Spill Analysis npa MIKE Zero Toolbox mzt For post processing of model results AUTOCAL supports extraction of time series from 1D 2D and 3D result files using the MIKE Zero Toolbox By using this toolbox the extraction of time series from DFS1 DFS2 or DFS3 model result files corresponding to the measurement points can be specified The toolbox is saved as a mzt file and can subsequently be exe cuted by AUTOCAL by specifying the mzt file in the Model simulation sequence table
381. uto Calibration Tool is the primary factor determining the proper choice of p In general the larger value of p is chosen the higher the probability of converging into the global optimum but at the expense of a larger number of model simula tions the number of model simulations is virtually proportional to p and vice versa One should choose p to balance the trade off between the robustness of the algorithm and the computing time No of points in complex Number of points in a complex A recommended value for this parameter is 2n 1 where n is the number of calibration parameters No of points in sub complex Number of points in a sub complex A recommended value for this param eter is n 1 where n is the number of calibration parameters No of evaluation steps by each complex Number of evaluation steps taken by each complex before complex shuf fling A recommended value for this parameter is 2n 1 where n is the number of calibration parameters Random seed Random seed used in the optimisation Can be set to any positive integer value Since the SCE method is a probablistic search procedure different optimisation results will be obtained by using different random seeds Apply default parameters If the Apply default parameters option is selected the default algorithmic parameters in Table 27 4 are used Initial sample generation Three different options are available for generation of the initial sample in the
382. utton of the mouse down drag e Insert points allows you to insert new points in the data set just by positioning the mouse pointer where the new point shall be located and click the left button When this mode is enabled the mouse pointer becomes a pencil It s only possible to select this mode in a Non Equi distant Axis type Time Series Editor 261 LEA Properties e Delete points allows you to delete points When this mode is selected when the mouse pointer is near a point the pointer becomes a rubber and clicking on the left button of the mouse deletes the point The point is not deleted from the data but its value is set to empty You can select these four modes through the pop up menu the Edit menu or using the Mode Toolbar IDEAA The first icon enables the Select Points Mode the second one enables the Move Points Mode the third one enables the Insert Points Mode and the fourth one enables the Delete Points Mode When a file is opened all items contained in the file are by default plotted The title contained in the file is used as an header and the item names are displayed in the upper left hand corner of the plot If data are associated with a calendar axis the date and hour is plotted at appropriate intervals If data are associated with a relative axis a normal X axis is shown The axes are scaled automatically so all data presented are shown 17 4 3 Graphical and font settings The appearance
383. vation should be consistent with the cross sections Otherwise the flood plain storage will be inconsistent with the river storage based on the cross sections When you are using Flood Codes you typically specify wide cross sec tions for your rivers The wide cross sections can then account for the increased flood plain storage during flood events MIKE 11 then places water on the MIKE SHE cells that are defined by flood codes if the water level in the river is above the cell topography The flood water is then free to infiltrate or evaporate as determined by MIKE SHE In such flooded cells overland flow is no longer calculated so there is no longer any overland exchange to MIKE 11 in flooded cells Thus the bank elevation is not so critical as long as the cell is flooded However when 166 MIKE SHE MIKE 11 Se the flood recedes the cells revert back to normal overland flow cells and the same considerations apply as if the cells were not flooded namely the bank elevation should be below the topography to ensure that overland flow can discharge to the river link Flood codes are also commonly used for lakes and reservoirs In this case you specify the lake bed bathymetry as the topography or using the Bathymetry option The lake area is defined using flood codes and the MIKE 11 cross sections stretch across the lake MIKE 11 calculates the lake level and floods the lake Overland flow adjacent to the lake inter sect
384. w Window Run Help Den Simulation Reset Model Parameters Table Figure 27 12 Start AUTOCAL simulation 27 11 1 General output files AUTOCAL produces two general output files AUTOCAL 389 Se Auto Calibration Tool e A log file that contains summary information about the AUTOCAL simulation The log file is named MyAutocalRun log where MyAuto calRun is the user specified name for the AUTOCAL auc input file The file is saved in the working directory e A file that contains results from the individual model simulations including the evaluated parameter set and the calculated output meas ures and objective functions The file is named MyAutocalRun dat and is saved in the working directory The result file is tab delimited and can be directly imported into a spreadsheet 27 11 2 Sensitivity analysis output If the sensitivity analysis option is chosen AUTOCAL produces a result file that contains the calculated sensitivity coefficients of each parameter with respect to the different output measures and objective functions The file is named MyAutocalRun_Sensitivity dat and is saved in the working directory The result file is tab delimited and can be directly imported into a spreadsheet Local sensitivity analysis In the case of local sensitivity analysis the result file contains the follow ing e The parameter set and corresponding output measures and objective functions for the point where the local
385. water will infiltrate during wet periods compared to dry periods To complicate matters further the length of the preceding dry period will determine the amount of available storage in the unsaturated zone For example if there has been a long dry summer period then evapotranspiration may have created a large deficit of water in the unsaturated zone that must be satisfied before any water reaches the water table This example shows that infiltration of precipitation is a very dynamic process It depends on a complex interaction between precipitation unsaturated zone soil properties and the current soil moisture content as well as vegetation properties In MIKE SHE the saturated zone is only one component of an integrated groundwater surface water model The saturated zone interacts with all of the other components overland flow unsaturated flow channel flow and evapotranspiration In comparison MODFLOW only simulates the saturated flow All of the other components are either ignored e g overland flow or are simple boundary conditions for the saturated zone e g evapotranspiration On the other hand there are very few difference between the MIKE SHE Saturated Zone numerical engine and MODFLOW In fact they share the same PCG solver The differences that are present are limited to differ ences in the discretisation and to some differences in the way boundary conditions are defined Setting up the saturated zone hydraulic mode
386. where F is the output measure and 0 is the considered model parameter The sensitivity measure is evaluated around a specified parameter set 8 05 0 In AUTOCAL a finite difference approximation is used to evaluate the sensitivity coefficients Three different options are available Forward difference approximation Pi 8y5 8 48 0 F O 02 8n S AO 27 16 Backward difference approximation Ge F 0 05 0 F 0 95 0 A9 0 27 17 i AB Central difference approximation ge F 0 05 0 AO 0 F 0 95 0 A9 0 27 18 f 248 where AQ is the parameter perturbation The calculation of the sensitivity coefficients require n 1 model evalua tions in the case of forward and backward difference approximations and 2n 1 model evaluations when the central difference approximation is applied 378 AutoCal Parameter Optimisation Im Perturbation option The parameter perturbation can be calculated as A fraction of the initial parameter value AB f 0 27 19 A fraction of the parameter interval AB fo upper Pi ower 27 20 where 9 upper and O lower are the specified upper and lower limits of the parameter Perturbation fraction The perturbation fraction is the fraction f of the initial parameter value or the parameter interval depending on the choice of parameter perturbation Calculate covariance matrix If this option is s
387. will not be done for this timestep s 18 3 Select Sub Set Select sub Set is used to specify a sub Set of the data to work with You can access Select sub Set tool from Select Sub Set in the Tools menu by clicking the Select Sub Set icon in the Tools Toolbar the first icon in the Tools Toolbar or by selecting Select Sub Set from the menu that pops up right clicking on the Graphical View Select SubSet e xj Sub Series Item Range Selected Sub Series Select All From To Time 13 07 2001 12 34 27 13 07 2001 12 35 57 Steps fi 10 OK Cancel Help Here you can specify the time where the Sub Set begins and the time where the Sub Set ends or alternatively the timestep where the Sub Set begins and the timestep where the Sub Set ends Clicking on the Select All button selects the entire data set Time Series Editor 277 LAA Tools Clicking on the tab Item Range you can also specify which items belong to the Sub Set xi Sub Series Item Range Selected Items Select All From Item DO O 18 4 Statistics Statistics tool is used to view statistical information for all the items in the timeseries data set You can access Statistics tool from Statistics in the Tools menu or by clicking the Statistics icon in the Tools Toolbar the third icon in the Tools Toolbar Statistics E xi Statistics r Statistics on Entire Data Set C Curent Sub Set m Statis
388. y OBS SIM 27 2 i 1 Standard deviation of residuals St Dev N 1 2 STD OBS SIM AE 27 3 i 1 where OBS and SIM i 1 N are the observed and the corresponding simulated time series respectively Before calculation of the statistics the time series are synchronised that is simulated values are extracted at the same time instants as the available observations using linear interpolation The three statistics are linked via the equation RMSE AE STD 27 4 The statistic AF is a measure of the general offset between measurements and simulations bias whereas STD is a measure of the dynamical corre spondence RMSE is an aggregated measure that includes both bias and dynamical correspondence Besides the basic statistics AUTOCAL includes two event based statis tics Error of maximum value Error of max ErrMax Max OBS Max SIM 27 5 Error of minimum value Error of min ErrMin Min OBS Min SIM 27 6 The maximum and minimum observed and simulated values are extracted in the period defined in the observation file 372 AutoCal Objective Functions Se Weight The weight assigned to the output measure in the objective function that aggregates several output measures The assigned weights should reflect the measurement uncertainties and the correlation between the measure ments That is smaller weights should be given to more uncertain meas urem
389. y is pressed at the right most column the active cell is moved to the first column in the next line This can be used to quickly enter data in a typewriter fashion SHIFT TAB or ENTER works the other way Grid Editor 321 View Cell Format You can define the cell format by selecting Tabular View at the bottom of the drop down menu for View Decimal point Please note that the tabular view always represents numbers with a as the decimal point regardless of which representation is used by the Win dows system You should be aware of this when copying numbers to and from other applications that may use a different notation 23 2 Graphical View 23 3 Palette In the graphical view you may manipulate the data using various tools Inside the graphical view you can zoom and pan There are three ways of zooming in and out from the menu item View from the standard toolbar or clicking the right mouse button while pointing at the graphical view The last action will bring up the following pop up menu Zoom In Zoom Out Previous Zoom Next zoom Refresh v Grid Copy to Clipboard Save to Metafile Save to Bitmap Font In 3D you may select the jk plane the jl plane or the kl plane by selecting the appropriate property page at the bottom of the graphical view Graphical view settings There are a number of graphical view attributes that can be set These are accessible from the menu item View The c
390. your model Im couple to one coupling reach per river link Thus if for example the dis tance between coupling reaches is smaller than half a grid cell you will probably receive an error as MIKE SHE tries to couple both coupling reaches to the same river link The river links are shown on all the maps and the distributed data shown on the River Links map is the Topography UZ Soil Profile Grid Codes Show soil profile properties meter 6150000 Soil Profile Grid Codes 6145000 The unsaturated zone is composed of 1D soil columns If you are using the Richards equation or the Gravity flow method then these columns consist of a vertical grid with various soil properties The Show soil profile prop erties button located just above the map allows you to view a summary of the unsaturated zone grid for each cell If you click on this button the cur sor will change to a target icon When you click on a particular cell an ASCII txt file will be created and opened which contains the summary data Note that the pre processor modifies the vertical discretisation wherever the vertical cell size changes Thus if you have 10 cells of 20cm thick ness followed by 10 cells of 40cm thickness the location of the transition will be moved such that the two cells on either side will be have an equal thickness In this case cells 10 and 11 will both be 15cm MIKE SHE Getting Started 65 LEA Running Your MIKE SHE
391. ype 1 2 3 4 4 water content in the unsaturated zone GENERAL PROCESS PARAMETERS Then follows the lines about the general process param eters defining which species are included in the process and what type of sorption description applies The refer ence temperature Tp for the temperature dependent decay calculation is given in degrees centigrade and the exponent ais dimensionless The exponent for water content dependent decay B is also dimensionless 218 MIKE SHE Example input files Se Table 13 12 MIKE SHE AD xtsf file format and description Line item Comment SZ RELATED PROCESS PARAMETERS The next lines specify the decay process in the ground Half life tim water in terms of half life times Note that it is necessary No of data elements 1 to specify both for porous media transport and fractured Lower layer 999 transport in both fractures and matrix These parameters Sngl por T1 2 sec 864000 0 are specified in a similar manner as e g initial concentra DP T1 2 frac sec 864000 0 tions The input consists of one or more data elements DP T1 2 matr sec 864000 0 Each data element consists of a lower layer input indicat ing the layer down to which the input is valid and the four parameters The data elements should cover all layers in the model i e the last data element

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

NTSC Instruction Manual Manuel d`instruction Manual de    User manual  Arat NS1226.2 holder  ASUS PU551JH User's Manual  MODELLO PLC  Corrigo E - User Manual - Xref controls e-shop  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file